IR1435 1430 Series Service Manual en 4.0

Revision 4.
imageRUNNER 1435/1430
Series
Service Manual
Important Notices
Important Notices
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products.
This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does
not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products.
When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the
need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new
edition of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or
translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the consent of Canon Inc.
Copyright CANON INC. 2015
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Explanation of Symbols
The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual.
Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Check. Remove the claw.
1x
Check visually. Insert the claw.
1x
Important Notices
Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Check a sound. Push the part.
Disconnect the connector. Connect the power cable.
1x
Connect the connector. Disconnect the power cable.
1x
Remove the cable/wire from the Turn on the power.

cable guide or wire saddle.
1x
Install the cable/wire to the cable Turn off the power.

guide or wire saddle.
1x
Remove the screw. Loosen the screw.
1x 1x
Install the screw. Tighten the screw.
1x 1x
Cleaning is needed. Measurement is needed.
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and
mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol, the arrow
indicates the direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit
door, which results in supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".
(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations
of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of
the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and
major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service
Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine.
Contents
Contents
Safety Precautions...............................................................................................1
Laser Safety........................................................................................................................................ 2
Handling of Laser System................................................................................................................... 2
Turn power switch ON.........................................................................................................................3
Power Supply...................................................................................................................................... 4
Toner Safety........................................................................................................................................4
About Toner..........................................................................................................................................4
Handling Adhered Toner........................................................................................................................4
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery............................................................................................. 4
Notes Before it Works Serving............................................................................................................ 5
Points to Note at Cleaning...................................................................................................................5
Notes on Assembly/Disassembly........................................................................................................ 5
1. Product Overview.............................................................................................6
Product Lineup.................................................................................................................................... 7
Host machine........................................................................................................................................7
Option.................................................................................................................................................. 8
Feature................................................................................................................................................ 9
Product feature..................................................................................................................................... 9
Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 10
Product Specifications......................................................................................................................... 10
Productivity (Print speed).....................................................................................................................11
FAX specifications (imageRUNNER 1435iF/1435iF+ Only).................................................................... 13
Paper Type.........................................................................................................................................13
Name of Parts................................................................................................................................... 15
External View......................................................................................................................................15
Cross Sectional View...........................................................................................................................18
Control Panel......................................................................................................................................18
Others................................................................................................................................................ 20
2. Technical Explanation (Device).................................................................... 21

Basic Configuration........................................................................................................................... 22
Functional Configuration...................................................................................................................... 22
Basic Sequence.................................................................................................................................. 22
Original Exposure/Feed System........................................................................................................24
Specifications / Controls / Functions..................................................................................................... 24
Main Configuration Parts..................................................................................................................... 24
Basic Operation.................................................................................................................................. 26
Reader Unit........................................................................................................................................ 34
ADF Unit.............................................................................................................................................35
Original Reverse Control......................................................................................................................37
Delivery Control.................................................................................................................................. 39
Original Detection................................................................................................................................40
Dust Detection Control.........................................................................................................................40
i
Contents
Image Processing............................................................................................................................... 41
Jam Detection.....................................................................................................................................45
Controller System..............................................................................................................................46
Configuration / Function.......................................................................................................................46
Laser Exposure System.................................................................................................................... 48
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 48
Control System Configuration...............................................................................................................49
Laser Lighting Timing Control...............................................................................................................49
Light Intensity Control..........................................................................................................................50
Laser Scanner Motor Control............................................................................................................... 50
Laser OFF Control.............................................................................................................................. 51
Image Formation System.................................................................................................................. 52
Image Formation Process....................................................................................................................53
Basic Sequence.................................................................................................................................. 53
Drum Unit........................................................................................................................................... 54
Developing Assembly.......................................................................................................................... 57
Transfer Unit.......................................................................................................................................60
Fixing System....................................................................................................................................62
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 62
Fixing Temperature Control................................................................................................................. 64
Print Temperature Control....................................................................................................................65
Down Sequence Control...................................................................................................................... 66
User Mode Related to Fixing Grade......................................................................................................67
Paper Loop Amount Control before Fixing.............................................................................................68
Protection Features............................................................................................................................. 69
Pickup Feed System......................................................................................................................... 70
Parts Configuration..............................................................................................................................70
Pickup Block....................................................................................................................................... 72
Cassette Pickup Assembly...................................................................................................................73
Multi-Purpose Pickup Assembly........................................................................................................... 74
Fixing/Registration Assembly............................................................................................................... 74
Duplex/Delivery Assembly................................................................................................................... 74
JAM Detection.................................................................................................................................... 75
External Auxiliary System..................................................................................................................77
Software Counter................................................................................................................................ 77
Fan.................................................................................................................................................... 78
Power Supply..................................................................................................................................... 79
Power-Saving Mode............................................................................................................................ 79
3. Technical Explanation (System)................................................................... 81

Overview of System Management.................................................................................................... 82
Version Upgrade............................................................................................................................... 83
Function Overview ..............................................................................................................................83
ii
Contents
Version Upgrade Using UST................................................................................................................ 84

Version Upgrade via Internet................................................................................................................84
Version Upgrade Using a USB Flash Drive (Released Only in Special Cases).................................. 86
Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM)........................................................................... 88
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 88
Import/Export Procedure from [Settings/Registration] of Remote UI........................................................ 90
Procedure for Exporting/Importing Service Mode Setting Information......................................................94
Monitoring Function (e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote)............................................................ 98
Overview of System............................................................................................................................ 98
Servicing Notes...................................................................................................................................99
Setting Procedure............................................................................................................................... 99
Maintenace....................................................................................................................................... 100
Security Functions...........................................................................................................................102
Security Policy Function.....................................................................................................................102
4. Periodical Service........................................................................................ 106

Periodically Replaced Parts............................................................................................................ 107
Consumable Parts...........................................................................................................................108
Periodical Service............................................................................................................................109
Cleaning.......................................................................................................................................... 110
5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning............................................................... 112

Parts List......................................................................................................................................... 113
External/ Internal Cover..................................................................................................................... 113
Main Unit.......................................................................................................................................... 114
PCB................................................................................................................................................. 116
Solenoid........................................................................................................................................... 117
Motor................................................................................................................................................117
Sensor..............................................................................................................................................118
Fan.................................................................................................................................................. 118
Switch.............................................................................................................................................. 119
Clutch...............................................................................................................................................119
Others.............................................................................................................................................. 120
External Cover/Interior System....................................................................................................... 121
Removing the Front Cover Unit.......................................................................................................... 121
Removing the Rear Cover..................................................................................................................122
Removing the Right Cover................................................................................................................. 122
Removing the Front Upper Cover....................................................................................................... 124
Removing the Left Front Cover...........................................................................................................124
Removing the Left Rear Cover........................................................................................................... 125
Removing the Front Right Cover........................................................................................................ 126
Removing the Delivery Tray............................................................................................................... 127
Removing the Control Panel Unit........................................................................................................127
Removing the Feeder Cover.............................................................................................................. 128
Removing the ADF Rear Cover.......................................................................................................... 129
Removing the Document Tray............................................................................................................ 130
Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader)............................................................................... 131
Layout.............................................................................................................................................. 131
Removing the Scanner Unit............................................................................................................... 131
iii
Contents
Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit.................................................................................................. 133

Cleaning the Copyboard Glass Unit.................................................................................................... 134
Cleaning the Stream Reading Glass................................................................................................... 134
Removing the CIS Unit...................................................................................................................... 134
Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF).................................................................................... 137
Layout.............................................................................................................................................. 137
Removing the ADF Unit..................................................................................................................... 137
Removing the ADF Pickup Unit.......................................................................................................... 140
Cleaning the ADF Pickup Unit............................................................................................................ 141
Removing the ADF Separation Pad.................................................................................................... 141
Cleaning the ADF Separation Pad...................................................................................................... 142
Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit..................................................................................................142
Removing the ADF Feed Drive Unit.................................................................................................... 145
Cleaning the ADF Delivery Roller....................................................................................................... 146
Controller System............................................................................................................................148
Removing the Main Controller PCB.................................................................................................... 148
Removing the Engine Controller PCB................................................................................................. 151
Removing the Power Supply PCB...................................................................................................... 152
Removing the HVT PCB.................................................................................................................... 153
Removing the Control Panel PCB.......................................................................................................154
Laser Exposure System.................................................................................................................. 156
Removing the Laser Scanner Unit...................................................................................................... 156
Image Formation System................................................................................................................ 158
Removing the Toner Cartridge........................................................................................................... 158
Removing the Drum Unit....................................................................................................................159
Remove the Developing Assembly..................................................................................................... 160
Removing the Developing Cylinder.....................................................................................................162
Removing the Transfer Roller.............................................................................................................165
Removing the Separation Static Charge Eliminator..............................................................................166
Cleaning the Transfer Guide.............................................................................................................. 167
Cleaning the Transfer Roller...............................................................................................................167
Fixing System..................................................................................................................................169
Removing the Fixing Assembly.......................................................................................................... 169
Remove the Fixing Film Unit.............................................................................................................. 170
Removing the Pressure Roller............................................................................................................176
Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide...........................................................................................................179
Pickup/Feed System....................................................................................................................... 180
Removing the Left Door Unit.............................................................................................................. 180
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray....................................................................................................... 181
Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit........................................................................................182
Removing the Main Drive Unit............................................................................................................ 183
Removing the Fixing Drive Unit.......................................................................................................... 186
Removing the Delivery/Reverse Unit.................................................................................................. 188
Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Roller.............................................................................................. 189
Removing the Cassette 1 Feed Roller.................................................................................................190
Removing the Cassette 1 Separation Roller........................................................................................ 195
Removing the Registration Roller....................................................................................................... 199
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller.................................................................................. 201
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad............................................................................... 203
Removing the Duplex Roller...............................................................................................................204
Removing the Delivery Reverse Roller................................................................................................205
iv
Contents
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Vertical Path Roller......................................................................... 207

Removing the Cassette 1 Paper Sensor and Sensor Flag.................................................................... 208
6. Adjustment................................................................................................... 209
Adjustment when Replacing the Parts............................................................................................ 210
Adjustment of Image Position..........................................................................................................211
Pickup Feed System..........................................................................................................................211
Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit)..............................................................................211
Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF Unit).................................................................................. 212
Actions when Replacing Parts.........................................................................................................213
Actions when Replacing the CIS Unit..................................................................................................213
Actions when Replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit..............................................................................214
Actions when Replacing the ADF Unit.................................................................................................216
Main Controller PCB..........................................................................................................................217
Engine Controller PCB.......................................................................................................................219
Adjustment of Image Position..........................................................................................................220
Pickup/ Feed System.........................................................................................................................220
Original Exposure and Feed System(Reader Unit)...............................................................................222
Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF Unit).................................................................................. 224
7. Troubleshooting...........................................................................................228
Initial Check.....................................................................................................................................229
Initial Check Item List.........................................................................................................................229
Each Unit / Function System Check Item List...................................................................................... 229
Test Print......................................................................................................................................... 231
Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 231
Select the Test Print TYPE.................................................................................................................231
How to View the Test Print................................................................................................................. 231
Troubleshooting Items.....................................................................................................................234
Troubleshooting Items....................................................................................................................... 234
Image Failure....................................................................................................................................234
Operation Failure.............................................................................................................................. 235
Others.............................................................................................................................................. 235
Special mode (User mode).................................................................................................................240
8. Error/Jam/Alarm........................................................................................... 243
Overview......................................................................................................................................... 244
Outline..............................................................................................................................................244
Error Code.......................................................................................................................................247
E000-0000--: Fixing Assembly: Temperature rise failure...................................................................... 247
E001-0000--: Abnormally high temperature of the Fixing Assembly.......................................................247
E001-0001--: Abnormally high temperature of the Fixing Assembly.......................................................247
E002-0000--: Fixing Assembly: Temperature rise failure...................................................................... 248
E003-0000--: Abnormally low temperature of the Fixing Assembly........................................................248
E003-0001--: Abnormally low temperature of the Fixing Assembly........................................................248
E004-0000--: Fixing Power Supply Drive Circuit Unit error....................................................................248
E010-0000--: Main Motor startup error................................................................................................ 248
E010-0001--: Main Motor rotation error............................................................................................... 249
E014-0000--: Fixing Motor startup error.............................................................................................. 249
v
Contents
E014-0001--: Fixing Motor rotation error............................................................................................. 249

E024-0000--: Developing Assembly error............................................................................................249
E024-0001--: Toner Sensor error........................................................................................................249
E100-0000--: BD error....................................................................................................................... 249
E196-0000--: EEPROM Read error.....................................................................................................249
E196-0001--: EEPROM access error.................................................................................................. 249
E196-0002--: EEPROM Write error.....................................................................................................249
E196-1000--: ROM Write/Read error (Main ROM)............................................................................... 250
E196-2000--: ROM Write/Read error (ROM for saving setting values)................................................... 250
E196-3000--: ROM Write/Read error (eMMC)......................................................................................250
E196-3001--: ROM-ID mismatch (eMMC)........................................................................................... 250
E202-0001--: CIS Unit HP error (outward)...........................................................................................250
E202-0002--: CIS Unit HP error (homeward)....................................................................................... 250
E225-0001--: CIS Unit light intensity below the standard level.............................................................. 250
E246-0000--: System error.................................................................................................................250
E247-0000--: System error.................................................................................................................250
E248-0001--: Error in access to backup data for Reader (reading error at power-on)............................. 250
E250-0000--: One-Touch Key Cover detection error............................................................................ 251
E261-0000--: Zero Cross signal error..................................................................................................251
E350-0000--: System error.................................................................................................................251
E351-0000--: Main Controller PCB error (Scanner System).................................................................. 251
E354-0000--: System error.................................................................................................................251
E355-0000--: System error.................................................................................................................251
E355-0004--: System error.................................................................................................................251
E355-0005--: System error.................................................................................................................251
E719-0000--: Communication error with the Copy Card Reader (serial communication)......................... 251
E732-0000--: Scanner communication error........................................................................................ 251
E733-0000--: Printer communication error...........................................................................................252
E736-0000--: Fax communication error............................................................................................... 252
E736-0001--: FAX Backup ROM error.................................................................................................252
E743-0000--: DDI communication error...............................................................................................252
E744-0001--: Mismatch combination of language file version............................................................... 252
E744-0002--: Language file error........................................................................................................252
E744-1001--: Mismatch between the versions for BOOTABLE and BOOTROM.....................................252
E744-4000--: Engine ID error............................................................................................................. 252
E744-5000--: Panel Microcomputer error............................................................................................ 252
E744-7000--: Backup Microcomputer error..........................................................................................252
E746-0000--: Main Controller PCB error (other)...................................................................................253
E766-8000--: Firmware error.............................................................................................................. 253
E766-9000--: Laser power supply condition error.................................................................................253
E766-xxxx--: Firmware error...............................................................................................................253
E805-0000--: Delivery Cooling Fan error............................................................................................. 253
E805-0001--: Heat Exhaust Fan error................................................................................................. 253
E805-0002--: Power Supply Cooling Fan error.................................................................................... 253
E840-0000--: Pressure Release Mechanism error............................................................................... 253
E996-0071--: Sequence jam error.......................................................................................................254
Jam Code........................................................................................................................................ 255
Main Unit (including Cassette Feeding Module-AC1)........................................................................... 255
Alarm Code..................................................................................................................................... 257
10-0020: Toner (Bk) prior delivery alarm............................................................................................. 257
10-0100: Toner (Bk) replacement notification alarm............................................................................. 257
vi
Contents
10-0100: Unidentified Toner Bottle (Bk) replacement notification alarm................................................. 257

35-0073: Drum Unit (Bk) replacement completion alarm.......................................................................257
35-0091: ADF Pickup Roller replacement completion alarm................................................................. 257
35-0092: ADF Separation Pad replacement completion alarm.............................................................. 257
40-0073: Drum Unit (Bk) prior delivery alarm.......................................................................................257
85-0001: System error....................................................................................................................... 257
85-0002: System error....................................................................................................................... 257
85-0003: System error....................................................................................................................... 257
85-0004: System error....................................................................................................................... 257
85-0005: System error....................................................................................................................... 257
9. Service Mode................................................................................................ 258

Overview......................................................................................................................................... 259
Entering Service Mode...................................................................................................................... 259
Outline of Service Mode.....................................................................................................................259
Backing up Service Mode.................................................................................................................. 259
Service Label.................................................................................................................................... 260
Service Mode Structure..................................................................................................................... 261
Screen Flow of Service Mode.............................................................................................................261
Caution when Changing the Setting Value.......................................................................................... 262
Remote UI Service Mode................................................................................................................... 262
COPIER (Service mode for printer).................................................................................................264
DISPLAY (State display mode)...........................................................................................................264
I/O (I/O display mode)........................................................................................................................266
ADJUST (Adjustment mode).............................................................................................................. 266
FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode).......................................................................................... 282
OPTION (Specification setting mode)................................................................................................. 294
COUNTER (Counter mode)............................................................................................................... 312
FEEDER (ADF service mode).........................................................................................................321
ADJUST (Adjustment mode).............................................................................................................. 321
FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode).......................................................................................... 323
FAX (FAX service mode).................................................................................................................324
SSSW (Bit switch registration mode) ..................................................................................................324
MENU (Menu switch registration mode) ............................................................................................. 325
NUM (Numeric parameter setting mode) ............................................................................................ 326
NCU (NCU parameter setting mode).................................................................................................. 327
TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.)....................................................331
PRINT (Print test mode).....................................................................................................................331
FAX (FAX test mode).........................................................................................................................333
10. Installation.................................................................................................. 337

How to Utilize This Installation Procedure.......................................................................................338
Symbols........................................................................................................................................... 338
Checking before Installation............................................................................................................ 339
Points to Note on Installation..............................................................................................................339
Selecting the Site of Installation..........................................................................................................339
Installation of Host Machine............................................................................................................ 340
Unpacking the Machine and Removing the Packaging Materials.......................................................... 340
Checking the Contents...................................................................................................................... 341
vii
Contents
Installation Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 341

Affixing the Label...............................................................................................................................346
Connecting the Power Cord............................................................................................................... 347
Turning ON the Power....................................................................................................................... 347
Host Machine Settings (Start Setup Guide)......................................................................................... 347
Checking the Operation and the Print Image....................................................................................... 348
Connecting to the Network (Network Model only).................................................................................348
Connecting to Telephone Line (Fax Model only).................................................................................. 348
Fax communication test..................................................................................................................... 350
Copy Card Reader-F1..................................................................................................................... 351
Check Item of the Contents................................................................................................................351
Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation.............................................................................351
Installation Outline Drawing................................................................................................................351
Installation Procedure........................................................................................................................ 352
Setting After Installation..................................................................................................................... 359
Control Interface Kit-C1...................................................................................................................361
Handset-K1..................................................................................................................................... 364
APPENDICES....................................................................................................367
Service Tools...................................................................................................................................368
Oils and Solvents.............................................................................................................................. 368
General Circuit Diagram..................................................................................................................369
General Circuit Diagram.................................................................................................................... 369
General Timing Diagram................................................................................................................. 370
Basic sequence at printing from cassette 1 ( A4, 2-sided, 1 sheet ).......................................................370
List of Backup Data......................................................................................................................... 371
Backup Data..................................................................................................................................... 371
List of Items Which Can Be Imported..............................................................................................373
Service Mode....................................................................................................................................373
Soft counter specifications.............................................................................................................. 390
Soft counter specifications................................................................................................................. 390
viii
Safety Precautions
Laser Safety.......................................... 2
Handling of Laser System..................... 2
Turn power switch ON...........................3
Power Supply........................................ 4
Toner Safety..........................................4
Notes When Handling a Lithium
Battery............................................... 4
Notes Before it Works Serving.............. 5
Points to Note at Cleaning.................... 5
Notes on Assembly/Disassembly..........5
Safety Precautions
Laser Safety
Since radiation emitted inside this machine is completely confined with protective housings, external covers and interlock
switches, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of normal use by users.
Therefore, this machine is classified as a Class 1 laser product under the international standard IEC60825-1 that is regarded as
safe during normal use.
Handling of Laser System

This machine is classified as a Class 1 laser product.
However, inside the machine, Class 3B laser beam is emitted and exposure to the beam may cause eye injuries. Therefore, when
servicing on and around the Laser Assembly, be sure to turn OFF the power of the machine before starting the work.
If you must service while the power is turned ON, be sure to keep the following in mind.
• Do not use a screwdriver or any tools that reflect laser light.
• Remove watches, rings and any other objects that act as reflectors before starting the work to prevent eye injuries.
The mark or the warning label is affixed to the machine's covers that confine laser beam as shown in the figure.
If you must open the cover and disable the interlock switches for servicing, be sure to prevent the eye from exposure.
The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).
Dieses Gerät ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet.

Innerhalb des Geräts wird jedoch ein Laserstrahl der Klasse 3B ausgestrahlt, der Augenschäden verursachen kann, wenn man
in diesen Strahl blickt.
Deshalb sollte bei Servicearbeiten an oder in der Nähe der Laserbaugruppe zuerst die Stromversorgung des Geräts
ausgeschaltet werden.
Bei Servicearbeiten, die unbedingt bei eingeschaltetem Gerät durchgeführt werden müssen, auf jeden Fall die folgenden
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen beachten.
• Keine Schraubendreher oder ähnliche Werkzeuge verwenden, die Laserlicht reflektieren können.
• Vor Beginn der Arbeit Uhren, Ringe und ähnliche Gegenstände abnehmen, die als Reflektoren fungieren können, um
Augenschäden zu verhindern.
An den Abdeckungen des Geräts, die das Austreten des Laserstrahls verhindern, ist das Kennzeichen bzw. der Warnaufkleber
angebracht (siehe Abbildung).
Müssen für Servicezwecke die Abdeckung geöffnet und die Verriegelungsschalter deaktiviert werden, besondere Vorsicht walten
lassen, damit der Laserstrahl nicht in die Augen gerät.
2
Safety Precautions
Turn power switch ON

The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control energy saver key.
The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power mode, sleep mode).
CAUTION:
Never turn OFF the main power switch while the progress bar is displayed because access to data is in process.
Main Power Switch
3
Safety Precautions
Power Supply
• As a general rule, do not use extension cords.
If an extension cord must be used, however, use one for local rated voltage and over, untie the cord binding, and insert the
power plug completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the power cord and the extension
cord.
CAUTION:
Do not plug multiple cords together to an extension cord. It may cause a fire or electrical shock.
• The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
Toner Safety
About Toner
Toner is a nontoxic matter composed of plastic, iron and a trace of pigments.
CAUTION:
Never throw toner in flames to avoid explosion.
Handling Adhered Toner

• Use dry tissue paper to wipe off toner adhered to skin or clothes and wash in water.
• Never use warm water for cleaning up toner to prevent toner particles from being gelated to soak into fibers permanently.
• Toner particles are reactive with vinyl polymers. Avoid contacting these materials.
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery

Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.
CAUTION:
Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.
The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).
CAUTION:
Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt, besteht Explosionsgefahr.
Gebrauchte Batterien gemäß der Anleitung beseitigen.
4
Safety Precautions
Notes Before it Works Serving

• At servicing, be sure to turn OFF the power source according to the specified steps and disconnect the power plug.
• Be sure to disconnect the power plug on a regular basis and remove dust and dirt accumulated around the outlet with dry
cloth.
CAUTION:
Leaving the power plug connected for a long time in an environment having a lot of dust, moisture, or oily smoke will
cause a fire. (Because dust accumulated in the surrounding area will absorb moisture and cause an insulation failure)
Points to Note at Cleaning

When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that the component of solvent is vaporized
completely before assembling.
Notes on Assembly/Disassembly
Follow the items below to assemble/disassemble the device.
1. Disconnect the power plug to avoid any potential dangers during assembling/disassembling works.
2. If not specially instructed, reverse the order of disassembly to reinstall.
3. Ensure to use the right screw type (length, diameter, etc.) at the right position when assembling.
4. To keep electric conduction, binding screws with washers are used to attach the grounding wire and the varistor. Ensure to
use the right screw type when assembling.
5. Unless it is specially needed, do not operate the device with some parts removed.
6. Never remove the paint-locked screws when disassembling.
CAUTION:
English
CAUTION
The fuse may be in the neutral, and that the mains shall be disconnected to de-energize the phase conductors.
German
VORSICHT
Die Sicherung kann sich im Nullleiter befinden und das Hauptnetz muss abgetrennt werden, um die Phasenleiter
stromlos zu machen.
5
1 Product Overview
Product Lineup...................................... 7
Feature..................................................9
Specifications...................................... 10
Name of Parts..................................... 15
1. Product Overview
Product Lineup
Host machine
iR1435 iR1435/1435+ Series iR1430

Basic model i model with iF model with P model Printer J model with
with Platen ADF ADF and Fax model Platen Cover
Cover
Print Speed (A4R/LTRR) 35/37ppm 30/31ppm
Class Equivalence in iR1020/1021/1024/1025 Series
LAN Port Yes Yes Yes Yes -
USB Port USB2.0 Device / USB2.0 Host / USB1.1 Host USB2.0 Device
Option Conver- Cassette Feeding Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
sion Module-AC1
FL Cassette-AW1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Copy Card Read- Yes Yes Yes - -
er-F1
Copy Card Read- Yes Yes Yes Yes -
er Attachment -E1
Handset-K1 - - Yes - -
(EUR Only)
Control Interface Yes Yes Yes - -
Kit-C1
7
1. Product Overview
Option
Control Interface Kit-C1
Handset-K1
Copy Card Reader-F1

Copy Card Reader Attachment-E1
License option
FL Cassette-AW1
Cassette Feeding
Module-AC1
- Hardware Products
Product name Required options, conditions, etc.

Cassette Feeding Module-AC1 A4 type / Universal type
FL Cassette-AW1 Standard or option (A4 type / Universal type)
Copy Card Reader-F1 • Copy Card Reader Attachment-E1 is required.
• Installation with Handset is not available.
• Installation with Control Interface Kit-C1 is not available.
Copy Card Reader Attachment-E1 • Copy Card Reader-F1 is required.
• Installation with Handset is not available.
Handset-K1 Installation with Copy Card Reader is not available.
Control Interface Kit-C1 Installation with Copy Card Reader is not available.
- License Products
Product name Required options, conditions, etc.

PCL Printer Kit-BA1
PS Printer Kit-BA1
USB Direct Print Kit (for PDF)-K1
Barcode Printing Kit-D1
Send PDF Security Feature Set-E1 Standard for iR1435+ Series (except for Printer model)
8
1. Product Overview
Feature
Product feature
Reader unit
- The mold frame was adopted.
Small-size/weight-saving
Drum unit
- Installed at the time
of factory shipment.
Improved installability
Toner
- The toner of the low
melting was adopted.
Main Controller Main body frame
Paper loading improvement - System collaboration with - The mold frame was adopted.
(High-temperature and other ADVANCE models
high-humidity environment ) is possible .
Small-size/weight-saving
Improved installability
9
1. Product Overview
Specifications
Product Specifications
Item Specification / Function
Copyboard Original stream reading, original fixed reading
Body Desktop
Light source type LED(RGB)
Photosensitive medium φ30 OPC
Image reading method CIS
Reproduction method Indirect electrostatic method
Exposure method Laser exposure system
Charging method Roller charging
Development method Dry one-component jumping development
Transfer method Roller transfer
Separation method Curvature and static eliminator
Pickup method • Cassette: Retard separation method
• Multi-purpose pickup tray: Pad separation method
Fixing method On demand
Delivery method Face down (Inner delivery)
Reproduction ratio 25 to 400%
Drum cleaning method Cleaning blade
Toner type Single component magnetic negative charge toner
Toner replenish method Toner cartridge
Toner level detection Yes
Top image margin 2.5 +/-1.5 mm (front Side)
2.5 +/-2.0 mm (back Side)
Left image margin 2.5 +/-1.5 mm (front Side)
2.5 +/-2.0 mm (back Side)
Warm-up time Power ON: 20 sec or less
Number of image gradations 256 gradation
Reading resolution 600 × 600dpi
Writing resolution 600 × 600dpi
First print time 5.0 sec or less
Paper type (Cassette) Plain paper (64 to 90 g/m2), recycled paper (64 to 90 g/m2), color paper (64 to 90 g/m2)
Paper type (Multi-purpose pickup tray) transparency (60 to 63 g/m2), recycled paper (64 to 90 g/m2), color paper (64 to 90 g/m2),
Plain paper (64 to 90 g/m2), heavy paper 1 (91 to 105 g/m2), heavy paper 2 (106 to 128 g/
m2), OHP, labels, Envelopes (No.10(COM10), Monarch, ISO-C5,DL)
Paper size (Cas- A4 A4R
sette 1) Universal A4R, LGL, LTRR, G-LTR, G-LGL, Oficio, B-Oficio, M-Oficio, Foolscap
CN A4R, 16K
Paper size (Multi-purpose pickup tray) A4R, B5R A5R, LTRR, LGL, STMTR, EXECR, 16K, Envelopes (No.10(COM10), Monarch,
ISO-C5, DL), Custom paper size (76 x 216 mm to 127 x 356 mm),
Pickup capacity Cassette1/2: 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Multi-purpose pickup tray: 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Duplex method Through path duplex
Noise (LWAd) • imageRUNNER 1435/1435+:
Standby: 53dB or less, Printing: 69.9 dB or less (reference)
• imageRUNNER 1430:
Standby: 43dB or less, Printing: 68.9 dB or less (reference)
Ozone 1.5mg/h or less
Power supply rat- 30cpm 220 - 240V AC, 50Hz/60Hz, 3.5A (Latin America)
ing 31cpm 120 - 127V AC, 60Hz, 7.5A (Latin America)
35cpm • 220V AC, 50Hz, 3.8A (CHINA)
• 220 - 240V AC, 50Hz/60Hz, 3.8A (Europe, Asia, Latin America, Korea, India)
37cpm 120 - 127V AC, 60Hz, 7.8A (North America, Latin America, Brazil)
10
1. Product Overview

Power consump- Maximum 1.5 KW or less
tion Standby 15 W or less
Deep Sleep 2.0 W or less
Dimensions (W x D x H) 545 mm × 457mm × 475.3 mm (ADF model)
545 mm × 457mm × 422.5 mm (Copyboard model)
545 mm × 457mm × 382.5 mm (Printer model)
Environment temperature / humidity 10.0 to 30.0 deg C, Humidity: 20 to 80%
range
Weight • Minimum (Printer model):
21.44kg ( not included the drum unit and toner cartridge)
• Maximum (ADF model):
23.74kg ( not included the drum unit and toner cartridge)
Productivity (Print speed)

■ imageRUNNER 1435/1435+
Paper type Size 1-sided 2-sided
Cassette pickup Multipurpose pick- Cassette pickup Multipurpose pick-
up up
Plain paper mode. A4R 35 35 18 18
Color paper mode. B5R - 15 - -
Recycled paper
A5R - 15 - -
mode. (64 to 90
g/m2) LGL 30 15 16 9
LTRR 37 37 18 18
EXECR - 15 - -
STMTR - 15 - -
16K 16 16 10 10
OFFICIO 33 15 18 9
FOOLSCAP 30 15 16 9
Transparency mode. A4R - 18 - -
(60 to 63 g/m2) B5R - 15 - -
Heavy paper 1 mode.
A5R - 15 - -
(91to 105 g/m2)
LGL - 15 - -
LTRR - 18 - -
EXECR - 15 - -
STMTR - 15 - -
16K - 15 - -
OFFICIO - 15 - -
FOOLSCAP - 15 - -
Heavy paper 2 mode. A4R - 12 - -
(106 to 128 g/m2) B5R - 15 - -
A5R - 15 - -
LGL - 10 - -
LTRR - 12 - -
EXECR - 15 - -
STMTR - 15 - -
16K - 15 - -
OFFICIO - 10 - -
FOOLSCAP - 10 - -
Envelope mode. Monarch - 12 - -
COM10 - 12 - -
ISO-C5 - 12 - -
DL - 12 - -
11
1. Product Overview

up up
OHP mode. A4R - 18 - -
LTRR - 18 - -
Label mode. A4R - 12 - -
LTRR - 12 - -
Custom paper 76 x 216 mm to 127 x - 5 - -
356 mm
■ imageRUNNER 1430
up up
Plain paper mode. A4R 30 30 18 18
Color paper mode. B5R - 15 - -
Recycled paper
A5R - 15 - -
mode. (64 to 90
g/m2) LGL 25 15 16 9
LTRR 31 31 18 18
EXECR - 15 - -
STMTR - 15 - -
16K 16 16 10 10
OFFICIO 30 15 18 9
FOOLSCAP 25 15 16 9
Transparency mode. A4R - 18 - -
(60 to 63 g/m2) B5R - 15 - -
Heavy paper 1 mode.
A5R - 15 - -
(91to 105 g/m2)
LGL - 15 - -
LTRR - 18 - -
EXECR - 15 - -
STMTR - 15 - -
16K - 15 - -
OFFICIO - 15 - -
FOOLSCAP - 15 - -
Heavy paper 2 mode. A4R - 12 - -
(106 to 128 g/m2) B5R - 15 - -
A5R - 15 - -
LGL - 10 - -
LTRR - 12 - -
EXECR - 15 - -
STMTR - 15 - -
16K - 15 - -
OFFICIO - 10 - -
FOOLSCAP - 10 - -
Envelope mode. Monarch - 12 - -
COM10 - 12 - -
ISO-C5 - 12 - -
DL - 12 - -
OHP mode. A4R - 18 - -
LTRR - 18 - -
Label mode. A4R - 12 - -
LTRR - 12 - -
Custom paper 76 x 216 mm to 127 x - 5 - -
356 mm
12
1. Product Overview
FAX specifications (imageRUNNER 1435iF/1435iF+ Only)

Item Specifications
Line Used Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)*1
Communication Mode Super G3, G3
Data compression method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Modem speed Super G3: 33.6 Kbps, G3: 14.4 Kbps
(With automatic fallback function)
Sending Original Sizes A4, A5 *2
Transmission Times JBIG: Approximately 2.6 seconds
Send/receive memory Approximately 512 pages
Fax resolution • Normal: 200 x 100 dpi
• Fine: 200 x 200 dpi
• Photo: 200 x 200 dpi
• Superfine: 200 x 400 dpi
• Ultrafine : 400 x 400 dpi
Auto Dial Function Address Book: 300 destinations (including destinations stored in one-touch keys)
*1: When using an IP telephone service, facsimile communication may not be performed normally via an IP telephone line. It is
recommended to use facsimile communication via a general telephone (Public Switched Telephone Network) line.
*2: Sent as A4
Paper Type
See the table below for the custom paper size.
Type Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm)

Custom paper size 127 to 356 76 to 216
■ Pickup
Usable paper types are as follows.
Paper type Size Multi-purpose pickup Cassette 1 Cassette 2 *1

tray
Transparency A4R Yes No No
(60 to 63 g/m2) B5R Yes No No
A5R Yes No No
LGL Yes No No
LTRR Yes No No
STMTR Yes No No
EXECR Yes No No
OFFICIO Yes No No
B-OFFICIO Yes No No
M-OFFICIO Yes No No
G-LTRR Yes No No
G-LGL Yes No No
A-FOOLSCAP Yes No No
FOOLSCAP Yes No No
16K Yes No No
Custom paper size Yes No No
Plain paper A4R Yes Yes Yes
Color paper
A5R Yes No No
(64 to 90 g/m2)
Recycled paper LGL Yes Yes Yes
(64 to 90 g/m2) LTRR Yes Yes Yes
13
1. Product Overview
Paper type Size Multi-purpose pickup Cassette 1 Cassette 2 *1

tray
Plain paper STMTR Yes No No
(64 to 90 g/m2) EXECR Yes No No
Color paper
OFFICIO Yes Yes No
(64 to 90 g/m2)
Recycled paper B-OFFICIO Yes Yes Yes
(64 to 90 g/m2) M-OFFICIO Yes Yes Yes
G-LTRR Yes Yes Yes
G-LGL Yes Yes Yes
FOOLSCAP Yes Yes Yes
16K Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 1 A4R Yes No No
Heavy paper 2
A5R Yes No No
(106 to 128 g/m2)
BOND LGL Yes No No
(75 to 90 g/m2) LTRR Yes No No
STMTR Yes No No
EXECR Yes No No
OFFICIO Yes No No
B-OFFICIO Yes No No
M-OFFICIO Yes No No
G-LTRR Yes No No
G-LGL Yes No No
FOOLSCAP Yes No No
16K Yes No No
Envelope Monarch Yes No No
COM10 Yes No No
ISO-C5 Yes No No
DL Yes No No
OHP A4R Yes No No
LTRR Yes No No
Label A4R Yes No No
B5R Yes No No
A5R Yes No No
LGL Yes No No
LTRR Yes No No
STMTR Yes No No
EXECR Yes No No
*1: Cassette Feeding Module-AC1 (option) is named as Cassette 2 when it is installed.
14
1. Product Overview
Name of Parts
External View
■ ADF Model
[10] [9] [8]
[11] [7]
[6]
[5]
[12]
[4]
[13]
[14] [1] [2] [3]
[17]
[24] [18]
[19]
[15]
HAND
SET [23]
[20]
[21]
[16]
[22]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Front Upper Cover [13] Multi-purpose Tray
[2] Front Cover Unit [14] Left Front Cover
[3] Cassette 1 [15] Main Switch
[4] Front Right Cover [16] Right Cover
[5] Control Panel [17] USB Port 1
[6] Delivery Tray [18] LAN Port
[7] Reader [19] USB Port 2
[8] Document Delivery Tray [20]*1 Handset Terminal
[9] Delivery Tray [21]*1 External Telephone Terminal
[10] Feeder Cover [22]*1 Telephone Line Terminal
[11] Left Rear Cover [23] Rear Cover
[12] Left Door Unit [24] USB Port 3
*1: Availability depending on model.
15
1. Product Overview
■ Copyboard Model
[8]
[7]
[9]
[6]
[5]
[10]
[4]
[11]
[12] [2] [3]

[1]
[19]
[18]
[13]
[15]
[16]
[14]
[17]
No. Name No. Name

[7] Reader [17] USB Port 2
[8] Copyboard [18] Rear Cover
[9] Left Rear Cover [19] USB Port 3
[10] Left Door Unit
16
1. Product Overview
■ Printer Model
[7]
[8]
[6]
[5]
[9]
[4]
[10]
[11] [2] [3]

[1]
[18]
[17]
[12]
[14]
[13] [15]
[16]
No. Name No. Name

[7] Printer Upper Cover [16] USB Port 2
[8] Left Rear Cover [17] Rear Cover
[9] Left Door Unit [18] USB Port 3
17
1. Product Overview
Cross Sectional View

[27] [26] [25] [24] [23] [22] [21]
[28]
[29]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8] [20]
[9]
[11]
[10] [19]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
No. Name No. Name

[1] CIS Unit [16] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller
[2] Delivery Reverse Roller [17] Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad
[3] Delivery Reverse Unit [18] Cassette 1 Pickup Roller
[4] Fixing Assembly [19] Developing Assembly
[5] Fixing Film Unit [20] Toner cartridge
[6] Pressure roller [21] ADF Base
[7] Laser Scanner Unit [22] Original Tray
[8] Drum Unit [23] Delivery Roller
[9] Photosensitive Drum [24] Delivery Roller
[10] Transfer Roller [25] Separation Pad
[11] Duplex Roller [26] Pickup Roller
[12] Registration Roller [27] Separation Roller
[13] Cassette 1 Feed Roller [28] Feed Roller
[14] Cassette 1 Separation Roller [29] Platen Guide
[15] Multi-purpose Tray Vertical Path Roller
Control Panel
NOTE:
A major control panel is used to describe function below as several types of panels are equipped by specifications and countries.
18
1. Product Overview
[15]
[5] [6] [7] [11]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [12] [13]
[14]
[10] [16]
[22] [19]
[9] [17] [18]
[8] [21] [20]

[23]
No. Name Function

[1] [COPY] Key Press to switch the mode to copy.
[2] [FAX] Key Press to switch the mode to fax.
[3] [SCAN] Key Press to switch the mode to scan.
[4] [DIRECT PRINT] Key Press to switch the mode to memory printing.
[5] [Status Monitor] Key Press to check the status of printing or faxing, to view the usage history, or to view the
network settings such as the IP address of the machine.
[6] [2-Sided] Key Press to set 2-sided copies.
[7] [Paper Selection/Settings] Key Press to select a paper source, such as a drawer or multipurpose tray, and register paper
size and type.
[8] [Reset] Key Press to reset the settings.
[9] [Back] Key Press to return to the previous screen.
[10] [▲] Key Press to scroll up or to increase the value.
[▼] Key Press to scroll down or to decrease the value.
[◄] Key Press to return to the previous screen, or move the cursor to the left.
[►] Key Press to proceed to the next screen, or move the cursor to the right.
[OK] Key Press to confirm an action or setting.
[11] Numeric Keys ([0] - [9] Keys) Press to enter characters and numbers.
[*] Key Press to use tone dialing such as when receiving fax information services.
[#] Key Press to enter symbols.
[12] [Clear] Key Press to delete entered characters and numbers.
[13] [Menu] Key Press to specify or register various settings.
[14] [Energy Saver] Key Press to manually set or cancel the Sleep mode.
[15] [ID] Key When a logon screen is displayed, press the key after entering your logon information such
as an ID and PIN.
[16] [Secure Print] Key Press when you start printing secured documents.
[17] [Counter Cheek] Key Press to view the counter values as well as the list of the equipment that is attached or
enabled.
[18] [Start] Key Press to start a job.
[19] [Stop] Key Press to cancel jobs.
[20] [Error] Indicator Flashes when an error occurs.
[21] [Processing/ Data] Indicator Flashes when the device is in operation, is on when there is a job waiting to be processed.
[22] Display (LCD) During normal operation, displays messages and prompts. When adjusting the settings,
displays your selections, text, and numbers.
19
1. Product Overview
No. Name Function

[23] [One-touch] Key Press to quickly specify a destination for sending documents.
[Address Book] Key Press to display a list of destinations registered in the Address Book, or to register or edit
destinations in the Address Book.
[Coded Dial] Key Press to use coded dial numbers.
[Recall Settings] Key Press to recall previously used destinations with settings specified for sending documents.
[Hook] Key Press to dial without lifting up the handset of the external telephone, such as when receiving
fax information services.
[Pause] Key Press to insert pauses in the fax number.
Others
■ Power Switch
Main Power Switch
Energy Saver Key
Equipped switch and key is described below.

1. Main Power Switch
Uses to turn OFF / ON the main power.
2. Energy Saver Key
Used to shift to power-save mode or to restore it to normal mode.
■ Points to Note on Turning OFF/ON the Power Switch

• To turn off the main power, turn off the main power switch.
• After power-off (after the main power switch is turned off), do not reactivate the main power switch until a screen disappears.
• Do not turn off the main power while downloading.
20
2 Technical
Explanation
(Device)
Basic Configuration............................. 22
Original Exposure/Feed System......... 24
Controller System................................46
Laser Exposure System...................... 48
Image Formation System.................... 52
Fixing System......................................62
Pickup Feed System........................... 70
External Auxiliary System................... 77
2. Technical Explanation (Device)
Basic Configuration
Functional Configuration
The host machine is constructed by following 6 functional system blocks; Original Exposure and Feed System, Controller System,
Laser Control System, Image Formation System, Fixing System and Pickup Feed System.
Original exposure system
CIS unit ADF unit
Controller system
Delivery
Controller system
Fixing - Engine control
Duplexing system - System control
feed Fixing
Laser exposure system
Transfer Laser scanner unit
Image
formation
Pickup system
Cassette 1
Pickup/feed
system
Paper flow
Signal flow
Cassette 2 Laser beam
Basic Sequence
■ Basic Operation Sequence
Operation Sequence is controlled by the engine control on the controller PCBs. Each sequence, from main power switch ON until
the main motor stops, is described as below. See timing chart for detail in the Appendix chapter.
Zone Purpose Remarks

WAIT Interval from power-ON or closing • Eliminates charging on surface Detects presence of the toner car-
(wait) the doors until print-ready status of the photosensitive drum and tridge
clean the transfer roller.
• Keeps heater temperature con-
stant
STBY Interval from wait time or the last Keeps the host machine standby -
(standby) rotation completion until print
command input from the control-
ler or power-OFF.
INTR Interval from print command input Keeps photosensitive drum stable -
(initial rotation) from the controller until tempera- sensitivity for print advance prepara-
ture of the fixing unit reaches tar- tions
get value.
22
Zone Purpose Remarks

PRINT Interval from initial rotation until • Forms image on the photosen- -
(print) last page fixation completion. sitive drum, based on Video sig-
nal (/VDO1,/
VDO2,VDO1,VDO2) from the
controller.
• Transfers toner image onto the
paper.
LSTR Interval from print job Delivers the paper completely be- Directly starts INTR after LSTR end
(last rotation) completion until motor tween the final job. when print indication command in-
deactivation. put from the controller
23
Original Exposure/Feed System
Specifications / Controls / Functions

The major specifications, controls and functions of the original exposure and feed system are
described below.

Original exposure LED
Original scan In book mode Scanning by moving the contact image sensor (CIS)
In ADF mode Stream reading by the fixed contact image sensor (CIS)
Read resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Gradation 256 gradation
Carriage position detection CIS HP sensor (SR03)
Magnification 25% to 400% (1% unit)
Main scanning direction Processed on the Main Controller PCB
Sub scanning direction Processed on the Main Controller PCB
Lens Rod lens array
Original reading sensor Number of lens: 1
Number of pixels: Total 5184 (incl. 5126 effective pixels)
Maximum original scan width: 217mm
CIS drive control Drive control by the Reader Motor (M02)
Original size detection Reader No
ADF Horizontal scanning direction: No
Vertical direction: by original feeding length
ADF original pickup method Auto pickup/delivery method
ADF setting direction of original Face-up stacking
ADF setting position of original Center reference
ADF separation method of original Upper separation by separation pad
ADF scanning method of original Stream reading
ADF weight of original 1-sided 50 to 105 g/m2
2-sided 64 to 105 g/m2
ADF original size A4R, A5, A5R, B5R, B6, LGL, LTRR, STMT, STMTR
Original width direction: 139.7 to 215.9 mm
Original feed direction: 128.0 to 355.6 mm
ADF original tray capacity A4R/LTRR: 50 sheets (80 g/m2)
LGL: 30 sheets (80 g/m2)
ADF original processing mode 1-sided original processing
2-sided original processing
ADF original size detection function No
ADF mixed original mode function Mix of same configura- Yes (original weight same as continuous feed mode)
tion mode Combination is as follows;
• LTR / LGL
Mix of different configu- None
ration mode
Book original Supported (Heavy load up to 2 kg)
ADF done stamp function No
Main Configuration Parts

■ Reader Unit
The major parts of the reader unit are shown as follows.
24
Drive pulley
CIS Unit
Drive belt
Drive pulley
Reader Motor(M02)
CIS HP Sensor(SR03)
Item No. Specification / Function

CIS Unit - Reads the original. (LED, transparent material)
Drive Pulley, Drive Belt - Controls the carriage drive.
CIS HP sensor SR03 Photo interrupter: detects the home position of CIS unit.
Reader motor M02 Pulse Motor: controls the carriage drive.
■ ADF unit
The major parts of the ADF unit are shown as follows.
Layout drawing of major parts

Separation Pad
Separation Roller Document Tray
Pickup Roller
ADF Base
Feed Roller Platen Guide Delivery Roller

Separation Roller Separates and feeds the original
Separation Pad Separates the original
Pickup Roller Picks up the original
Document Tray Stacks the delivered original
ADF Base Stacks the delivered original
Delivery Roller Delivers and reverses the original
Platen Guide Reading original assembly
Feed Roller Feeds the original
25
Layout drawing of sensors

SR02
SR01

Document Sensor SR02 Detects original presence.
Document End Sensor SR01 Detects paper reach of the leading edge / paper pass of the trailing edge.
Drive system drawing of motor and solenoid
M01 SL01
M01 SL01

ADF Motor M01 Pulse Motor: Feed original
ADF Disengagement Solenoid SL01 Releases pressure from the delivery reverse roller during the reverse.
Basic Operation
■ Basic Sequence
● Basic Sequence at Power-On
1. The CIS unit searches the HP.
Main power switch ON
SREADY STBY
Reader motor
(M02)
LED
CIS unit HP
sensor(SR03)
Shading Shading
position position
:Forward
:Backward
26
CIS unit HP sensor(SR03)
End of Shading Leading

searching HP position edge
Error Code
E202-0001 : CIS unit HP error
E202-0002 : CIS unit HP error
● Basic Sequence at Start Key ON (book mode)

1. The CIS unit is moved to the copyboard glass start position after black / white shading.
2. An image scan is performed.
3. The CIS unit is moved to the shading position.
Black /white shading
Start Key ON
STBY SCFW SCRV STBY

Reader motor
(M02)
LED
CIS unit HP
sensor(SR03)
Shading Leading Trailing Shading
position edge edge position
: Forward
: Backward
Copyboard glass Shading Leading Trailing

reading start HP position edge edge
position
● Basic Sequence at Start Key ON (ADF mode)

1. The CIS unit is moved to the stream reading start position after black and white shading.
2. An image scan is performed.
3. The CIS unit is moved to the shading position.
27
Black / white shading
Start Key ON
STBY SCRV SCFW STBY

Reader motor
(M02)
LED
CIS unit HP
sensor(SR03)
Shading Stream reading Trailing Shading
position start position edge position
: Forward
: Backward
Stream reading Copyboard glass Shading

start position reading start HP position
position
■ ADF Operation Mode

● Overview
ADF operation provides following 2 modes. ADF is controlled by the host machine to operate
each mode and print.
Name Outline Supported Print Mode

Forward pickup/delivery Pick up, read an original and then deliver it. 1-sided original to 1-sided print
1-sided original to 2-sided print
Forward pickup/reversal delivery Pick up and reverse an original after completing reading of the 2-sided original to 2-sided print
front side. Reverse an original again after reading the back 2-sided original to 1-sided print
side and then deliver it.
● 1-sided original reading

Operation of 1-sided original reading (2 originals)
28
1-sided original reading operation

(when 2 sheets of originals are set) 1/2
- Start reading front side of the 1st sheet

- Set the original and pickup the 2nd sheet
- Pickup the 1st sheet and move down - End of reading front side of
the pickup roller. the 1st sheet and feed the 2nd sheet
- Feed the 1st sheet - Waiting for reading front side of

the 2nd sheet
- Waiting for reading front side - Start reading front side of

of the 1st sheet the 2nd sheet. Deliver the 1st sheet

- Complete reading front side of the 2nd sheet.
- Deliver the 2nd sheet and move up the pickup roller.
● 2-sided original reading

Operation of 2-sided original reading (2 originals)
29

- Set the original - Start reading front side of the 1st sheet.
- Pickup the 1st sheet and move down - End of reading front side of the 1st sheet
the pickup roller.
- Feed the 1st sheet - Feed to the reverse point

of the 1st sheet
- Waiting for reading of front side - Re-pickup the 1st sheet

of the 1st sheet
30

- Feed the 1st sheet and - Feed to the reverse point

disengage the delivery roller of the 1st sheet
- Waiting for reading back side - Re-pickup the 1st sheet

of the 1st sheet
- Waiting for reading back side of - Feed the 1st sheet and
the 1st sheet and pressurize the disengage the delivery roller
delivery roller
- End of reading back side - Idle feed the 1st sheet and
of the 1st sheet pressurize the delivery roller
31

- Deliver the 1st sheet Waiting for reading the front side
of the 2nd sheet and move up the pickup roller
- End of job the 1st sheet - Start reading front side of

the 2nd sheet and pressurize the
delivery roller
- Pickup the 2nd sheet - End of reading front side of the 2nd sheet
- Feed the 2nd sheet and - Feed to the reverse point of the 2nd sheet
disengage the delivery roller
32

- Re-pickup the 2nd sheet - End of reading back side of

the 2nd sheet
- Feed the 2nd sheet and - Feed to the reverse point of the 2nd sheet
disengage the delivery roller
- Waiting for reading back side - Re-pickup the 2nd sheet

of the 2nd sheet
- Start reading back side of - Feed the 2nd sheet and

the 2nd sheet and pressurize disengage the delivery roller
the delivery roller
33

- Idle feed the 2nd sheet and

engage the delivery roller
- Pass through the 2nd sheet reading position
- Deliver the 2nd sheet and End of job
Reader Unit
■ Reader Motor Control
Forward movement during image scan
During image scanning, the CIS unit is controlled using the following motor sequence.
Start Leading edge Trailing edge Stop
Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration
Shift
speed
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Shift distance
[1]Acceleration interval: Accelerate to the speed specified for each mode
[2]Run-up interval: A margin to stabilize the speed
[3]Image reading interval: An image is read at a constant speed
[4]Deceleration interval: After trailing edge detection, the motor decelerates rapidly and stops.
NOTE:
Scanning speed is as follows.
Copy (300dpi x 600dpi): 177.4 mm/s
Color SEND (300dpi x 600dpi): 59.1 mm/s
Reverse movement during image scan

The CIS unit’s reverse movement to the shading position after image scanning is the same as the forward movement.
34
■ Magnification Ratio
The scanning speed does not change depending on the copy magnification ratio. Images read at a resolution specified by the
controller—300 dpi (horizontal scanning) × 600 dpi (vertical scanning) or 600 dpi (horizontal scanning) × 600 dpi (vertical
scanning)—are processed by the main controller PCB (PCB2) according to the copy ratio.
■ Original Size Detection

The reader assembly does not have original size sensors or platen cover open/closed sensors, size detection is not performed.
ADF Unit
■ Pickup Control
When the Start key is pressed or when an original pickup signal is received, the ADF motor (M01) rotates, and the pickup roller
moves down. At this point, the pickup roller rotates to pick up and feed the original. The separation roller and the separation pad
prevent double feeding. Further, the stopper operates in conjunction with the pickup roller unit.
Pickup Roller Original

M01
Separation Roller
Stopper
M01
Separation Roller Pickup Roller
Separation Pad
■ Feed Control
1-Sided Stream Reading
The feed roller is driven by the ADF motor (M01) and feeds the original to the reading position.
M01
Document End Sensor

(SR01)
Feed Roller
Reading position
35
NOTE:
The preparation of the main controller PCB (memory allocation) may not be complete when the original passes through the
document end sensor (SR01). If this occurs, the feed roller stops the original in front of the reading position. When the preparation
of the main controller PCB is complete, the feed roller feeds the original to the reading position.
Document End Sensor Feed Roller

(SR01)
Original Detection
Position
Deceleration
Stop
Acceleration
Interval
for Reading position
rotation
stabilization
2-Sided Stream Reading

The feed roller is driven by the positive rotation of the ADF motor (M01) and feeds the original. When the document end sensor
(SR01) turns on, the ADF motor (M01) stops, which also stops the original. After the specified time elapses, the feed roller rotates
to feed the original to the reading position. At this point, to prevent the next pickup, the ADF motor (M01) rotates in the negative
direction to raise the pickup roller.
M01
Document End Sensor

(SR01)
M01
Separation Roller
Pickup Roller
Feed Roller
Reading position
36
NOTE:
The preparation of the main controller PCB (memory allocation) may not be complete when the original passes through the
document end sensor (SR01). If this occurs, the feed roller stops the original before the reading position. When both the memory
allocation and the raising of the pickup roller are complete, the feed roller feeds the original to the reading position.
Document End Sensor Feed Roller

(SR01)
Original Detection
Position
Deceleration
Stop
Acceleration
Constant speed
Deceleration
Interval Reading position
for
rotation
stabilization
■ Reading Control
When the leading edge of the original reaches the reading position and a read request signal is received from the host machine,
stream reading begins. Stream reading is a mode in which the original is scanned by sliding it across the host machine’s fixed
scanner glass. The original is fed by the feed roller, which is rotated by the ADF motor (M01). Images that are read are stored in
the host machine’s memory.
M01
Feed Roller
Reading Glass
CIS Unit
Original Reverse Control

■ Basic Operation
Originals can be reversed from the front to the back side or from the back to the front. Since the same operation is used for both,
only the operation for reversing from the front to the back side is described below.
37
Front side pickup

1. The feed roller is driven by the positive rotation of the ADF motor (M01), and the front side of original is read.
2. After reading, the delivery roller rotates to feed the original to the ejection area.
3. After feeding the original a given distance, the ADF motor (M01) stops.
M01
Feed Roller
M01
Delivery Roller
Reverse and feed

1. The delivery roller is driven in reverse by the negative rotation of the ADF motor (M01) and feeds the original.
2. When the document end sensor (SR01) turns on, the ADF motor (M01) stops, which also stops the original. At this point,
the disengagement solenoid (SL01) is turned on to release the pressure from the delivery reverse roller.
3. The feed roller is driven by the positive rotation of the ADF motor (M01) and feeds the original to the reading position.
38
M01
Delivery Roller
M01 SL01
Document End Sensor

(SR01)
M01
Feed Roller
Reading position
Delivery Control
■ Basic Operation
After stream reading, the delivery roller rotates to eject the original into the delivery tray. Then, the ADF motor (M01) stops.
M01
Delivery Roller
M01
39
NOTE:
• With 1-sided reading, after delivery, the pickup roller is moved up.
• With 2-sided reading, this is not performed because it has already been moved up.
Original Detection
■ Original Presence Detection
When an original is set in the document tray, the original blocks the document sensor (SR02) causing the original to be detected.
■ Original Size Detection

The original size is determined by calculating following 2 elapse times.
• Time A
From a point in time when the document end sensor (SR01) turns ON to a point in time when the original reaches the reading
position.
• Time B
From a point in time when the original reaches the reading position to a point in time when the document end sensor (SR01)
turns OFF.
SR01 B
A
Reading position
Dust Detection Control

When an original is read, to prevent dust from appearing in the image, the original reading position is adjusted or the image is
corrected when dust is detected on the platen roller of the stream reading glass/ADF. This control is performed only when the
ADF is in use and is closed.
■ Dust Detection Avoidance

If dust was detected on the paper in the last job, the reading position of the next stream reading job is adjusted to avoid the dust.
• Control timing
At the reading position, the CIS unit detects the reflection light from the platen guide surface to determine the presence of
dust. The presence of dust is detected in the order A, B, and C. The location with the least dust is used as the reading position
in the next job.
• Execution
As when a job is completed, the presence of dust is detected in the order A, B, and C. The CIS unit moves to the location
with the least dust and reads the original.
40
0.5mm 0.5mm
A B C
Platen Guide
CIS Unit
Position Description
A Reading reference position
B Approx. 0.5 mm to the right of reference position A
C Approx. 0.5 mm to the right of reference position B
Service Mode
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > DFDST-L2 : Adjustment of dust detect level: after job, ADF
■ Dust Detection Correction

When dust is detected on the ADF reading glass, the image is corrected to prevent the dust from appearing.
• Control timing
During stream reading jobs, from when an original reaches the position immediately before the reading position to when the
reading of the original is completed (every page).
• Execution
If dust is present at the points where dust was detected. the dust is assumed to be on the reading glass, and dust correction
is performed.
Service Mode
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > DFDST-L1 : Adjustment of dust detect level: paper interval, ADF
Image Processing
■ Overview
Image processing is performed in the CIS unit and the main controller PCB.
Item Function
CIS unit LED Light Intensity Adjustment
CIS internal analog control
Image Reading Sensor
Image Reading Sensor Output Gain Correction and Offset Correction
A/D Conversion of the Image Reading Sensor Output
Main controller PCB Shading Correction
41
CIS (Contact Image Sensor)
Image reading sensor
Analog image signal

Main Controller PCB
Image reading sensor drive SRAM
Analog Image
processing Shading correction
- Gain correction A/D

- Offset correction Conversion CPU
Digital
Image signal
■ CIS Unit
The CIS (contact image sensor) performs original exposure and image reading on a line-by-line basis.
Scan direction
Light guide
Rod lens array
Light guide Rod lens array
Image reading sensor
Item Function
Light guide Directs the LED light over the entire image line.
Rod lens array Collects the light reflected from the original.
Image reading sensor Receives the reflection light passing through the rod lens array.
42
Service Mode
• Actions when replacing the CIS Unit
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R, BW-G, BW-B
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-R, CL-G, CL-B
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC, CL-AGC
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY >STRD-POS
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R, DFTAR-G, DFTAR-B, DFTAR-BW
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, WLVL3
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X, ADJ-Y, ADJ-X-MG
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY- > ADJ-Y-DF, ADJ-Y-DF2
FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST, DOCSTDUP, DOCST2
FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD, LA-SPD2
● LED Light Intensity Adjustment

To make the image reading level from the image reading sensor constant, the LED activation time is adjusted every time the
original is scanned. The LED activation time of each color is adjusted to prevent variations in light intensities.
● CIS Internal Analog Control

The CIS (contact image sensor) performs the following three analog image processing controls on the reflection light from the
original.
1. Image formation by the rod lens array
2. Light reception by the Image reading sensor array
3. Photoelectric conversion and output by the Image reading sensor array
The Image reading sensor array consists of three channels (units). Each channel has an output correction table and outputs
images after correcting the gain relative to the input luminance signal.
● Image Reading Sensor

The Image reading sensor used in this equipment is a single line linear image sensor consisting of 5184 light-receiving cells. For
each channel (three channels total) of the Image reading sensor array, signals that have gone through photoelectric conversion
in the lightreceiving block are output in parallel to the main controller PCB.
● Image Reading Sensor Output Gain Correction and Offset Correction

The gain of the analog video signals output from the image reading sensor is kept constant (gain correction). And, the output
voltage when incident light is not received is kept constant (offset correction).
● A/D Conversion of the Image Reading Sensor Output

After gain correction and offset correction, the A/D converter converts the analog video signal into digital signals that correspond
to the voltage levels of each pixel.
■ Main Controller PCB

The functions of the image processing system on the PCB are described below.
• Shading adjustment: Performed in service mode
• Shading correction: Performed for each job
Main Controller PCB
Analog image Digital image

Image reading processing assembly processing assembly
sensor
Analog
A/D Shading
image
conversion correction
processing
Service Mode
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R, DFTAR-G, DFTAR-B, DFTAR-BW
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2, DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4
43
● Shading Correction
Even when the density of the original is uniform, the Image reading sensor output is not necessarily uniform for the following
reasons.
1. Variation in sensitivity between each pixel of the image reading sensor
2. Variation in light intensity of the rod lens array
3. Difference in the transmission light intensity between the center area and the peripheral area of the lens.
4. Difference in the light intensity between the center area and the peripheral area of the LEDs.
5. LED deterioration
Shading correction is performed to correct this non uniformity in the image reading sensor output. Due to the characteristics of
each CIS pixel, variation in reading levels in the horizontal scanning direction occurs. Therefore, reading is performed with the
LED lit and not lit and the white and black levels at each horizontal scanning position are corrected in order to make reading levels
constant. There are two types of shading correction: white shading and black shading.
White shading (Book mode)

At predetermined intervals, R, G, and B are switched to illuminate a white plate, and the luminance is read. The white level
correction coefficient is calculated for each horizontal scanning position to make the white level reading in the horizontal scanning
position constant.
255
RED shading target

RED Luminance value before correction
luminance
Correction coefficient
0
Horizontal scanning position
White shading (ADF mode)

Stream reading shading correction is performed using the white level adjustment value (factory adjustment value). The white
level at each horizontal scanning position is corrected using the factory adjustment value as the target value.
Black shading
A white plate is read with the LED turned off. The black level correction coefficient is calculated for each horizontal scanning
position to make the black level reading in the horizontal scanning position constant.
255
Luminance value before correction

Correction coefficient
RED
luminance
0
Horizontal scanning position
Error Code
E225-0001: CIS unit light intensity is under the standard level
44
Jam Detection
SR02
SR01
This equipment uses document end sensor (SR01) and document sensor (SR02) to detect original jams. The jam detection check
timing is stored in the main controller PCB. The presence of a jam is determined by whether an original is at the relevant sensor
at the check time. Jam codes in this equipment can be verified by displaying the jam error log in the equipment’s service mode.
ACC ID Jam Code Type Item No.

01 0001 Delay Jam Document End Sensor SR01
01 0002 Stationary Jam Document End Sensor SR01
01 0004 Delay Jam (2nd side) Document End Sensor SR01
01 0005 Stationary Jam (2nd side) Document End Sensor SR01
01 0071 Sequence Jam - -
01 0094 Power On Jam Document End Sensor SR01
Document Sensor SR02
01 0095 Other - -
Service Mode
COPIER > DISPLAY > JAM : Display of jam log
45
Controller System
Configuration / Function
Main Controller PCB
Item Function
Main Controller PCB ROM Host machine setting data, loader program to be started at first, download function program
such as UST, main program (decompressed into the RAM and executed), data for demonstra-
tion print function, language data, and fax backup data in preparation for power OFF
RAM Main program area, fixed memory area, dynamic memory area, memory for images, and area
for storing data for executing fax transmission/reception jobs (necessary data is also saved to
the ROM as backup in preparation for power OFF)
■ Main controller PCB

ADF DRIVER & SENSOR J903
Speaker J922 BAT J904 READER DRIVER & SENSOR
CCVI J932
Serial Debug Monitor1 J906 J936 SOFT-ID

New Card Reader J933
USB1.1 Host J905 J935 FRAM Counter
RJ-45 + Transformer J926 DDR2 Back-Up I/F

Connector J911
J937 Debug
J938 FRONT COVER TRIG
USB2.0 Device J909 J912 DCON I/F
Serial Debug Monitor2 J925 Panel J913

USB2.0 Host J908 VH Supply I/FJ921
Power Connector J914
Power Control J915
MODEM I/F J918
No. Function
J903 ADF DRIVER & SENSOR
J904 READER DRIVER & SENSOR
J905 USB1.1 Host
J906 Serial Debug Monitor1
J908 USB2.0 Host
J909 USB2.0 Device
J911 RJ-45 + Transformer Connector
J912 DCON I/F
J913 Panel
J914 Power Connector
46
No. Function
J915 Power Control
J918 MODEM I/F
J921 VH Supply I/F
J922 Speaker
J925 Serial Debug Monitor2
J926 DDR2 Back-Up I/F
J932 CCVI
J933 New Card Reader
J935 FRAM Counter
J936 SOFT-ID
J937 Debug
J938 FRONT COVER TRIG
47
Laser Exposure System
Overview
The laser control system forms static latent image on the photosensitive drum by laser exposure. The laser scanner unit consists
of a laser assembly and scanner motor assembly and is controlled by signals received from the controller. This equipment employs
a 2-beam laser system that can expose two beams in a single scan. Also, to make the equipment compact, a single-polygon 2-
laser system is used.

The major specifications, controls and functions of the laser control system is described below.
Item Contents
Laser Beam Number of laser beam 2
Output 3.5mW
Wave length 785 to 800nm
Polygon Motor Motor type DC brushless motor
Number of rotation Approx. 37900rpm
Type of bearing Oil bearing
Polygon Mirror Number of facets 4
List of Controls Laser activation timing control Laser control signal
Synchronization control BD signal
Light intensity control Automatic photocurrent Control (APC)
Other Polygon motor control
Laser shutter control

Polygon mirror
Anamorphic lens
Laser unit
Photoconductive drum
Name Function
Polygon mirror Scans laser beam on the photoconductive drum in main scan direction.
Anamorphic lens Reflects laser beam into the BD detector.
Laser unit Emits laser beam and detects BD signal.
48
Name Function
Photoconductive drum Receives laser beam to form latent image.
Control System Configuration

The laser exposure system is controlled by the engine controller PCB (PCB1) and laser unit.
Item Function
Laser lighting timing con- Laser control signal Turns ON/OFF the laser beam in combination of the laser control sig-
trol nal.
BD signal Adjusts reading start position in horizontal direction.
Laser intensity control APC (Automatic Photocurrent Con- Makes amount of laser beam constant on a line-byline basis.
trol)
Laser scanner motor con- Polygon motor control signal Controls rotation of the polygon motor in a specified speed.
trol
Laser OFF control Laser shutter control Prevents laser beam exposure inside of the host machine.
Engine Controller PCB
IC
J210 J209
Laser control signal

Polygon motor control
BD signal
Automatic photocurrent control

(APC)
Laser Lighting Timing Control

■ Laser Control Signal
The laser beam on/off state is controlled by a combination of the laser control signals (CONT0/1/2) from the engine controller
PCB (PCB1). The engine controller PCB (PCB1) sends video signals for image formation (VDO1, /VDO1, /VDO2, /VDO2) and
laser control signals (CONT0/1/2) to the laser unit. Based on the combination of the CONT0/1/2 signals, the laser unit controls
the on/off state of the two laser beams. The following table shows the different combinations of the laser control signals
(CONT0/1/2).
Laser control signal Laser status

CONT2 CONT1 CONT0 Laser A Laser B Description
0 0 0 OFF OFF Laser control OFF
0 1 0 ON OFF APC_A control
0 0 1 OFF ON APC_B control
49
Laser control signal Laser status

CONT2 CONT1 CONT0 Laser A Laser B Description
0 1 1 OFF OFF Forcible output OFF
1 0 0 ON ON Laser AB Forcible output
1 0 1 OFF ON Laser B Forcible output
1 1 0 ON OFF Laser A Forcible output
1 1 1 Enable video signal entry Enable laser emitting following the video sig-
nal.
■ BD signal
The BD signal is a horizontal (horizontal scanning) sync signal that the controller uses to output image signals for each scan. A
printer starts sending a BD signal when it detects that the picked up sheet of paper reaches a specific point. The controller assumes
the beginning of a continuous BD signal to be the leading edge of paper, and the end of the signal to be the trailing edge.
Light Intensity Control

■ APC (Automatic Photocurrent Control)
The APC monitors the laser beam that the built-in photodiode in the laser diode receives and adjusts the light intensity to an
appropriate level.
Laser Scanner Motor Control

■ Polygon Motor Control Signal
The rotation speed of the polygon motor is controlled according to the polygon motor rotation speed signal (FG signal) from when
the motor starts to when image formation takes place after reaching the target rotation. During image formation, the polygon
motor rotation speed is controlled on the basis of the BD signal. The polygon motor rotation speed is controlled by an acceleration
signal (ACC signal) and deceleration signal (DEC signal).
IC
J210
ACC
DEC
FG
BD
50
Laser OFF Control

■ Laser Shutter Control
When the drum unit is pulled out, the laser shutter that operates in conjunction with the drum unit moves down to block the laser
optical path. Also, when it is detected that the front cover or the left door has been opened, the polygon motor and laser output
are turned off.
[1]
[3]
[2]
OPEN
[1]
[2]
[1] Polygon mirror

[3]
[2] Laser shutter
[3] Laser beam
CLOSE
[1]
[2]
[3]
51
Image Formation System

The major specifications, controls and functions of the image formation system is described below.
Item Specifications
Photosensitive drum Material OPC drum
Drum diameter (Φ) 30mm
Cleaning method Rubber blade
Process speed 214mm/sec
Primary charging Charging method Roller charging
Roller diameter (Φ) 12mm
Transfer Transfer method Roller transfer
Roller diameter(Φ) 16mm
Developing Assembly Developing method Dry one-component jumping development (AC+DC)
Toner type Magnetic negative toner
Toner level detection Permeability sensor, video count
Developing cylinder diameter 20mm
Separation Separation method Curvature and static eliminator
Toner waste container Drum unit

[2] [3] [4]
[1] [5]
[6]
[10]
[9]
[7]
[8]
No Name Function
[1] Photosensitive Drum Forms image on surface of the photosensitive drum.
[2] Cleaning Blade Removes remaining toner on surface of the photosensitive drum.
[3] Primary Charging Roller Negative charge on surface of the photosensitive drum in conjunction with the drum rotation.
[4] Developing Blade Controls amount of toner uniformed on the developing cylinder.
[5] Drum Unit Consists of a photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, etc.
[6] Developing Assembly Consists of a developing cylinder, developing blade, etc.
[7] Toner Cartridge A cartridge filled with toner for supply.
[8] Developing Cylinder Transfers toner from the developing assembly to the photosensitive drum.
[9] Transfer Roller Positive charge back side of paper to transfer toner from the photosensitive drum to paper.
[10] Static Eliminator Negative charge back side of paper to separate paper from the photosensitive drum.
52
Image Formation Process

The image formation system mainly consists of 6 blocks such as primary charging, laser exposure, developing, transfer,
separation and cleaning.
Primary Charging Roller

Cleaning blade
[6] Drum cleaning block
Photosensitive
Drum
Paper
[1] Primary charging block

[5] Separation
block
Static Eliminator [2] Laser exposure block
[3] Developing
block
Transfer Roller
[4] Transfer
block
Developing Cylinder
No. Image Formation Proc- Description

ess
[1] Primary charging block Negative potential is formed on the surface of the photosensitive drum.
[2] Laser exposure block Latent image formation is formed on the photosensitive drum as charge neutralization is procee-
ded by laser beam sweep.
[3] Developing block Visible image is formed as the negatively-charged toner on the developing cylinder is adhered to
the latent image formation on the surface of the photosensitive drum.
[4] Transfer block A toner on the photosensitive drum is transferred to the paper as positive charge is applied to the
back of it.
[5] Separation block A paper is easily separated from the photosensitive drum with its elastic force while negative
charge is applied to the back of the paper.
[6] Drum cleaning block A cleaning blade scrapes a residual toner on the surface of the photosensitive drum and it feeds
the waste toner to the drum unit.
Basic Sequence
Basic sequence for printing is shown as follows.
53
Main Power Switch ON
Sequence WAIT STBY INTR PRINT LSTR

1 Main Motor (M1)
2 Fixing Motor (M3)
3 Polygon Motor (M2)
4 Laser
5 Pre-registration Sensor(SR11)
6 Fixing Delivery Sensor(SR5)
7 Registration Clutch (CL1)
8 Charging AC Bias
9 Charging DC Bias
10 Charging AC/DC Bias
11 Developing DC Bias
12 Transfer Bias
13 Separation Static Bias
14 Fixing Bias
Drum Unit
The drum unit mainly consists of a photosensitive drum, cleaning blade and primary charging roller. The drum unit is driven by
the main motor (M1). The cleaning blade is in contact with the surface of the photosensitive drum to remove remaining toner
which is not transferred to paper.
Cleaning Blade
Photosensitive Drum
M1
Main Motor drive signal
■ Primary Charging Bias Control

The primary charging bias system is charged directly by a charging roller. In addition to DC bias, AC bias is applied to the primary
charging roller to provide constant charging.
54

Photosensitive Drum
HVT PCB
Environment Sensor
Primary Environment sensor

charging bias detection signal
drive signal
Primary DC bias Primary AC bias

control circuit control circuit
■ AC Bias Switch Control

The AC bias output value is changed according to the environment detected by the environment sensor (SR18).
■ Detection Full of Waste Toner

Turn ON/OFF the waste toner full sensor (SR6) intermittently by torque limiter when the main motor (M1) rotates in almost full of
the waste toner. Full of waste toner is detected by counting ON/OFF signal of the sensor.
■ Prior delivery of the Drum Unit (Drum Unit prior delivery alarm)
The host machine requests UGW for prior delivery of the drum unit either when life of the drum unit reaches to the setting value
(%) or when the full of waste toner is detected by the waste toner full sensor (SR6). The setting value(%) is available to set in
between 50 to 200% (default 100%) in the service mode.
Condition Detection timing Message

Drum warning 1 When end of life of the drum unit reaches to the None (Only drum unit prior delivery alarm)
setting value %.
Drum warning 2 When the elapsed 7 days after the drum warning Rplc drum. Check error w/ status monitor key.
1, or when the waste toner reaches to full.
Notice of replacement. When printing over 200 sheets of paper after the Replace drum unit.
full of waste toner detection.
Detection of replacement com- When a fuse is cut and replacement is detected None (Only drum unit replacement completion
plete automatically . alarm)
Alarm Code
35-0073 Drum Unit replacement completion alarm
40-0073 Drum Unit prior delivery alarm
Service Mode
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > D-DLV-BK : Set drum low alarm notice timing
COPIER > OPTION> DSPLY-SW > DRM-WARN : Display / Hide a drum unit replacement message
■ Detection of drum (presence)

To detect if the drum unit is installed or not
Execution timing
• WAIT
• When recovering from ESS.
55
• Recovery sequence
• Installation sequence
Detection description
It is determined by the current monitor signal of the primary charging AC bias at discharge current control.
• In case that current monitor value is less than the specified value (1.5V): no Drum Unit.
• In case that current monitor value is the specified value (1.5V) or more: Drum Unit present.
Operation of the main unit

Operation of the main unit is stopped while “No drum unit” is shown on the control panel.
Primary charging roller

Primary charging AC
Engine
Monitoring signal HVT
Controller PCB
■ Old/new detection of drum unit

To detect if the drum unit is installed or not
Detection timing.
When detected a Drum Unit in power-on
Detection description
To check state of the fuse that is attached to each drum unit
• Fuse detection signal (High): New drum
• Fuse detection signal (Low): Used drum
Operation of the main unit

1. The main unit checks detection signal of the fuse attached to the drum.
2. If a fuse signal is High, the main unit clears the parts counter and drum life counter data of the drum unit, which is kept in
SRAM (IC1).
In addition, notify of replacement complete
3. The main unit cuts the fuse (to make the fuse cut signal “H”)
Drum unit
Engine
Fuse cut signal Controller PCB
Fuse detection signal SRAM

(IC1)
Fuse connecting PCB
NOTE:
Fuse cut operation is executed when the power is turned ON after a new Drum Unit is installed.
Thus, if replacing a Drum Unit to another one (new one) to identify a cause of failure at a field, fuse is blown and the drum counter
life data is cleared.
As a result, even though the original Drum Unit is installed to the host machine again, the host machine judges it to be new one
and a right count value (life) is not provided.
With consideration to above matter, do not use a new Drum Unit when identifying a cause of failure.
56
■ Drum life detection

To detect life of the Photosensitive Drum.
The life data is stored in the SRAM (IC1) of the DC Controller. The drum life value can be checked from the service mode.
Target drum Detection items Data storage location Reference service Unit
mode
Bk durm AC bias applying time SRAM (IC1) of the Engine Drum life display (COP- %
Controller IER>COUN-
TER>LF>DRM-LF)
The drum life data varies according to the image type, paper type, use environment, etc.
For this reason, the value written in the drum life display is for reference, so this is not the accurate value.
Developing Assembly
The developing assembly mainly consists of a developing cylinder, a developing blade, and a stirring plate. The developing
assembly is driven by the main motor (M1). The toner sensor (SR17) which is a permeability sensor, detects the toner level in
the developing assembly.
Developing Assembly
Stirring Plate
Developing Cylinder SR17
Developing Blade
M1
Main Motor Sleeve Clutch

drive signal drive signal
■ Developing Bias Control

DC bias and AC bias are applied to the developing cylinder.
57
Photosensitive Drum
Environment Sensor
Developing Cylinder
HVT PCB
Developing bias Environment sensor

drive signal detection signal
Developing DC bias Developing AC bias

control circuit control circuit
■ DC/AC Bias Constant Voltage Control

The DC bias control circuit and AC bias control circuit in the engine controller PCB are controlled so that the DC bias and AC
bias applied to the developing cylinder are at constant voltages.
■ Toner Cartridge Setting Operation

When the toner cartridge has been inserted, drive is transmitted from the drum unit to the toner cartridge so that the toner cartridge
sets itself in a position where its memory can be readable.
■ Toner Cartridge State Detection

Purpose: To detect the state of the toner cartridge
• Toner cartridge memory is read-in by the terminal in the developing assembly.
[2]
[1]
Screen display
58
By a detection state of the memory, display the following messages.
Message Status
Cart.Malfunction Malfunction or non-Canon toner cartridge may be inserted.
Cart.Not Inserted Toner cartridge is not inserted.
wrong item number A non-Canon cartridge or a cartridge with the wrong item number may be inserted.
■ Toner Level Detection

After the main motor (M1) drive stabilizes or stops, the toner sensor (SR17) samples the permeability of the magnetic substance
in the toner to detect whether the toner is present. If the toner is present near the toner sensor (SR17) surface, toner is assumed
to be present. If it is not, the toner is assumed to be absent.
Toner Container
Toner Sensor(SR17)
Developing Assembly
Toner lev- Status Message Operation

el
Presence None When the toner is present, a message is not dis-
played on the control panel.
Empty Toner Low When the toner empty(0%) is detected, a mes-

(presence (Replacement sage is displayed on the control panel. The print
in the toner Not Yet Nee- operation continues and the toner bottle can be
container) ded) replaced while printing.
(toner low alarm)
Empty Toner End After toner empty is detected, Approx. 600 sheets
(Replace the to- of paper can be printed. The print operation stops
ner cartridge) when the toner END is detected.
■ Pre-delivery of the Toner (toner low alarm )

The host machine requests UGW for pre-delivery of the toner either when remaining quantity of the toner reaches to the setting
value (%) or toner empty is detected by the toner sensor (SR17). The setting value(%) is available to set in between 1 to 40%
(default 26%) in the service mode. The host machine notifies UGW for replacement complete when printing is available after
replacement the toner cartridge.
59
Alarm Code
10-0020 Toner cartridge prior delivery alarm
10-0100 Toner cartridge replacement alarm
Service Mode
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-DLV-BK : Set toner low alarm notice timing
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > TNR-WARN : ON/OFF of toner warning display
■ Toner Bottle Related Counters

Counter name Toner Bottle counter *3 *4 Unidentified Toner Bottle counter *3 *4
Counter No. 074(Bk) 181(Bk)
Description It counts how many Toner Bottles are consumed. It counts how many unidentified Toner Bottles *1 are con-
sumed.
Service Mode COPIER > OPTION > USER > TNRB-SW
Display on the 0: Not displayed.
counter Check 1: Displayed (Toner Bottle counter)
Screen 2: Displayed (Toner Bottle counter + Premature removal counter) *2
3: Displayed (Toner Bottle counter + Unidentified Toner Bottle counter)
*1: A Toner Bottle whose memory information cannot be read for some factors
*2: This machine does not support a premature removal counter.
*3: Note that machines are shipped without resetting the counter of the Toner Bottle used in the factory.
*4: Caution is required immediately after replacing the DC Controller PCB since the counter is not advanced even if the Toner
Bottle is replaced in the following conditions/timing.
• The DC Controller was replaced with the power OFF, and then a new Toner Bottle was installed before the power was turned
ON.
• The DC Controller was replaced with the power OFF, and then the power was turned ON with the Toner Bottle removed or
with the Front Cover open, and a new Toner Bottle was installed.
Transfer Unit
The transfer unit consists mainly of a transfer roller and a static eliminator. The transfer roller rotates as a slave to the drum unit.
Separation Static Charge Eliminator
Transfer Roller
60
■ Transfer Bias Control

Negative bias, sheet-to-sheet bias, and positive bias are applied to the transfer charging roller according to the type of sequence.
Photosensitive Drum
Separation Static
Charge Eliminator
Environment Sensor
Transfer Roller
HVT PCB
Separation static
charge eliminator Transfer bias Environment sensor
bias control signal control signal detection signal
Separation static charge

Transfer bias control circuit
eliminator control circuit
■ Cleaning Bias Control

A negative voltage is applied at the last rotation to return the toner adhered to the transfer roller back to the photosensitive drum.
■ Separation Static Eliminator Bias Control

To make it easier to separate paper from the photosensitive drum by reducing the electrostatic attraction force between the two,
2 types of negative voltages, a strong bias and a weak bias, are applied to the static eliminator according to the print mode and
sequence.
61
Fixing System
Overview
The on-demand fixing method is equipped.
Fixing Film Unit
Paper
Pressure Roller
Fixing inlet guide

Item Function / Method
Fixing method On-demand fixing
Fixing heater Ceramic heater
Controlled temperature 205 deg C (A4 / plain paper) *1
Temperature control Main thermistor and Sub thermistor
Edge heat rising prevention control Down sequence control
Fixing loop control Arch sensor (SR14)
Protective Function • Main thermistor and Sub thermistor
• Thermo switch (Rate operation temperature: 270 deg C +/- 10 deg C )
*1. Target temperature is specified by paper size, fixing mode, number of prints and fixing temperature at the start of warm-up
control. Fixing temperature: The temperature that thermistor detected.
62
Fixing Film Unit
Pressure roller
Fixing Pressure
Release Sensor 2 (SR16) Fixing Pressure
Release Sensor 1 (SR15)
Thermo Switch (TP2/TP3)
Fixing Delivery
Sensor (SR5)
Fixing Sub
Thermistor (TH2)
Fixing Main
Thermistor (TH1)
Fixing Heater (H1)
No. Item Function / Method

- Fixing film unit Applies heat and pressure to fix toner image on a sheet of paper.
- Pressure roller
H1 Fixing heater Ceramic heater
TH1 Main thermistor • Contacts with the heater.
• Temperature control and detection of abnormal temperature rise.
TH2 Sub thermistor • Contacts with the heater (non-feeding area).
• Temperature control and detection of abnormal temperature rise, temperature de-
tection/cooling control on edges.
TP2/TP3 Thermo switch • Contacts with the heater.
• Blocks AC electric power supply when a failure is detected.
SR5 Fixing delivery sensor Detects jam.
SR15 Fixing Pressure Release Sensor 1 Detects release pressure.
SR16 Fixing Pressure Release Sensor 2 Detects release pressure.
63
Fixing Temperature Control
(Initial
■ Print Temperature Control

To increase the fixing temperature until the target temperature and keep the target temperature during the printing.
• Startup (wait) temperature control
• Print temperature control
• Sheet-to-sheet temperature control
■ Down Sequence Control

To prevent fixing failure due to edge temperature rise or temperature fall, which reduced the productivity (through-put).
• Down sequence when printing continuously
• Down sequence when switching paper size
64
Print Temperature Control
(Initial
■ Startup (wait) Temperature Control

To increase fixing temperature to be ready for printing after receiving the print-start command.
■ Print Temperature Control

Set appropriate target temperature determined by environment in fixing mode (7 types) to prevent fixing error or high temperature
offset. Control the temperature to keep the target temperature determined by the detected temperature at the Main thermistor
(TH1) during the printing.
■ Sheet-to-sheet Distance Temperature Control

To prevent the excessive temperature rise and to save the power consumption, the target
temperature is set lower than the printing temperature.
A4 size, 1-sided
Fixing mode Paper type Target temperature (deg C)

Transparency mode Transparency Target temperature -10
(60 to 63g/m2)
Plain paper mode Plain paper Target temperature -10
(64 to 90g/m2)
Heavy paper mode Heavy paper 1 Target temperature -5
(91to 105 g/m2)
Super Heavy paper mode Heavy paper 2 Target temperature -5
(106 to 128 g/m2)
OHP mode OHP Target temperature -10
Label mode Label Target temperature -10
Envelope mode Envelope -
*The target temperature is not different from the environment temperature.
65
NOTE:
• The target temperature in the envelope mode is -10 deg C less than the target temperature during the printing.
• The target temperature in the envelope mode while through-put down performing is -15 deg C less than the target temperature
during the printing.
Error Code
E000-0000 : Fixing assembly temperature rising error during the startup
E001-000x : Fixing assembly abnormal high temperature
E002-0000 : Fixing assembly temperature rising error during the printing
E003-000x : Fixing assembly abnormal low temperature
Service Mode
COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM > TEMP-TBL : Fixing temperature setting at plain, 1/1 speed
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TB14 : Fixing temperature setting (plain, thin paper, OHP, 1/2speed)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL2 : Fixing temperature setting (heavy paper 1, 1/2speed)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL4 : Pickup timing adjustment
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL6 : Fixing temperature setting (envelope)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBLC : The fixing surface temperature setting on Special Mode N
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMPTBLC2 : Paper curl correction mode: 2nd
COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM > FLK-RD : Flicker reduction mode
Down Sequence Control

■ Down Sequence when Printing Continuously
Purpose:
To prevent temperature rise of non-feeding area in the case of continuous print, fixing offset or deterioration of fixing film.
Starting conditions:
The down sequence is performed step by step.
When the detected temperature of sub thermistor reaches the specified condition, the through-put decreases every one step.
Normal
1st Step
Return
2nd Step
3rd Step
Operation:
Temperature is reduced by making wider sheet-to-sheet distance with the maximum 4 steps to control the temperature at lower
than the target temperature for normal print.
Through-put: "iR1430 / 1435" is indicated in the figure
66
Fixing Step LTRR A4R LGL 16K A5R, B5R Envelope Custom pa-
mode STMTR EX- per size
ECR
Transparen- normal 18/18 18/18 15/15 15/15 15/15 - 5/5
cy 1 9/9 9/9 7/7 12/12 12/12 - 4/4
2 4/4 4/4 4/4 10/10 10/10 - 3/3
3 2/2 2/2 2/2 6/6 6/6 - 2/2
Plain paper normal 31/37 30/35 25/30 16/16 15/15 - 5/5
1 18/18 18/18 15/15 14/14 12/12 - 4/4
2 4/4 4/4 4/4 10/10 10/10 - 3/3
3 2/2 2/2 2/2 6/6 6/6 - 2/2
Heavy paper normal 18/18 18/18 15/15 15/15 15/15 - 5/5
1 9/9 9/9 7/7 12/12 12/12 - 4/4
2 4/4 4/4 4/4 6/6 6/6 - 3/3
3 2/2 2/2 2/2 4/4 4/4 - 2/2
Super Heavy normal 12/12 12/12 10/10 15/15 15/15 - 5/5
paper mode 1 6/6 6/6 5/5 12/12 12/12 - 4/4
2 3/3 3/3 3/3 6/6 6/6 - 3/3
3 2/2 2/2 2/2 4/4 4/4 - 2/2
OHP mode normal 18/18 18/18 - - - - -
1 9/9 9/9 - - - - -
2 4/4 4/4 - - - - -
3 2/2 2/2 - - - - -
Label mode normal 12/12 12/12 10/10 - 15/15 - 5/5
1 6/6 6/6 5/5 - 12/12 - 4/4
2 3/3 3/3 3/3 - 6/6 - 3/3
3 2/2 2/2 2/2 - 4/4 - 2/2
Envelope normal - - - - - 12/12 5/5
mode 1 - - - - - 8/8 4/4
2 - - - - - 6/6 3/3
3 - - - - - 4/4 2/2
Completion conditions:
When the fixing temperature reaches the specified temperature or lower for certain period time, the through-put returns to the
normal step.
Service Mode
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > EDG-WAIT(0: OFF, 1: ON) : Edge temperature rise standby setting
■ Down Sequence when Overheating inside the Machine

Through-put down is not performed by the host machine internal temperature rise.
User Mode Related to Fixing Grade

The fixing grade is affected by some special modes in user mode which change the control temperature or through-put. The
related modes are as follows.
Special Mode N
Outline Curl correction mode
Use case When paper jam occurs in 2-sided printing using the curled paper and absorbed moisture paper.
Details Paper jam frequently occurs when performing 2-sided printing, especially with the curled paper and absorbed mois-
ture paper. In this case, change the setting value to Mode 1 (N1 mode) or Mode 2 (N3 mode).
• N1 mode: Lower the fixing target temperature for plain paper.
• N3 mode: The through-put decreases during the wait.
Set range AUTO, OFF, N1 Mode, N3 Mode
67
Special Mode N
Default value AUTO
Special Mode S
Outline Performance priority mode
Use case Cooling down operation is controlled without dropping the throughput as far as possible.
Details The temperature judgement value of the fixing sub thermistor is changed between the start of cooling down and the
end in the last rotation.
Set range OFF(190 deg C), ON(220 deg C)
Default value OFF
Special Mode P
Outline Thin paper mode
Use case When paper cling or high-temperature offset occurs with out-ofspecific thin paper.
Details Control paper cling while changing following conditions.
Transfer
• Turns ON at 8mm inside of paper.
• Turns OFF at the sheet-to-sheet.
Separation
• -2500V until 6mm inside of paper (leading edge strong bias)
• -1500V other than the above (weak bias)
Fixing temperature control
• The target temperature in the "Thin paper mode" is set -10 deg C less than the target temperature during the
wait, printing and sheet to sheet.
Set range OFF, ON
Default value OFF
Paper Loop Amount Control before Fixing

Purpose:
To print an appropriate image by avoiding shock when the trailing edge of paper ejects from the registration roller since an
appropriate paper loop is formed between the transfer and the fixing.
Pressure Roller Fixing Film Unit
Drum
<SensorOFF> <SensorON>
Arch Sensor (SR14) Registration Roller
Transfer Roller
Execution condition:
Performed every paper feed.
Operation:
The arch sensor detects paper loops between the transfer nip and the fixing nip. Fixing motor drive speed is varied as follows.
1. The fixing motor is set to low speed when the leading edge of paper is fed 35 mm from the transfer nip. This speed is
maintained until 91 mm from the nip.
2. When the arch sensor on state is detected continuously for 24 ms or longer, the fixing motor is set to high speed. This speed
is maintained until the loop disappears causing the arc sensor to turn off.
3. When the arch sensor off state is detected continuously for 24 ms, the fixing motor is set to low speed. This speed is
maintained until a predetermined amount of loop is detected causing the loop sensor to turn on.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the paper trailing edge passes through the transfer nip.
68
5. After the trailing edge is fed 10 mm from the transfer nip, the fixing speed is set to high, and loop control is terminated.
However, if the paper trailing edge tension mode is on and the paper type is transparency, the fixing motor drive speed is
set to 108.3 mm/s when the paper reaches 63 mm in front of the transfer nip.
6. If the next sheet of paper is available, the operation returns to step 1. Otherwise, the operation proceeds to last rotation.
Service Mode
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR >FX-SP-H: Paper trailing edge tension setting
Protection Features
■ Error Latch Control
In case that the main power is turned ON/OFF for recovery when error occurs, heater is turned on electricity several times to
prevent danger condition such as over heat.
Operation Specifications:
Operation of turning on electricity to read out error information just after turning ON the main power is suspended, which the error
information is written in the EEPROM error latch storage area of the engine controller PCB when a specific error occurs.
Code Description Error Clear

E000 Fixing assembly temperature rising error during the startup Yes
0000 The fixing assembly does not rise to the constant temperature within specified time during the startup.
E001 Fixing assembly abnormal high temperature Yes
0000 The main thermistor detects 260 deg C or more.
0001 The sub thermistor detects 295 deg C or more.
E002 Fixing assembly temperature rising error during the printing Yes
0000 The fixing assembly does not rise to the constant temperature within specified time during the printing.
E003 Fixing assembly abnormal low temperature Yes
0000 • The main thermistor detects abnormal low temperature during the printing, sheet-to-sheet and ejection.
• The main thermistor detects abnormal low temperature during the wait, and cleaning.
0001 • The sub thermistor detects abnormal low temperature during the printing, sheet-to-sheet and ejection.
• The sub thermistor detects abnormal low temperature during the wait, and cleaning.
E004 Thermistor disconnection detection error No
0000 • When thermistor disconnection is detected.
• When the engine controller PCB is damaged.
E014 Fixing pressure or release is not available by the fixing motor (M3). No
0000 Fixing release is never detected more than 3 sec or more by the fixing pressure release sensor 1/2
(SR15/16).
0001 Fixing pressure is never detected more than 3 sec or more by the fixing pressure release sensor 1/2
(SR15/16).
E261 Zero cross detection error No
0000 Zero cross error is detected.
Service Mode
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR: Clearing error code
69
Pickup Feed System

Item Description
Paper storage method Front loading method
Pickup method Cassette Retard separation method
Multi-purpose pickup tray Pad separation method
Paper stack capacity Cassette 500 sheets (80g/g/m2)
Multi-purpose pickup tray 100 sheets (80g/g/m2)
Paper feed reference Center reference
Paper grammage Cassette 64 to 90g/m2
Multi-purpose pickup tray 64 to 128g/m2
Paper size switch Cassette User
Multi-purpose pickup tray User
Duplex method Through path
Option Cassette Feeding Module-AC1
FL CASSETTE-AW1
Parts Configuration
■ Arrangement of Rollers
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Cassette 1 Pickup Roller [7] Registration Roller
[2] Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad [8] Duplex Roller
[3] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller [9] Pressure Roller
[4] Multi-purpose Tray Vertical Path Roller [10] Fixing Film Unit
[5] Cassette 1 Separation Roller [11] Delivery Reverse Roller
[6] Cassette 1 Feed Roller
70
■ Arrangement of Sensors
SR10
SR5
SR14
SR11
SR13
SR12
No. Name No. Name

SR5 Fixing Delivery Sensor SR12 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor
SR10 Delivery Full Sensor SR13 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor
SR11 Pre-registration Sensor SR14 Arch Sensor
■ Route of Drive
M3
SL1
M1
CL1
SL2
SL5
No. Name No. Name

M1 Main Motor SL1 Duplex Solenoid
M3 Fixing Motor SL2 Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid
CL1 Registration Clutch SL5 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid
71
■ Diagram of Paper Paths
Reversing point
Delivery point
Pickup from
Manual Feeder
Pickup from Cassette 1
Pickup from Cassette 2
Pickup Block
Reverse/Duplex
Assembly
Fixing / Registration
Assembly
Multi-Purpose
Pickup Assembly
Cassette Pickup
Assembly
Area Detection / Control

Cassette pickup assembly Paper length detection
Paper presence detection
Cassette Presence Detection
Multi-purpose pickup assembly Paper presence detection
Paper size detection
Fixing/registration assembly Registration control
Duplex/delivery assembly Number of Circulating Sheets at the 2-sided Print
JAM detection JAM detection
72
Cassette Pickup Assembly

The paper inside the cassette is lifted by the middle plate. During pickup, the cassette 1 pickup solenoid (SL2) turns on to rotate
the cassette 1 pickup roller a full turn. When the cassette 1 pickup roller comes in contact with the paper surface, the top sheet
is picked up by roller rotation. Only a single sheet of paper is picked up and moved to the feed path by the cassette 1 separation
roller and fed to the registration roller by the cassette 1 feed roller. The cassette 1 feed roller and cassette 1 pickup roller are
driven by the main motor (M1). For the pickup control of cassette 2, refer to the Cassette Feeding Module-AC1 service manual.
[4] M1
[3] SL2
[2]
[1]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Lifter plate [3] Cassette 1 Feed Roller
[2] Cassette 1 Separation Roller [4] Cassette 1 Pickup Roller
■ Paper Length Detection

It does not have a cassette paper size detection function. The size of the paper in the cassette is determined by converting the
time from when the registration clutch (CL1) turns on to when the paper trailing edge passes through the pre-registration sensor
(SR11) into distance.
SR11
■ Paper Presence Detection

Paper presence is detected by the cassette 1 paper sensor (SR13). It does not have a function for detecting the paper level in
the cassette.
SR13
Cassette 1 paper sensor Paper level Display on the control panel

OFF Presence
ON Absence
■ Cassette Presence Detection

It does not have a cassette presence detection function. When the cassette is not inserted, the cassette paper sensor flag moves
to the evacuation position so that it is unable to detect paper and unable to print.
73
Multi-Purpose Pickup Assembly

The paper in the tray of the multi-purpose pickup tray is forced against the multi-purpose tray pickup roller by the middle plate.
Then, the multi-purpose tray pickup roller and separation pad separates and feeds a single sheet of paper.
Multi-purpose Tray
Pickup Roller M1
SL3
Multi-purpose Tray
Lifter plate Separation Pad
■ Paper Presence Detection

It does not have a paper size detection function. Likewise the cassette paper size detection, the size of the paper in the multi-
purpose tray is determined by converting the time from when the registration clutch (CL1) turns on to when the paper trailing edge
passes through the preregistration sensor (SR11) into distance.
■ Paper Size Detection

Paper presence is detected by the multi-purpose tray paper sensor (SR12). If paper absence is detected, same paper size and
type are presence in other paper source, auto cassette change is executed.
Fixing/Registration Assembly
■ Registration Control
The registration roller is driven by the main motor (M1). In between the registration roller and the main motor (M1) is the registration
clutch (CL1) which controls the on/off state of the registration roller so that the paper and the image on the drum are aligned at
a specific registration.
M1
CL1
Registration Roller
Duplex/Delivery Assembly
The relative time from when the fixing delivery sensor (SR5) is turned off is used to detect the timing at which the paper trailing
edge passes through a point 25 mm upstream from the delivery/reverse roller. This timing is used to turn on the duplex solenoid
(SL1). After the duplex solenoid (SL1) turns on, the delivery reverse roller turns in reverse direction, and the paper is led to the
duplex assembly. The paper is fed for the paper length + margin (10 mm) + duplex solenoid (SL1) connecting time (26 ms), and
then the duplex solenoid is turned off. The paper fed to the duplex assembly is delivered to the registration roller by the duplex
roller.
74
M3
Reverse Flapper
SL1 Delivery Reverse Roller
SR5
M1
Duplex Roller
Registration Roller
■ Number of Circulating Sheets at the 2-sided Print

It does not have an internal queue mechanism, a single sheet circulates at a time.
JAM Detection
SR02
SR01
SR10
SR5
SR14
SR11
Jam name Details

Pickup delay jam 1 When the Pre-registration Sensor (SR11) fails to detect the leading edge of paper after the start of image
formation and before the start of re-pickup
Pickup Stationary Jam 1 When the Pre-registration Sensor (SR11) fails to detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified period of
time after the start of re-pickup
Fixing delivery delay When the Fixing Delivery Sensor (SR5) fails to detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period of
jam 1 time after the start of re-pickup
Fixing delivery station- When the Fixing Delivery Sensor (SR5) fails to detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified period of
ary jam 1 time after the Pre-registration Sensor (SR11) detects the trailing edge of paper
75
Jam name Details

Internal stationary jam 1 When one of the following sensors detects presence of paper at power-on, door close, or before/after print
operation
• Pre-registration Sensor (SR11)
• Fixing Delivery Sensor (SR5)
• Delivery Full Sensor(SR10)
• Arch Sensor(SR14)
Door Open Jam 1 When one of the sensors detects presence of paper when door open is detected during printing
Wrapping jam 1 When the Fixing Delivery Sensor (SR5) turns OFF after the Fixing Delivery Sensor (SR5) detects the trailing
edge of paper and before detection of a fixing delivery stationary jam is started
Reverse Area Jam In the case that the Pre-registration Sensor (SR11) cannot detect the paper leading edge although a specified
period of time has passed after the paper was reversed in 2-sided printing
Paper size mismatch When the rule range of the paper size appointed does not contain the length of the fed paper
76
External Auxiliary System
Software Counter
The host machine is equipped with counters that indicate the counts of output according to types of job. These counters are
indicated in response to a press on the Counter Check Key on the control panel. Counters for each country (model) are listed
below.
Count-up timing
1-sided print / 2nd side of 2-sided print : Delivery Full Sensor (SR10)
1st side of 2-seded print : Pre-registration Sensor (SR11)
Target Display number of each counter (in service mode) / item Country
Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 Code
120V Total 1 Copy (Total 1) *1 *1 *1 *1 Group 4
UL model 101 201 000 000 000 000
General model 101 201 000 000 000 000 KOR
KOR model CHN
CHN model
230V Total (Black/ Scan (Total 1) Scan (Total 1) *1 *1 *1 Group 1
UK model Small)
type1 113 501 301 000 000 000
(existing type)
230V Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 Group 1
UL model type2 101 000 000 000 000 000
( new method)
120V Total 1 Copy (Total 1) *1 *1 *1 *1 Brazil
CLA model 101 201 000 000 000 000
CLA model 101 201 000 000 000 000
*1: Nothing is displayed as a default. The setting can be changed in the service mode.
<Explanation of the list>
• Small: Small size paper (when paper length is 324 mm or less in paper feed direction)
• Total: Copy + Print; 1 count up
• Three-digit number in the counter column shows the setting value of the following service mode items.
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER 1 to 6.
• COUNTER 2 to 6 can be changed in the service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER).
• The change of the counter display type (New method/Conventional method) can be changed in the service mode (COPIER
> OPTION > USER> CNT-SW).
Group Country Default User mode type setting

KOR KOREA 0 KOREA
CHN CHINA 0 CHINA
BRA BRAZIL 0 BRA2
Group 1 Austria - AUSTRIA
EUR Belarus - BELARUS
Middle East Africa
Belgium - BELGIUM
Czech - CZECH
Denmark - DENMARK
Egypt - EU3
Finland - FINLAND
France - FRANCE
Germany - GERMANY
Greece - GREECE
Hungary - HUNGARY
77
Group Country Default User mode type setting

Group 1 Ireland - IRELAND
EUR Italy - ITALY
Middle East Africa
Jordan - EU3
Luxembourg - LUXEMBOURG
Netherlands - N.L.
Norway - NORWAY
Poland - POLAND
Portugal - PORTUGAL
Russia - RUSSIA
Saudi Arabia - EU3
Slovenia - SLOVENIA
South Africa - SAF
Spain - SPAIN
Sweden - SWEDEN
Switzerland - SWISS
Ukraine - UKRAINE
United Kingdom 0 U.K.
Others - EU1
- - EU2
Group 3 Hong Kong - HONG KONG
Oceania Singapore 0 SINGAPORE
Asia
New Zealand - N.Z.
Latin America 230V
Malaysia - MALAYSIA
Vietnam - EU1
Argentina - ARG
Others(Australia) - AUSTRALIA
Others(ASIA) - ASIA
Others(Latin) - EU1
Group 4 USA - USA
North America Canada - USA
Latin America 120V
Brazil - BRA
Mexico - LATIN
Others - LATIN
Group 5 Argentina 0 ARG
Others(Latin) - EU1
Fan
FM2
FM1
FM3
78
No. Name Function Error Code

FM1 Delivery Cooling Fan Cools delivery part E805-0000
FM2 Power Supply Cooling Fan Cools power supply E805-0002
FM3 Image Formation Part Cooling Fan Cools image formation part E805-0001
■ Fan Drive Sequence

WUP STBY INI PTINT LSTR STBY JAM
/ERROR
Delivery Cooling Fan (FM1)
*2
Power Supply Cooling Fan
(FM2) *2
Image Formation Part
Cooling Fan (FM3) *1
: Full-speed
*1: In 1-sided, stops driving at 27 deg C or less and drives full speed at 27 deg C or more.
*2: Stops immediately when Door open is detected.
Service Mode
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > DLVFN-SW : Set the delivery cooling fan operation
Power Supply
+3.3V
Fixing Heater Main Controller +5V
Reader
PCB +24V
Main Switch
Heater
(SW93/94)
control +3.3V
circuit +3.3V +5V generation +24V ADF
(All-night) circuit
+12V generation
+3.3V
circuit
+5V Control Panel
+24V +3.3V
Laser Scanner
+24V Unit
AC Driver PCB +24V +12V generation
+3.3V circuit
Motor
(Not All +3.3V Solenoid
-night) Clutch
+24V
Fan
+12V
Sensor
+24V
+3.3V
Engine Controller
+24V
PCB
+24 V +3.3V
generation generation
circuit circuit +3.3V
OPTION
Left Cover Switch +24V Cassette Module
Power Supply PCB (SW2)
+3.3V
HVT PCB +24V
OPTION
Power-Saving Mode
This is the function to save power consumed by the printer. The table below lists various power-saving modes.
Power-Saving Mode Status

Stand-by at power-OFF on the reader
Power-saving at power-OFF on the reader and the display (LCD)
Sleep Sleep 1 at power-OFF on the reader, engine and the display (LCD)
Sleep 2 at power-OFF on the reader and the engine.
79
Power-Saving Mode Status

Sleep Sleep 3 (3W sleep) at power-off on the reader, the engine and the display (LCD)
The main controller enters the power-saving mode.
Automatic shutdown* The Main Power Switch is turned OFF when a specified period of time has passed (default:
4 hours)
after the machine has entered sleep mode (excluding sleep 2).
*: In the case of a model without fax

Explanation
Service error of the status
Power-off The automatic shutdown time has passed.
Power-on
Power-saving
Power-on
Power-off
Service call
depending on the conditions

Standby
Automatically shifted
Sleep 1B Sleep 3
Non-all-night
24V OFF
The energy saver key is pressed.
Control Panel Automatically shifted
The auto sleep time has passed. depending on the conditions
Reader
Sleep 1A
Energy saver The auto sleep
The energy saver time has passed.
Engine
key is pressed. ↓A job is Non-all-night
The energy saver generated 24V ON
Controller key is pressed. /completed.↑
Hook detection
* The reader is turned ON
The energy saver key is pressed.
only when it is used. Hook detection
The auto sleep time has passed.
Sleep 2
←A job is generated/completed.→
No service error (no error requiring a service visit) has occurred.
80
3 Technical
Explanation
(System)
Overview of System Management...... 82
Version Upgrade................................. 83
Setting Information Export/Import
Function (DCM)............................... 88
Monitoring Function (e-Maintenance/
imageWARE Remote)..................... 98
Security Functions.............................102
3. Technical Explanation (System)
Overview of System Management

This chapter describes information for service technicians on the system of this machine.
Although this chapter contains some information described in the User's Guide, for details on the functions for users, refer to the
e-Manual.
82
Version Upgrade
Function Overview
The following firmware upgrade methods are available with this device.
Version upgrade using User Support Tool (UST).
Upgrade the firmware of the device using UST
Open the file for UST version upgrade on a PC connected with the device and upgrade the firmware.
Since the host machine and the PC are connected using a USB cable, version upgrades can be performed in an environment
where a network is not available.
Version upgrade via Internet

Access the dedicated server, and download and upgrade the firmware.
Provided that Internet connection is available, the system automatically configures the connection destination setting and
executes processing such as download and version upgrade.
Version upgrade using a USB flash drive (released only in special cases)
Upgrade the firmware of this machine using a USB flash drive.
Connect a USB flash drive where the firmware is stored to the device, and update the firmware in service mode.
Version upgrades can be performed in an environment where a PC or network is not available.
NOTE:
Firmware that can be used for version upgrade using a USB flash drive is released only in special cases such as a tender business,
and is not normally released. As for the detailed version upgrade procedure, follow the instructions given at the time of release of
the customized firmware for version upgrade using a USB flash drive.
Version upgrade by replacing the PCB

Version upgrade by replacing the existing PCB with a PCB where the latest firmware is installed
CAUTION:
A message appears when an attempt is made to upgrade a host machine to which specified firmware has been applied.
This is a precaution not to use wrong firmware to upgrade a host machine to which specified firmware has been applied.
See the following regarding the combination of whether the message will be displayed:
Type of firmware applied to the Firmware to upgrade

host machine General firmware Specified firmware
General firmware No message No message
Specified firmware Message displayed Message displayed
83
Version Upgrade Using UST

UST is included in the firmware for the machine that can be downloaded from the website of CINC. Firmware is downloaded as
a zip file and a folder containing UST is extracted by decompressing the file.
When executing UST on the PC connected to the machine with a USB Cable, the firmware can be upgraded by downloading it
from the PC to the machine. For the detailed procedure, refer to "User Support Tool Operation Guide" stored in the decompressed
folder. "User Support Tool Operation Guide" is also available on the website of CINC.
PC
Firmware
Firmware
USB cable/
Network cable
Version Upgrade via Internet

Connect to the Internet using the network function of the device, and download and upgrade the latest firmware from the server.
If the device is in an environment where Internet connection is available, firmware versions can be upgraded only by operation
from the menu without using PC.
■ Prerequisite
In order to perform version upgrade of the device via Internet, the following conditions must be met.
There should be no other jobs being executed.

Firmware cannot be upgraded while there is a job being executed. If there is a job being executed, wait for completion of the
job and then perform the work.
The device should be able to be connected to the external network.

If connection is not available because, for example, there is a proxy server, follow the e-Manual to configure the proxy server
settings and enable connection to the external network.
The serial number of the host machine should be shown on the Main Controller PCB.
Whether or not the serial number of the host machine is shown on the Main Controller PCB can be checked from the Control
Panel or SPEC REPORT.
The procedure for checking the serial number using SPEC REPORT is shown below as reference information.
Procedure to check from SPEC REPORT

1. Execute the following service mode to print SPEC REPORT.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > SPEC
84
2. Check if the serial number (3 alphabetical characters + 5-digit number or 1-digit number + 2
alphabetical characters + 5-digit number) is shown in [MACHINE SERIAL NUMBER] of the printed SPEC
REPORT.
******************************
*** SPEC REPORT ***
******************************
Device Info ZZ999 Series
ROM Version
MAIN 00.75
BOOT 00.25
LANG 01.36
ECONT 00.10
PANEL 05.01
Device Code A0000000
Locale 9
Voltage TYpe 0
BODY No. ZZZ99999
Factory Flag 12345678
■ Procedure for Upgrading the Firmware via Internet

1. Select the following menu to upgrade the firmware via Internet:
• [Menu] > [Management Settings] > [ense Other] > [Update Firmware] > [Via Internet ]
Menu System Management Settings Update Firmware Update firmware ?

Scan Settings PDL Selection (Plug and Play) Via PC Must turn main power
MEmory Media Settings Register License Via Internet OFF/ON after update
Printer Settings Update Firmware Version Information
Adjust memory /Maintenance Initialize key and Certificate
System Management Settings Initialize Addres Book Yes No
Output Report Initialize Menu
When the upgrading of firmware is completed, the machine automatically restarts.
2. Select the following menu, and check that the firmware has been correctly upgraded:
• [Menu] > [Management Settings ] > [ense Other] > [Update Firmware] > [Version Information]
Update Firmware Version Information

Via PC Main Controller :
Via Internet Ver. 00.73
Version Information Boot ROM :
Ver. 00.25
DCON :
Close
CAUTION:
This function does not support the operations from remote UI. ( [Update Firmware] does not exist in the [System
Management Settings] menu of the remote UI.)
85
■ Messages
The message displayed on the device operation panel is as follows.
No Error message The timing of oc- Remedy

. currence
1 Job in progress... Wait a moment, then try again. If there is a job being 1. Wait until the job is completed.
executed: 2. Cancel the job.
2 Cannot check the firmware version. (Server com- Network error 1. Check whether the device can be connected to the ex-
munication error.) ternal network.
2. Check whether the proxy setting has been made (in
case of access via a proxy server).
3 Cannot download the firmware. (Error during 1. Check whether the device can be connected to the ex-
download.) ternal network.
2. Check whether the proxy setting has been made (in
case of access via a proxy server).
3. Check that the serial number of the host machine is
shown on the Main Controller PCB.
4 ***DOWNLOAD MODE*** NETWORK AVAILA- If update (writing) of 1. Update the firmware again using UST.
BLE IP ADRESS IP address of the machine the firmware has
PRESS STOP KEY TO EXIT ended in failure:
5 ***DOWNLOAD MODE*** FAILED TO UPDATE
6 ***DOWNLOAD MODE*** UPDATE IS COM- If the update of the -
PLETE firmware is suc-
cessful
Version Upgrade Using a USB Flash Drive (Released Only in Special

Cases)
Connect a USB flash drive where the firmware is stored to this machine, and update the firmware in service mode.
NOTE:
Firmware that can be used for version upgrade using a USB flash drive is released only in special cases such as a tender business,
and is not normally released. As for the detailed version upgrade procedure, follow the instructions given at the time of release of
the customized firmware for version upgrade using a USB flash drive.
■ Prerequisite
In order to perform version upgrade of the machine using a USB flash drive, the following conditions must be met.
There should be no other jobs being executed.

Firmware cannot be upgraded while there is a job being executed. If there is a job being executed, wait for completion of the
job and then perform the work.
■ Procedure for Upgrading the Firmware Using a USB Flash Drive

1. Connect a USB flash drive where the firmware is stored to this machine.
2. Execute one of the following service modes.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD
• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD_FORCE
NOTE:
If you want to apply only firmware that is newer than the firmware currently applied in the machine, execute DOWNLOAD. If you
want to apply all the firmware contained in the USB flash drive regardless of whether it is newer or older, execute DOWNLOAD_
FORCE.
3. The signature data of the downloaded file is verified, and download instruction information is written to the
designated area of the flash memory only if the verification result is correct.
86
4. The machine is automatically restarted.
5. When the upgrading of firmware is completed, the machine automatically restarts.
87
Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM)
Overview
Various data is stored in the storage inside the device.
Depending on the works to be done such as replacing parts, this data needs to be backed up and restored.
There are some ways to back up and restore data, and the appropriate one should be used depending on the purpose and storage
destination.
This section describes the procedure for backing up and restoring service mode setting values.
For the procedure for backing up and restoring other information, refer to the e-Manual.
■ Function Overview
This machine has a setting information export/import function (hereinafter referred to as DCM (Device Configuration Management)
function) which exports/imports the machine's setting value information as a file. The file exported/imported using the DCM
function is called a DCM file, and the target setting information is as follows:
• Setting information of [Menu] ([Setting/ Registration ] menu)
• Service mode setting information
• Address Book
The DCM file is exported to a USB flash drive or PC local disk from the Control Panel or remote UI.
The exported DCM file can be returned to the original device or imported to a different device.
When the file is returned to the original device, this can be used as a function to back up the settings, and when the file is imported
to a different device, this can be used as a function to copy setting information.
Data can also be imported to or exported from an iR-ADV machine by using iW EMC/MC DCM Plug-in.
In the case of the setting value backup function before implementation of the DCM function, an exported file could be imported
only to the same device, but the DCM function enables import of an exported file to a different device.
DCM support device DCM

DCM
USB memory
device DCM file
DCM file
DCM
DCM DCM support
Settings/
device
Registration DCM file
DCM file
Remote UI DCM
Service mode DCM
DCM
DCM file DCM support

iW EMC/MC
iR-ADV
with DCM Plug-in DCM file
Conceptual diagram
NOTE:
In order to export or import setting information using DCM, it is necessary that the device supports DCM.
■ Backup/Restoration for Service Technicians

Backup and restoration from [Menu] ([Setting/ Registration ] menu)
Setting information can be backed up and restored from the Control Panel of the device or from [Menu] ([Setting/
Registration ] menu) of remote UI.
Although [Menu] ([Setting/ Registration ] menu) is for users, the service mode settings information can be backed up
and restored from the Import/Export function by changing the service mode setting.
The service mode settings information can be backed up and restored only by accessing from the remote UI [Settings/Registration]
menu.
Backup/Restoration Using Service Mode

Some of the functions in service mode can be used to backup and restore data.
DC-CON/R-CON setting value information and service counter (DC-CON) values can be backed up and restored.
88
■ Combination of Information Exported/Imported by DCM, Means, and Storage

Locations
A DCM file is exported and imported using the Control Panel, remote UI, or the iW EMC server, depending on the situation of the
site.
The information exported/imported differs depending on the means.
Combinations of them are shown in the following table.
Menu used Operation Information exported Save destination

Setting values of Address book**1 Service mode set-
menu options ting
values
[Settings/Registra- Control panel Yes (fixed)*2 Yes (fixed)*2 No USB flash drive
tion] Remote UI Yes Yes PC local disk
With conditions*3
menu
Service mode Control panel No No Yes USB flash drive / Storage in the
host machine
Remote UI No No Yes Storage in the host machine
■ Compatibility of Data
The following table shows compatibility of data in the case where the device from which the data is exported and the device to
which the data is imported differ in model and/or serial number.
For items that are imported in Cases A, B, and C, refer to “List of Items Which Can Be Imported” on page 373.
Model Serial number Import process

Same Same Items corresponding to Case A are imported.*4
Same Different*5 Items corresponding to Case B are imported.*4
Different Different*5 Items corresponding to Case C are imported.*6
Different Same The file is judged to be invalid, and the process ends with an error.
■ Replacement Mode
When this function is used for migrating the setting data upon replacement of a device, some of the data cannot be migrated if
the model to which the data is migrated is different.
When this function is used in normal mode, data that is applicable to either Case B (of different serial number) or Case C (of
different model) cannot be imported.
When replacement mode is enabled on the device on the importing side, data can be forcibly migrated even to a device of a
different serial number or even between different models.
Normal mode Replace mode

Case A Case A
Case B Case B
Case C Case C
*1. Models without address books are excluded. In the case of a fax option model without SEND function, address books are
exported only if a fax option is connected with the device.
*2. When the [Settings/ Registration] menu is used from the Control Panel, both the setting menu information and the address book
are imported/exported. It is not possible to export/import only either of them.
Information which is not included in the data to be imported is not imported.
*3. Service mode is added to the data to be exported only when service mode COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD-EXPT is set.
For information on items that are imported, refer to "List of Items Which Can Be Imported".
*4. If the firmware version at the time of import differs from that at the time of export, predetermined corrective processing may be
performed.
*5. If a serial number is missing, the serial numbers are judged to be mismatched.
*6. Predetermined corrective processing may be performed.
89
The following shows the procedure to turn ON/OFF replacement mode of the device to which the migrating data is imported.
1. Set the following service mode setting value to "1(ON)" or "0(OFF)".

• COPIER > OPTION > USER > RPL-IMP
CAUTION:
Since replacement mode is not lifted automatically, the setting value of the foregoing service mode needs to be changed
back to "0" to return to normal mode.
The targeted items of replacement mode are as follows.

List of Replacement Mode Targeted Items
User mode setting items Settings (* indicates default Remarks

values)
System settings
Device information settings
Device name 32 characters Model name is displayed as a default value.
Installation site 32 characters
Network settings
TCP/IP settings
IPv4 settings
IP address 0.0.0.0 *
IPv6 settings
Manual address settings
Use manual address OFF*/ON
Manual address IP address input screen
Prefix length (0 to *64 to 128)
Default router address Router address input screen
DNS settings
Use the same host/domain name as OFF/ON*
those of IPv4
Host name Enter the host name
Domain name Enter the domain name
mDNS Settings
mDNS Settings OFF/ON*
Use the same mDNS name as that OFF/ON*
of IPv4
mDNS name Enter the mDNS name
SMB settings
NetBIOS name NetBIOS name for own machine
(15 byte)
Workgroup name Belonging workgroup name (15
byte)
AirPrint settings
Installation site 32 characters Setting values to be referred are the same
as [Installation Site] in the [System Settings]
Import/Export Procedure from [Settings/Registration] of Remote UI

This section describes the procedure for backing up and restoring service mode setting information by using the [Import/Export]
function in the [Settings/Registration] menu of Remote UI.
90
CAUTION:
• The service mode setting information can be backed up and restored only from the [Settings/Registration] menu on
Remote UI, and the operation cannot be performed from the [Settings/Registration] menu on the Control Panel.
• In the case of backing up and restoring only the setting information of the [Settings/Registration] menu or the address
book, refer to the procedure described in the e-Manual.
■ Limitations
The following limitations exist when backing up and restoring the service mode settings information from the [Settings/
Registrations] menu of remote UI.
A job must not be accepted during an import/export processing.

Except for the calibration requested by the engine, a job is not allowed to be accepted during a processing. In addition, import/
export must not be performed during execution of a job.
Firmware must not be updated during an import/export processing.

Fax cannot be received while firmware is updated during a processing. In addition, import/export must not be performed also
during firmware update.
Power must not be turned off during an import/export processing.

If power discontinuity occurs during an import processing, a rollback processing is not performed, therefore the settings
imported up to that point are reflected while the rest of the settings remain as-is.
When power discontinuity occurs during an export processing, export is not executed.
■ Procedure for Export from Remote UI ([System Management Settings] Menu)

Service mode setting information can be exported from the [Management Settings] menu by setting the following service mode
setting value to "1".
1. Enter service mode, and set the following item to "1".

• COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD-EXPT
TNRB-SW : 0
SCALL-SW : 0
SCALLCMP : 0
PS-MODE : 0
SMD-EXPT : 1
ALL-SLP : 1
RPL-IMP : 0
NOTE:
The [SMD-EXPT] setting can be configured either from the Control Panel or from the remote UI.
91
2. Exit service mode, start remote UI, log in as a system administrator, and then select the following item:
• [Setting/ Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/Export] > [Export]
3. After confirming that [Service Mode] is displayed/selected in [Select Item to Export], enter the password and click
[Start Exporting].
Address Book
Select the check box to export the address book data.
Settings/Registration
Select this check box to import the menu option data.
Encryption password
Enter 32 or less numeric characters set when the file was exported.
4. The [File Download] dialog box will appear. Save the file to any location.

CAUTION:
Since the screen of export function can also be accessed by the user, be sure to disable the [SMD-EXPT] setting (setting
value: 0).
■ Procedure for Import from Remote UI ([System Management Settings] Menu)

Import the service mode setting information file that was exported in the previous procedure.
92

TNRB-SW : 0
SCALL-SW : 0
SCALLCMP : 0
PS-MODE : 0
SMD-EXPT : 1
ALL-SLP : 1
RPL-IMP : 0
NOTE:
The [SMD-EXPT] setting can be configured either from the Control Panel or from the remote UI.
2. Exit service mode, start remote UI, log in as a system administrator, and then select the following item:
• [Setting/ Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/Export] > [Import]
3. Configure the import setting, and click [Start Importing].

Entering the encryption password and clicking [Start Importing] imports the menu option data.
[Browse...] button
Click to select the file to import.
Decryption password
Enter 32 or less numeric characters set when the file was exported.
Address Book
Select the check box to import the address book data.
Settings/Registration
Select this check box to import the menu option data.
93
4. A dialog box asking whether the user wants to execute import will appear. Click [OK].
5. A message will appear to indicate that the process has been completed. Click the [OK] button.
6. Restart this machine, enter service mode, and confirm that the setting information is reflected. This completes the
procedure for importing a setting information file.

CAUTION:
Since the screen of export function can also be accessed by the user, be sure to disable the [SMD-EXPT] setting (setting
value: 0).
Procedure for Exporting/Importing Service Mode Setting Information

Service mode setting information can be backed up and restored by using service mode functions. The backup file can be saved
to a USB flash drive or a storage in the machine.
Backup/restoration to a USB flash drive

COPIER > FUNCTION >SYSTEM > EXPORT
COPIER > FUNCTION >SYSTEM > IMPORT
Backup/restoration to a storage in the machine

COPIER > FUNCTION >SYSTEM > SAVE-SM
COPIER > FUNCTION >SYSTEM > RSTR-SM
Backup/restoration to a USB flash drive Backup/restoration to a storage in the machine

Storage destination USB flash drive Storage in the machine
Number of files saved Depends on the capacity of the USB flash drive One
Duplication of the setting Possible Not possible
values for other machines
■ Procedure for Exporting to a USB Flash Drive

Use the service mode function to save the service mode setting information to a USB flash drive.
This operation can be performed both from the Control Panel and remote UI.
The following USB flash drives can be used for export/import.
• USB flash drive in FAT 16 format (storage capacity: 2 GB)
• USB flash drive in FAT 32 format (storage capacity: 32 GB)
Note that the descriptions in parenthesis in the procedure are the descriptions in the case of remote UI.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB Memory Port.
94
2. Enter service mode, and execute the following service mode.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT
PANEL-UP
LOGWRITE DISPLAY
IMPORT IO CCD
EXPORT ADJUST CLEAR
FUNCTION MISC-R
OPTION MISC-P
COUNTER SYSTEM
VIFFNC
SPLMAN
CAUTION:
Even if the service mode is executed without connecting a USB flash drive, an error is not displayed.
It looks as if the process has been completed successfully, but the file has not been exported to anywhere.
For the reason shown above, be sure to check before execution that a USB flash drive is connected.
3. The message shown below which is displayed during the process will disappear. When the display has returned to
the original state, remove the USB flash drive.
Executing...
4. Check that a setting information file (service.dcm) exists in the directory directly under the root of the USB flash
drive.
This completes the procedure for exporting a setting information file.
■ Procedure for Import from USB Flash Drive

1. Save the setting information file (service.dcm) to be imported to directly under the root of the USB flash drive.
2. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB Memory Port.
95

• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > IMPORT
SERVICE MODE
DISPLAY
COPIER IO CCD
CLEAR PANEL-UP
FEEDER ADJUST LOGWRITE
FAX FUNCTION MISC-R
MISC-P IMPORT
TESTMODE OPTION EXPORT
COUNTER SYSTEM
VIFFNC
SPLMAN
4. The message shown below which is displayed during the process will disappear. When the display has returned to
the original state, remove the USB flash drive.
Executing...
5. Restart the host machine, enter service mode, and confirm that the setting information is reflected.
This completes the procedure for importing a setting information file.
■ Backup Procedure to the Storage in the Machine

Use the service mode function to back up the service mode setting information to the storage in the machine.
This operation can be performed both from the Control Panel and remote UI.
The setting information that can be saved in the machine's storage is only one.

Access service mode, select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > SAVE-SM, and click [OK (EXEC)].
SERVICE MODE
COPIER DISPLAY
IO CCD
FEEDER CLEAR PANEL-UP
ADJUST LOGWRITE
FAX FUNCTION MISC-R
TESTMODE OPTION MISC-P IMPORT
SYSTEM EXPORT
COUNTER
VIFFNC SAVE-SM
SPLMAN RSTR-SM
LOG2USB
2. The following screen is displayed during the processing:
Executing...
3. Finish the operation after checking that the screen returns to the previous display.
■ Procedure for Restoration from Internal Storage

Restore the service mode setting information that has been backed up to the storage in the machine in the previous procedure.
96

• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSTR-SM
SERVICE MODE
COPIER DISPLAY
IO CCD
FEEDER CLEAR PANEL-UP
ADJUST LOGWRITE
FAX FUNCTION MISC-R
TESTMODE OPTION MISC-P IMPORT
SYSTEM EXPORT
COUNTER
VIFFNC SAVE-SM
SPLMAN RSTR-SM
LOG2USB
2. The following screen is displayed during the processing:
Executing...
3. Finish the operation after checking that the screen returns to the previous display.
97
Monitoring Function (e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote)
Overview of System
E-RDS (Embedded RDS) is a monitoring program that runs on the host machine. When the monitoring option is enabled by
making the setting on this machine, information such as the status change of the machine, counter information, and failure
information are collected. The collected device information is sent to a remote maintenance server called UGW (Universal
Gateway Server) via Internet.
The information to be monitored is:
• Billing counter
• Parts counter
• ROM version
• Service call error log
• Jam log
• Alarm log
• Change of status (such as status of consumables)
Since the information shown above is customer information, HTTPS/ SOAP protocol is used for communication between the
UGW server and the host machine to improve security.
Customer
UGW
Environment This machine
Internet
㻲㼕㼞㼑㼣㼍㼘㼘
Sales Company
DNS Server Proxy Server Administrator
■ Features
E-RDS is embedded in the network module of the device, and the front-end module of the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote
system is realized without requiring hardware besides the device.
■ Main Functions
Functional cat- Sub category Description
egory
Communication Test By executing the following service mode, E-RDS communicates with UGW, retrieves
Test schedule information, and establish communication.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-TEST
Transmission of Billing/all resources/parts/ E-RDS Periodically send billing/all resources/parts/mode-by-mode counters to the
counters mode-by-mode counters server.
Transmission of Service call/alarm/jam log Each time a service call, alarm, or jam log occurs, the error log is sent to the server.
event logs Having alarm log or not is different by a model.
Data transmis- ROM version / Device configu- E-RDS periodically sends the firmware information of the device to UGW. E-RDS
sion ration sends the device configuration information only when there is any change in the
configuration.
E-RDS Debug log Debug logs of E-RDS are stored in E-RDS, and they are sent to UGW only when
they exceed a specific size.
Sublog transmission When E-RDS catches the sublog transmission of a message designation than UGW,
send data such as device Sublogs and DCON logs to the server.
Operation in- Operation check E-RDS contacts UGW to check if there is processing to be executed next, and re-
struction ceives the following instructions if any.
• Linkage with CDS
• Sublog transmission
98
Servicing Notes
• After clearing the Main Controller PCB, initialization of the E-RDS setting (ERDS-DAT) and a communication test (COM-
TEST) need to be performed. If this work is omitted, an error may occur when counters are sent to UGW.
After replacing the Main Controller PCB, all the settings need to be reconfigured.
• Do not change the values of the following service modes unless otherwise instructed.
If they are changed, it will ends with a communication error with UGW.
• Port number of UGW
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RGW-PORT
Default: 443
• If the e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote contract of the device becomes invalid, be sure to turn OFF the E-RDS setting
(E-RDS: 0).
• When the E-RDS function is enabled, a communication test can be performed from [Check Counter] of the Control Panel of
the host machine. *1
When conducting a communication test from [Check Counter], pay attention to the following points:
• During a communication test, do not take any actions such as pressing a key. Actions are not accepted until the
communication test is completed (actions are ignored).
• When a communication test is being conducted from service mode or from [Check Counter], do not conduct a
communication test from the other. This operation is not guaranteed.
Setting Procedure
■ Preparation
Since this function communicates with the UGW server, it is necessary to connect to the external network.
Check the following items, and make the settings if not yet set.
• IP address settings
• DNS server settings
• Proxy server settings*2
• Installation of CA certificate (arbitrary *3 )
CAUTION:
• Obtain the information on the network environment from the system administrator of the user.
• When having changed the network settings, turn OF and then ON the main power of the machine.
■ Procedure for Setting E-RDS

1. In the following service mode, select the following service mode to initialize the E-RDS setting values:
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERDS-DAT
NOTE:
This operation initializes the E-RDS settings to factory setting values.
For the setting values to be initialized, see the section of“Setting values and data to be initialized” on page 100 .
*1. The user can perform a communication test or browse the result of communication test.
Check Counter Monitoring Service Do you want to perform a

communication test ?
Check Device Configuration Communication Test
Yes No
Monitr. Serv.
If the communication results in failure, an error code (hexadecimal number, 8 digit) is displayed on the Control Panel.
*2. If authentication is necessary, make the settings of the authentication information as well.
*3. When using a certificate other than those pre-installed in the device
99
2. Enable the E-RDS function in the following service mode, and perform a communication test.
1. Select the following item:
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ERDS
2. Enter [1] from the keyboard, and press [Apply].
CAUTION:
The following settings i.e. RGW-PORT in Service mode must not be change unless there are specific instructions to do so.
Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
When the E-RDS function is enabled, the function to communicate with UGW is enabled.
3. Select [COM-TEST] and then touch [Yes].

If the communication is successful, "OK" is displayed. If "NG" is displayed, check the network settings and USW server
address (URL).
CAUTION:
The communication results with UGW can be distinguished by referring to the COM-LOG. By performing the communication
test with UGW, E-RDS acquires schedule information and starts monitoring and meter reads operation.
Maintenace
■ Initializing E-RDS settings
It is possible to clear the FLASH data of E-RDS and change the E-RDS setting back to the default value.
● Initialization procedure
Follow the procedure shown below to initialize E-RDS.
1. Enter service mode as a system administrator user.
2. Select the following service mode, and press [OK] to execute.

• COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERDS-DAT
● Setting values and data to be initialized

The following E-RDS settings, internal data, and Alarm filtering information are initialized.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ERDS
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RGW-PORT
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-LOG
CAUTION:
If a certificate other than the CA certificate at the time of shipment has been installed, initializing the E-RDS setting will not
change the settings back to those at the time of shipment. To change the certificate back to the CA certificate at the time
of shipment, delete the certificate (install the CA certificate at the time of shipment) after initializing the E-RDS settings.
■ Report Output of Communication Error Log (COM-LOG)

A report of communication error log information on five affairs can be output.
● Report output procedure

1. Select the following service mode, and press [Yes].
• COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > ERDS-LOG
100
12/09 2015 10:14AM

****************************
*** E-RDS-COM-LOG***
****************************
No.01 DATE 12/09 2015 TIME 03:21 AM CODE 05000003
Information SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed.
Information SUSPEND: mode changed.
Information SUSPEND: mode changed.
Output sample
101
Security Functions
A technical description on the security-related functions implemented in this equipment and the works to be performed for servicing
are shown below.
Security Policy Function

What is security policy function?
The security policy function is a function for collectively configuring the security-related settings on devices located at various
places.
If the user has security policies such as information security basic policies and security standards, the settings can be collectively
configured/managed in accordance with the security policies.
DCM
Plug-in
Data
Security policy settings
Security policy settings
Perform either of the following works to configure the security policies on this equipment.
• Using iW EMC DCM Plug-in, distribute the security policy settings created by an iR ADVANCE third generation device.
• Import the DCM file exported from a device of the same series where the security policy settings have already been enabled.
Export/import from remote UI

DCM Obtain/distribute by executing
Plug-in a DCM Plug-in task
Data
DCM files
Data
DCM file
iR ADVANCE
third generation
Device of this series
with the security policy
This equipment ith the security policy
settings configured
settings configured
NOTE:
Security policy settings can be configured on devices of this series only by distributing the settings using iW EMC DCM Plug-in.
A DCM file imported from a device of this series where the security policy settings have been configured can be used to configure
the settings, but the original device where the settings have been configured can be created only by using iW EMC DCM Plug-in.
In iR ADVANCE series, the security policy function is implemented only in the third generation devices.
■ Security Administrator
● Differences between Security Administrator and System Manager
In the security policy setting function, there is an administrator called a "security administrator" in addition to the conventional
"system manager".
102
The system manager can operate/set all the items in the [Settings/Registration] menu of the device.
However, if the security policy has been set by the security administrator described later, even the system manager cannot perform
operation or change the settings against the security policy.
The security administrator is an administrator who creates, applies, edits, backs up, and restores the security policy.
The security administrator is a system manager and is a user who knows the password for the security policy settings.
Account [Settings/Registration] menu Policy-related

Add/ Settings Settings Initialize Initialize Intro- Browse Back up/ Disable
delete (Adminis- (Other (User (Service duce/ restore the re-
trator set- than the mode) mode) change strictions
tings) adminis-
trator set-
tings)
Security administrator *1 *1 -
System manager *1 *1 - - - -
End user - - *1 - - - - - -
Service technician - - - - - -
● Security Administrator Password

The security administrator password is a password that is set to protect the configured security policy. The password setting is
not mandatory.
Behavior when the security administrator password has been set

If the security administrator password has been set on this equipment, the security administrator password is required when
[Initialize All Data/Settings] is executed. This is intended to prevent the device from being initialized without discretion and
the configured security policy from being disabled.
NOTE:
Even if the security administrator password has not been set, as long as the security policy has been configured, [Management
Settings] > [Data Management] > [Initialize Menu] is grayed out and cannot be used.
Importing the security administrator password

If a security policy setting file of iR ADVANCE series where the security administrator password has been set is imported
via iW EMC DCM Plug-in, the security administrator password is not reflected.
In the case of importing the file via iW EMC DCM Plug-in, it is necessary to execute [Create Task to Change Security Policy
Password] and distribute the security administrator password to set the security administrator password.
Setting informationand
the security administrator password
Data
Export Import
DCM ファイル
DCM file
Model of the same series This equipment
Setting information
Distribute the setting information
DCM
Plug-in
Administrator
DCM ファイルpassword
Distribute the administrator password
This equipment
Initializing the security administrator password

In case the user has forgotten the security administrator password, there is a service mode setting for initializing the password.
Execute the service mode shown below to initialize the security administrator password set on this equipment.
Service mode > COPIER > Function > CLEAR > PLPW-CLR
*1. Restrained by the policy
103
■ Screen Displayed When Security Policy Is Applied

If the security policy is applied, the message shown below appears when you access the [Settings/Registration] screen.
Example of the remote UI screen
Some settings are in read-only mode

because the security settings are enabled.
Only the current settings can be selected.
Some settings are in
read-only mode
because the security
settings are enabled
Example of the Control Panel (Touch Panel) screen
If the security administrator password has been set, the security administrator password is required when [Initialize All Data/
Settings] is executed.
En t e r Se c u ri t y Ad m i n i s t ra to r Pa s s wo rd
q w e r t y u i o p -
Security Adm. Password a s d f g h j k l
<Apply> @ z x c v b n m , . /
Entry Mode: A
Symbol a 1/# Space
Apply
Security administrator password entry screen
■ Checking the Configured Settings

The policy settings that have been configured can be checked on the remote UI screen shown below.
1. Start remote UI as a user having the administrator privileges.
104
2. Display the screen shown below.

• [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Security Settings] > [Confirm Security Policy]
Screen example
NOTE:
On the [Confirm Security Policy] screen, all the settings related to security policies are displayed regardless of the model.
Therefore, policy settings related to functions that are not implemented in the model are also displayed.
For example, the models of this series do not have the SMB server function, but [Restrict SMB Port] is displayed.
■ Export/Import of Setting Information

For the procedure for exporting/importing setting information, refer to the User's Guide of this equipment or the User's Guide of
iW EMC DCM Plug-in.
105
4 Periodical Service
Periodically Replaced Parts.............. 107
Consumable Parts.............................108
Periodical Service............................. 109
Cleaning............................................ 110
4. Periodical Service
Periodically Replaced Parts

Periodic replacement parts are not required in this machine.
107
Consumable Parts
Consumable parts are not required in this machine.
108
Periodical Service
No periodic services are required to this machine.
109
Cleaning
[7]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[5]
[6]
[13]
[8]
[10]
[9]
[11]
[12]
No Part name Category Interval Cleaning item

[1] Transfer Guide Developing Assembly Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
[2] Transfer Roller Developing Assembly Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
[3] Fixing Inlet Guide Fixing Assembly Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
[4] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller Main Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
[5] Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad Main Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
[6] Pre-registration Guide Separation Static Charge Elim- Main Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
inator
[7] Stream Reading Glass Reader Unit Timely Oil glass cleaner
[8] ADF Pickup Roller ADF Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
[9] ADF Separation Pad ADF Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
[10] ADF Separation Roller ADF Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
110
No Part name Category Interval Cleaning item

[11] ADF Delivery Roller ADF Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
[12] Feed Guide / Rib ADF Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
[13] Delivery Roller / Roller ADF Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
- Various Rollers / Slave Rollers ADF Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
111
5 Parts Replacement
and Cleaning
Parts List........................................... 113
External Cover/Interior System......... 121
Original Exposure and Feed System
(Reader)........................................ 131
Original Exposure and Feed System
(ADF)............................................. 137
Controller System..............................148
Laser Exposure System.................... 156
Image Formation System.................. 158
Fixing System....................................169
Pickup/Feed System......................... 180
5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning
Parts List
External/ Internal Cover

■ Front
[1] [2]
[11]
[3]
[4]
[10]
[5]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
No. Name Reference

[1] Feeder Cover “Removing the Feeder Cover” on page 128
[2] Document Tray “Removing the Document Tray” on page 130
[3] Delivery Tray “Removing the Delivery Tray” on page 127
[4] Control Panel “Removing the Control Panel Unit” on page 127
[5] Front Right Cover “Removing the Front Right Cover” on page 126
[6] Front Cover Unit “Removing the Front Cover Unit” on page 121
[7] Left Front Cover “Removing the Left Front Cover” on page 124
[8] Front Upper Cover “Removing the Front Upper Cover” on page 124
[9] Multi-purpose Tray “Removing the Multi-purpose Tray” on page 181
[10] Left Door Unit “Removing the Left Door Unit” on page 180
[11] Left Rear Cover “Removing the Left Rear Cover” on page 125
113
■ Rear
[12]
[13]
No. Name Reference

[12] Rear Cover “Removing the Rear Cover” on page 122
[13] Right Cover “Removing the Right Cover” on page 122
Main Unit
■ Main Unit
[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
114
No. Name Reference

[1] ADF Unit “Removing the ADF Unit” on page 137
[2] ADF Pickup Feed Unit “Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit” on page
142
[3] Scanner Unit “Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader)” on
page 131
[4] CIS Unit “Removing the CIS Unit” on page 134
[5] Copyboard Glass Unit “Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit” on page
133
[12]
[6]
[11] [13]
[7]
[8]
[10]
[9]
No. Name Reference

[6] Control Panel Unit “Removing the Control Panel Unit” on page 127
[7] Cassette 1 -
[8] Left Door Unit “Removing the Left Door Unit” on page 180
[9] Multi-purpose Tray “Removing the Multi-purpose Tray” on page 181
[10] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit “Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit” on
page 182
[11] Fixing Assembly “Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 169
[12] Laser Scanner Unit “Laser Exposure System” on page 156
[13] Developing Assembly “Remove the Developing Assembly” on page 160
115
[16]
[17]
[15]
[14]
No. Name Reference

[14] Main Drive Unit “Removing the Main Drive Unit” on page 183
[15] Fixing Drive Unit “Removing the Fixing Drive Unit” on page 186
[16] Main Controller PCB “Removing the Main Controller PCB” on page 148
[17] Engine Controller PCB “Removing the Engine Controller PCB” on page
151
PCB
PCB6
PCB10
PCB5
PCB3
PCB2
PCB9
PCB4
PCB1
No. Name Main Unit Reference Remarks

PCB1 Engine Controller PCB Main Unit “Removing the Engine Con-
troller PCB” on page 151
PCB2 Main Controller PCB Main Unit “Removing the Main Control-
ler PCB” on page 148
PCB3 AC Driver PCB Main Unit -
PCB4 Power Supply PCB Main Unit “Removing the Power Sup-
ply PCB” on page 152
PCB5 Control Panel PCB Main Unit “Removing the Control Pan-
el PCB” on page 154
PCB6 HVT PCB Main Unit “Removing the HVT PCB” on
page 153
PCB9 Modem PCB Main Unit - iF model only
116

PCB10 USB PCB Main Unit - except J model
Solenoid
SL01
SL1
SL2
SL5

SL1 Duplex Solenoid Main Unit -
SL2 Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid Main Unit -
SL5 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid Multi-purpose Tray Unit -
SL01 ADF Disengagement Solenoid ADF Unit -
Motor
M2
M01
M02
M3
M1
No. Name Main Unit Reference Remark

M1 Main Motor Main Drive Unit -
M2 Polygon Motor Laser Scanner Unit -
M3 Fixing Motor Fixing Drive Unit -
M01 ADF Motor ADF Unit -
M02 Reader Motor Reader Unit -
117
Sensor
SR03
SR02
SR01
SR10
SR15
SR16
SR5
SR11
SR14 SR13
SR6
SR12 SR17

SR01 Document End Sensor ADF Unit -
SR02 Document Sensor ADF Unit -
SR03 CIS Unit HP Sensor Reader Unit -
SR5 Fixing Delivery Sensor Fixing Assembly -
SR6 Waste Toner Full Sensor Main Unit -
SR10 Delivery Full Sensor Main Unit -
SR11 Pre-registration Sensor Main Unit -
SR12 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor Multi-purpose Tray Unit -
SR13 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor Main Unit -
SR14 Arch Sensor Main Unit -
SR15 Fixing Pressure Release Sensor 1 Fixing Assembly -
SR16 Fixing Pressure Release Sensor 2 Fixing Assembly -
SR17 Toner Sensor Main Unit -
Fan
FM2
FM1
FM3
No. Name Main Unit Reference Remark

FM1 Delivery Cooling Fan Left Door Unit -
FM2 Power Supply Cooling Fan Main Unit -
FM3 Image Formation Part Cooling Fan Main Unit -
118
Switch
SW93 / 94
SW2
SW3

SW2 Left Cover Switch Main Unit ―
SW3 Front Cover Switch Main Unit ―
SW93 Main Switch Main Unit ― EUR only
SW94 Main Switch Main Unit ― Except EUR
Clutch
CL1

CL1 Registration Clutch Main Drive Unit -
119
Others
TP2 / 3
H1
[1]
TH1
TH2
[2]
No. Name Main unit Reference Remarks

[1] Fixing Film Unit Fixing Assembly “Remove the Fixing Film
Unit” on page 170
[2] Pressure Roller Fixing Assembly “Removing the Pressure
Roller” on page 176
H1 Fixing Heater Fixing Assembly -
TP2/3 Thermo Switch Fixing Assembly -
TH1 Fixing Main Thermistor Fixing Assembly -
TH2 Fixing Sub Thermistor Fixing Assembly -
120
External Cover/Interior System
Removing the Front Cover Unit

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Front Cover.
2. Remove the Front Cover Unit.

• 1 Screw
• 2 Claws
1x
121
Removing the Rear Cover

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Rear Cover.
• 3 Screws
• 5 Bosses
3x
Removing the Right Cover

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover” on page 122
2. Draw out the Cassette 1 in 100mm.
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Blindfold Cover.
• 2 Claws
122
2. Remove the screws.

• 4 Screws
4x
3. Remove the Right Cover.

• 5 Claws
Claw
123
Removing the Front Upper Cover

■ Preparation
1. Open the Left Door.
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Front Upper Cover.
• 2 Screws
• 2 Claws
2x
Removing the Left Front Cover

■ Preparation
2. Open the Front Cover Unit.
3. Draw out the Cassette 1 in 100mm.
124
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Left Front Cover.
• 2 Screws
• 1 Claw
2x
NOTE:
Open and hold the Left Door to remove the claw with ease.
Removing the Left Rear Cover

■ Preparation
125
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Left Rear Cover.
• 2 Screws
2x
NOTE:
Open and hold the Left Door to remove bottom part of the Left Rear Cover with ease.
Removing the Front Right Cover

■ Preparation
1. Draw out the Cassette 1.
3. Remove the Right Cover.“Removing the Right Cover” on page 122
4. Remove the Front Cover Unit.“Removing the Front Cover Unit” on page 121
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Front Right Cover.
• 2 Bosses
• 2 Claws
126
Removing the Delivery Tray

■ Preparation
5. Remove the Front Right Cover.“Removing the Front Right Cover” on page 126
6. Remove the Front Upper Cover.“Removing the Front Upper Cover” on page 124
7. Remove the Control Panel Unit.“Removing the Control Panel Unit” on page 127
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Delivery Tray.
• 2 Bosses
Removing the Control Panel Unit

■ Preparation
127
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Control Panel Unit.
• 2 Screws
• 1 Flat Cable
2x
1x
NOTE:
Remove the Control Panel Unit in the direction of the arrow to release the 5 bosses.
Removing the Feeder Cover

■ Procedure
1. Open the Feeder Cover.
128
2. Loosen the screw and remove the Feeder Cover.

• 2 Shafts
1x
Removing the ADF Rear Cover

■ Procedure
2. Remove the ADF Rear Cover.

• 1 Boss
• 5 Hooks
129
Removing the Document Tray

■ Procedure
2. Remove the Document Tray while releasing the claw.

• 1 Claw
130
Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader)
Layout
[1]
[2]
[3]
No. Name Main Unit Reference

[1] Scanner Unit Main Unit “Removing the Scanner Unit” on
page 131
[2] Reader Unit Main Unit “Removing the Copyboard Glass
Unit” on page 133
[3] CIS Unit Reader Unit “Removing the CIS Unit” on page
134
Removing the Scanner Unit

■ Preparation
131
■ Procedure
1. Loosen the 4 screws and remove the Controller Cover.
4x
2. Remove the screw at the earth terminal.

• 1 Screw
1x
3. Remove the flat cable and the connectors.

• 1 Flat Cable
• 2 Connectors
3x
132
4. Remove the Scanner Unit.

• 4 Screws
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the Scanner Unit.
4x
Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit

■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch the glass with fingers when handling the Copyboard Glass Unit.
133
1. Open the ADF.
2. Remove the Copyboard Glass Unit.

• 2 Screws
2x
■ Adjustment after Replacement

“Actions when Replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit” on page 214
Cleaning the Copyboard Glass Unit

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Copyboard Glass Unit.“Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit” on page 133
■ Procedure
1. Clean inside and outside of the Copyboard Glass with lint-free paper.
2. Clean the white plate.
Cleaning the Stream Reading Glass

■ Preparation
■ Procedure
1. Clean inside and outside of the Stream Reading Glass with lint-free-paper.
2. Apply the oil glass cleaner oil on the Stream Reading Glass.
Removing the CIS Unit

■ Preparation
134
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Holder.
• 1 Claw
135
2. Remove the CIS Unit.

• 1 Flat Cable
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch the sensor part when handling the CIS unit.
1x
CAUTION:
The groove of the CIS unit must be hooked on the belt when attaching the CIS unit.

“Actions when Replacing the CIS Unit” on page 213
136
Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF)
Layout
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
No. Name Main Unit Reference

[1] ADF Unit Main Unit “Removing the ADF Unit” on page
137
[2] ADF Pickup Unit ADF Unit “Cleaning the ADF Pickup Unit” on
page 141
[3] ADF Separation Pad ADF Unit “Removing the ADF Separation Pad”
on page 141
[4] ADF Pickup Feed Unit ADF Unit “Removing the ADF Pickup Feed
Unit” on page 142
[5] ADF Feed Drive Unit ADF Pickup Feed Unit “Removing the ADF Feed Drive Unit”
on page 145
Removing the ADF Unit

■ Preparation
137
2. Loosen the 4 screws and remove the controller cover.
4x
■ Procedure
• 1 Screw
1x
2. Remove the connector.

• 1 Connector
1x
138
3. Remove the reuse band.

• 1 Reuse Band.
4. Remove the ADF Unit while releasing the harness.

• 1 Harness guide
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the harness as it hooks while releasing.

“Actions when Replacing the ADF Unit” on page 216
139
Removing the ADF Pickup Unit

■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch the ADF Pickup Roller when handling the ADF Pickup Unit.
2. Remove the ADF Pickup Unit.

• 1 Claw
• 1 Shaft
140
Cleaning the ADF Pickup Unit

■ Procedure
2. Clean the surface of the ADF Pickup Roller using lint-free paper soaked with alcohol.
Removing the ADF Separation Pad

■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch the ADF Separation Pad while handling it.
141
2. Remove the ADF Separation Pad

• 2 Claws
Cleaning the ADF Separation Pad

■ Preparation
1. Remove the ADF Separation Pad.“Removing the ADF Separation Pad” on page 141
■ Procedure
1. Clean the surface of the ADF Separation Pad using lint-free paper soaked with alcohol.
Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit

■ Preparation
1. Remove the original tray.“Removing the Document Tray” on page 130
2. Remove the ADF rear cover.“Removing the ADF Rear Cover” on page 129
142
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the White Plate when handling the ADF Pickup Feed Unit.
1. Open the ADF Unit and remove the white Plate.

• 4 Hooks
2. Remove the 2 screws and close the ADF Unit.

• 2 Screws
2x
143
3. Remove the screw from the earth.

• 1 Screw
1x

• 4 connectors
4x
5. Remove the screws and close the feeder cover.

• 4 Screws
4x
144
6. Remove the ADF Pickup Feed Unit.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch the ADF Delivery Roller when handling the ADF Pickup Feed Unit.
Removing the ADF Feed Drive Unit

■ Preparation
1. Remove the ADF Pickup Feed Unit.“Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit” on page 142
■ Procedure
1. Loosen the screw and remove the Feeder Cover.
• 2 Shafts
1x
145
2. Remove the ADF Feed Drive Unit.

• 1 Harness guide
• 5 Screws
5x 1x
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to shift the phase of the inner gear when handling the ADF Feed Drive.
• Be careful not to put the arm edge on top of the coupling when assembling the ADF Feed Drive Unit.
Cleaning the ADF Delivery Roller

■ Preparation
1. Remove the ADF Pickup Feed Unit.“Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit” on page 142
146
■ Procedure
1. Clean the surface of the ADF Delivery Roller using lint-free paper soaked with alcohol.
147
Controller System
Removing the Main Controller PCB

■ Preparation
Back up user data (settings, registered data, etc.) and service mode data for setting and registration after PCB replacement.
Take notes if data is unable to back up.
1. In Remote UI, perform the following procedure to export the user data (login in administrator mode).
In Setting/Registration > Import/Export > Menu > Export, select an item and then start export.
2. In service mode, perform the following procedure to export the service mode data (and then import it after replacement).
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT
3. Record the default settings shown on the service label (these are entered after replacement).
4. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
■ Preparation
■ Procedure
1. Remove the controller cover.
• Loosen the 4 screws
4x
148
2. Remove all flat cables and connectors and then remove the Main Controller PCB.
• 10 Connectors
• 4 Flat Cables
• 7 Screws
14x
7x
NOTE:
Numbers of connectors and flat cables are different from each specification of the host machine.
■ After Replacing the Main Controller PCB
NOTE:
In the case of a model without the reader, it is not necessary to perform steps 4 to 7.
1. Turning ON the power.
2. Adjustment value of Reader/DADF are initialized.

COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > R-CON
3. Entering the Setting Value from the Service Label ( W-PLT-X/Y/Z)

Enter the setting value of W-PLT-X/Y/Z from the service label printed inside of the rear cover by following service mode.
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Y
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Z
149
4. Automatic Gain Offset Adjustment for the CIS unit

4-1 Rewrite "1000" for the setting value on following service mode.
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-G
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-B
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-R
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-G
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-B
4-3 Press "OK" for each on following service mode.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC
4-4 After the automatic adjustment, "executing" disappears.
4-5 Check the setting value is changed. When it is not changed, readjust from procedure 4-1 to 4-4.
5. Enter the All Setting Value other than W-PLT-X/Y/Z from the Service Label
Enter the all setting value other than W-PLT-X/Y/Z from the service label printed inside of the rear cover.
6. Set the paper size group.

COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SIZE-LC
[Setting value]
1: AB configuration 2: Inch configuration 3: A configuration 4: AB/Inch configuration
7. Clearing the Settings/Registration data

COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ALL
When executing this item, the following data is cleared according to the values of SIZE-LC
set in step 6.
• Settings/Registration data
• Service mode data
• Job ID
• Each log data
• Date data
Note that the following data is not cleared.
• Service counter
• Adjustment value of Reader/DADF
8. The setting value of Engine Controller is backed up.

COPIER > FUNCTION > VIFFNC > STOR-DCN
9. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
10. Import the service mode data backed up before replacement.

Insert the USB memory storage device to the slot of the machine, and execute.
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > IMPORT
11. Import user data using remote UI.
150
12. Uninstall Old Drivers.

• FAX Driver
• Scanner Driver
• Network Scan Utility (for machines with network connection)
For details on the uninstallation procedures, see the driver installation manuals that are included with the drivers.
13. Install the drivers which have been uninstalled in step 12.
For details on the installation procedures, see the driver installation manuals that are included with the drivers.
NOTE:
MAC address information is changed after replacement of the Main Controller PCB.Therefore, when the PC and the machine are
connected by the network, the PC will not be able to recognize the machine on the network. When the PC and the machine are
connected by the USB memory device, the PC will not be able to recognize the machine if the USB ID is changed. It becomes
therefore necessary to reinstall the driver.
Removing the Engine Controller PCB

■ Before Replacing the Engine Controller PCB
1. Backup of Engine Controller PCB service mode setting values.
2. Turn OFF the main power when the above work is complete.
■ Preparation
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Engine Controller PCB.
• 15 Connectors
• 3 Flat Cables
• 4 Screws
18x 4x
■ After Replacing the Engine Controller PCB

1. Restore the backup data.
COPIER > FUNCTION > VIFFNC > RSTR-DCN
2. When backup data cannot be uploaded before replacement due to reasons such as damage of the Engine Controller
PCB, enter the value of each service mode item described on the service label.
3. Turn OFF and then ON the power (For accurate reflection of the restored items).
151
Removing the Power Supply PCB

■ Preparation
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Power Supply PCB.
• 2 Claws
2. Remove the Main Switch.

• 2 Screws
• 1 Edge Saddle
2x
1x
3. Remove connectors from the Power Supply PCB.

• 4 Connectors
4x
152
4. Remove the Power Supply PCB.

• 2 Screws
2x
CAUTION:
Be careful not to hang the power switch on the frame while removing the Power Supply PCB or it may be damaged.
Removing the HVT PCB

■ Preparation
1. Draw out the Cassette 1
8. Remove the Delivery Tray.“Removing the Delivery Tray” on page 127
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Heat Exhaust Fan Duct.
• 2 Claws
153
2. Remove the HVT PCB.

• 1 Connector
• 1 Flat Cable
• 2 Screws
2x
2x
3. Remove the PCB stay.

• 3 Screws
3x
Removing the Control Panel PCB

■ Preparation
154
■ Procedure
1. Reverse the Control Panel and remove the stay.
• 5 Screws
5x
2. Remove the Control Panel PCB.

• 8 Screws
8x
155
Laser Exposure System
Removing the Laser Scanner Unit

■ Preparation
7. Remove the Delivery Tray. “Removing the Delivery Tray” on page 127
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Be sure not to disassemble the Laser Scanner Unit as specific adjustment is needed.
A malfunction may occur when it is disassembled without the adjustment.
1. Remove the sponges.

• 6 Sponges
156
2. Remove the Laser Scanner Unit.

• 1 Connector
• 1 Flat Cable
• 4 Screws
2x
4x
157
Image Formation System
Removing the Toner Cartridge

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Front Cover
2. Remove the Toner Cartridge by turning the knob in the direction of the arrow.
158
Removing the Drum Unit

■ Procedure
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to touch the drum part when handling the Drum Unit.
• Be sure to block light to the drum part covering with paper when the Drum Unit is removed from the host machine.
CAUTION:
Open the Left Door to the 2nd step until the Drum Unit is unlocked. It may damage or deform the Drum Unit when removing
the Drum Unit at 1st step.
1st Step 2nd Step
159
2. Remove the Drum Unit.
Remove the Developing Assembly

■ Preparation
2. Remove the Drum Unit.“Removing the Drum Unit” on page 159
3. Remove the Toner Cartridge.“Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 158
160
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Fan Frame.
• 2 Screws
• 2 Connectors
• 1 Wire Saddle
2x
2x
1x
NOTE:
Hold the Toner Sensor Holder while removing the screw on the right side of the Fan Frame.
161
2. Remove the Developing Assembly.

• 2 Wire Saddles
• 1 Connector
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch or shock the Developing Cylinder when handling the Developing Assembly.
2x
1x

Execute following service mode when replacing the Developing Assembly.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > TONER-S
NOTE:
When abnormal termination occurs while stirring toner due to following cause, turn OFF/ON the main power and re-execute
"TONER-S" in the service mode.
• Door open
• Service call error
• Time out of stirring toner (Toner is not detected in 2 minutes).
Removing the Developing Cylinder

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Developing Assembly.“Remove the Developing Assembly” on page 160
162
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch or shock the Developing Cylinder when handling the Developing Assembly.
1. Remove the Holder.

• 4 Screws
4x
2. Remove the Electrode Plate and the Gear.
163
3. Remove the Bearing.

• 2 Screws
2x
4. Remove the Positioning guide.

• 1 Screw
1x

• 2 Screws
2x
164
6. Remove the 2 Rollers and the Developing Cylinder.
Removing the Transfer Roller

■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch the Transfer Roller when handling the Developing Assembly.
165
2. Remove the Transfer Roller while releasing the claw.
Removing the Separation Static Charge Eliminator

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Left Front Cover.“Removing the Left Front Cover” on page 124
166
■ Procedure
1. Draw out the Separation Static Charge Eliminator.
Cleaning the Transfer Guide

■ Procedure
2. Clean the surface of the Transfer Guide using lint-free paper soaked with alcohol.
Cleaning the Transfer Roller

■ Procedure
167
2. Clean the surface of the Transfer Roller using lint-free paper soaked with alcohol.
168
Fixing System
Removing the Fixing Assembly
CAUTION:
It may cause burn injury to handle the Fixing Assembly just after turning OFF the host machine. Be sure to cool down the
Fixing Assembly before handling.
■ Preparation
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Front / Rear Fixing Cover.
• 2 Claws
• 2 Hooks
169
2. Remove the Fixing Assembly.

• 3 Connectors
• 5 Screws
3x
5x
Remove the Fixing Film Unit

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Fixing Assembly.“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 169
■ Procedure
1. Turn the Fixing Assembly so that the [A] part faces to the bottom.
[A]
2. Remove the Bearing Holder Unit.

• 2 Screws
2x
170
3. Remove the wire saddle.

• 1 Wire saddle
1x
4. Remove the Sensor Holder.

• 2 Claws
• 3 Bosses
• 1 Screw
1x
171
5. Remove the Front Pressure Release Cam.

• 1 Claw
6. Remove the shaft.
172
7. Remove the Fixing Stay.

• 5 Screws
• 4 Bosses
5x
8. Release the wire.
1x
173
9. Remove the Fixing Contact Unit.

• 3 Claws
• 1 Boss
Boss
NOTE:
Slide the Fixing Contact Unit while holding the boss.
10. Remove the Earth Holder Unit.

• 1 Claw
• 2 Bosses
• 1 Spring
CAUTION:
Do not hook the spring, or it may be deformed.
174
11. Remove the Front / Rear Pressure Plate.

• 1 Spring for each
• 1 Claw for each
NOTE:
Record positions of the springs for re-assembly.
175
12. Remove the Fixing Film Unit.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch the Fixing Film Unit while assembling / disassembling.
Removing the Pressure Roller

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Fixing Assembly.“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 169
2. Remove the Fixing Film Unit.“Remove the Fixing Film Unit” on page 170
176
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Lower Transfer Guide.
• 3 Claws
• 1 Boss
NOTE:
Slide the Lower Transfer Guide while holding the boss.
2. Remove the gears and the bearing.

• 2 Bearings
• 2 Gears
• 1 Cam
177
3. Remove the Pressure Roller.
NOTE:
Slide the Lower Transfer Guide while holding the boss.
4. Remove the E ring.

• 1 E Ring
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch the Pressure Roller while assembling/ disassembling.
178
Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide

■ Preparation
■ Procedure
1. Clean the surface of the Fixing Inlet Guide using lint-free paper soaked with alcohol.
179
Pickup/Feed System
Removing the Left Door Unit

■ Preparation
2. Remove the Left Rear Cover. “Removing the Left Rear Cover” on page 125
3. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray.“Removing the Multi-purpose Tray” on page 181
■ Procedure
• 1 Connector
• 1 Wire Saddle
1x 1x
2. Remove the link arm and the stopper.

• 1 Screw
1x
180
3. Remove the Left Door Unit.
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray

■ Preparation
■ Procedure
1. Open the Multi-purpose Tray.
2. Expand the Multi-purpose Tray and remove the link part.
3. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray.

• 2 Bosses
181
Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit

■ Preparation
4. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray.“Removing the Multi-purpose Tray” on page 181
5. Remove the Left Door Unit. “Removing the Left Door Unit” on page 180
■ Procedure
1. Remove the connectors.
• 2 Connectors
2x

• 1 Screw
1x
182
3. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray.

• 5 Screws
5x
NOTE:
Remove the Multi-purpose Tray in direction of the arrow while avoiding the spring plate.
Removing the Main Drive Unit

■ Preparation
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Drive Cover.
• 4 Screws
4x
183
2. Remove the gears.

• 3 Gears
3. Remove the spring and the gear.

• 1 Spring
• 1 Gear
4. Remove the Drive Support Plate.

• 4 Screws
4x
184
5. Remove the clutch.

• 1 Connector
• 1 Resin Ring
1x
6. Remove the bearing.

• 1 Claw
7. Release the cable guide.

• 1 Screw
• 1 Claw
1x
185

• 2 Connectors
2x
9. Release the cable guide.

• 1 Boss
• 2 Claws
10. Remove the Main Drive Unit.

• 1 Connector
• 4 Screws
1x
4x
Removing the Fixing Drive Unit

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover. “Removing the Rear Cover” on page 122
186
■ Procedure
• 4 Connectors.
4x
2. Remove the cable guide.

• 1 Claw
1x
3. Remove the Fixing Drive Unit.

• 4 Screws
4x
NOTE:
Do not remove the screw (TP; M3 x 6).
187
Removing the Delivery/Reverse Unit

■ Preparation
1. Draw out the Cassette 1
2. Remove the Rear Cover. “Removing the Rear Cover” on page 122
7. Remove the Delivery Tray.“Removing the Delivery Tray” on page 127
8. Remove the ADF Unit.“Removing the Scanner Unit” on page 131
■ Procedure
1. Remove the cover.
• 1 Boss
• 2 Hooks
188
2. Remove the Delivery/Reverse Unit.

• 2 Claws
• 1 Connector
Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Roller

■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Do not tilt the host machine when removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Roller as toner leakage might occur.
189
2. Remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Roller.
Removing the Cassette 1 Feed Roller

■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Do not tilt the host machine when removing the Cassette 1 Feed Roller as toner leakage might occur.
190
2. Remove the Cassette 1 Feed Roller Unit.
191
3. Remove the black bearing.

• 1 Boss
NOTE:
Remove the bearing fitting boss of it with notch of the shaft hole.
192
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the Cassette 1 Feed Roller.
NOTE:
2 different sizes of bosses are equipped with the shaft. Remove the thinner boss fitting with notch of the shaft hole.
5. Remove the Cassette 1 Feed Roller.
CAUTION:
Do not touch surface of the Cassette 1 Feed Roller as decrement of separation power might occur.
193
■ Installation of the Cassette 1 Feed Roller Unit

1. Insert the shaft of the Cassette 1 Feed Roller Unit in the driving link part.
NOTE:
To insert it with ease, hold pressure part of the Cassette 1 Separation Roller Unit with fingers.
2. Set the Cassette 1 Feed Roller Unit.
3. Install the Cassette 1 Feed Roller Unit.

• 2 Hooks
CAUTION:
Push the Cassette 1 Feed Roller Unit until a click made.
194
Removing the Cassette 1 Separation Roller

■ Preparation
2. Remove the Cassette 1 Feed Roller Unit.“Removing the Cassette 1 Feed Roller” on page 190
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Do not tilt the host machine when removing the Cassette 1 Separation Roller as toner leakage might occur.
195
1. Remove the Cassette 1 Separation Roller Unit.
196
2. Remove the black bearing.

• 1 Boss
NOTE:
Remove the bearing fitting boss of it with notch of the shaft hole.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to drop the torque limiter and the Cassette 1 Separation Roller.
• Do not install dropped torque limiter.
197
4. Remove the Cassette 1 Separation Roller.
CAUTION:
Do not touch surface of the Cassette 1 Separation Roller as decrement of separation power might occur.
NOTE:
For installation of the Cassette 1 Separation Roller, fit boss of the shaft with notch of the torque limiter as the removed shaft at
procedure 2) might not be attached.
■ Installation of the Cassette 1 Separation Roller

1. Insert the shaft of the Cassette 1 Separation Roller Unit in the driving link part.
NOTE:
To insert it with ease, hold pressure part of the Cassette 1 Separation Roller Unit with fingers.
198
2. Install the Cassette 1 Separation Roller Unit.

• 4 Bosses
CAUTION:
Push the Cassette 1 Feed Separation until a click made.
Removing the Registration Roller

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Front Cover Unit” on page 121
199
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Drive Support Plate.
• 4 Screws
4x
2. Remove the clutch.

• 1 Connector
• 1 Resin Ring
1x
3. Remove the bearing.

• 1 Claw
200
4. Remove the Registration Roller.

• 1 Bearing
NOTE:
Be careful that the step of the roller shaft is not hang on the shaft hole while moving the Be careful that the step of the roller shaft
is not hang on the shaft hole while moving the
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller

■ Preparation
201
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Blindfold Cover.
• 1 Screw
• 1 Boss
• 1 Shaft
1x
NOTE:
Bend the Left door stopper while removing the Blindfold Cover.
202
2. Remove the bearing and then remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller.
• 1 Claw
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller .“Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller” on page 201
■ Procedure
1. Remove the bearings.
• 1 Claw
203
2. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad.

• 5 Claws
Removing the Duplex Roller

■ Procedure
1. Open the Left door.
2. Remove the Duplex Roller Gear Unit.

• 1 Claw
204
3. Release the bosses on the bearing.

• 2 Bosses
4. Remove the Duplex Roller.

• 4 Bosses
Removing the Delivery Reverse Roller

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Delivery/Reverse Unit.“Removing the Delivery/Reverse Unit” on page 188
205
■ Procedure
1. Reverse the Delivery/Reverse Unit and remove the Delivery/Reverse Lower Guide.
• 1 Screw
• 4 Bosses
1x

• 2 Resin Bearings
3. Remove the Gear.

• 1 Gear
206
4. Remove the Delivery Reverse Roller.
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Vertical Path Roller

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit.“Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit” on page 182
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup guide.
• 2 Screws
2x
NOTE:
Engage the link when assembling the Multi-purpose Tray Vertical Path Roller.
207
2. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Vertical Path Roller.
Removing the Cassette 1 Paper Sensor and Sensor Flag

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Toner Cartridge.“Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 158
4. Remove the Developing Assembly.“Remove the Developing Assembly” on page 160
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Cassette 1 Paper Sensor.
• 1 Connector
1x
2. Remove the Sensor Flag.
208
6 Adjustment
Adjustment when Replacing the Parts
.......................................................210
Adjustment of Image Position........... 211
Actions when Replacing Parts.......... 213
Adjustment of Image Position........... 220
6. Adjustment
Adjustment when Replacing the Parts

Adjustment required in the field service works when following parts are replaced.
The parts are classified by 3 function blocks.
Category Parts Reference

Original Exposure and Feed CIS Unit “Actions when Replacing the CIS Unit” on page 213
System Copyboard Glass Unit “Actions when Replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit” on page
(Reader Unit) 214
Original Exposure and Feed ADF Unit “Actions when Replacing the ADF Unit” on page 216
System
(ADF Unit)
Controller Main Controller PCB “Main Controller PCB” on page 217
Engine Controller PCB “Engine Controller PCB” on page 219
210
6. Adjustment
Adjustment of Image Position

Procedures for adjustment of image position is described below.
Pickup Feed System

Item Standard Reference
Adjustment of image L1=front side: 2.5 +/- 1.5 (mm), back side: 2.5 +/- 2.0 (mm) “Adjustment of Image
leading edge margin Leading Edge Margin
(front /back side)” on page
220
L1
Adjustment of left edge L1=front side: 2.5 +/- 1.5 (mm), back side: 2.5 +/- 2.0 (mm) “Adjustment of Left Edge
margin of the Image Margin of the Image (front
side)” on page 225
“Adjustment of Image
Leading Edge Margin (back
L1
Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit)

Adjustment of image L1=1-sided: 2.5 +/- 2.0 (mm) “Adjustment of Image
leading edge margin Leading Edge Margin (front
L1
211
6. Adjustment

Adjustment of left edge L1=1-sided: 2.5 +/- 2.0 (mm) “Adjustment of Left Edge
margin of the Image Margin of the Image (1-si-
ded)” on page 223
L1
Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF Unit)

Adjustment of image L1 =1-sided: 2.5 +/- 1.5 (mm), front side: 2.5 +/- 2.0 (mm), back side: 2.5 +/- 2.0 “Adjustment of Image
leading edge margin (mm) Leading Edge Margin
(front /back side)” on page
220
“Adjustment of Left Edge
Margin of the Image (front
“Adjustment of Left Edge
Margin of the Image (back
L1
Adjustment of left edge L1 = front side: 2.5 +/- 2.0 (mm), back side: 2.5 +/- 2.0 (mm) “Adjustment of Left Edge
margin of the Image Margin of the Image (front
“Adjustment of Image
Leading Edge Margin (back
L1
Adjustment of magnifi- L1 = front side:+/-0.5%, back side:+/-0.5% “Adjustment of Magnifica-

cation ratio tion Ratio (front side)” on
page 227
“Adjustment of Magnifica-
tion Ratio (back side)” on
page 227
L1
212
6. Adjustment
Actions when Replacing Parts
Actions when Replacing the CIS Unit

Execute following procedure when replacing the CIS Unit.
No. Item Reference

1 Automatic gain offset adjustment for the CIS unit “Automatic Gain Offset Adjustment for the CIS unit” on page 213
2 Adjust of image reading start position “Adjustment of Image Reading Start Position” on page 213
3 Automatic white level adjustment “Automatic White Level Adjustment” on page 213
4 Adjustment of image position “Adjustment of Image Position” on page 214
■ Automatic Gain Offset Adjustment for the CIS unit

1. Rewrite "1000" for the setting value on following service mode.
COPIER >ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R
COPIER >ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-G
COPIER >ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-B

COPIER >ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-R
COPIER >ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-G
COPIER >ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-B
3. Press "OK" for each on following service mode.

4. After the automatic adjustment, "executing" disappears.
5. Check the setting value is changed. When it is not changed, readjust from procedure 1 to 4.
■ Adjustment of Image Reading Start Position
CAUTION:
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the service label.
1. Enter "-20" for the setting value on following service mode.

COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS
2. Select following service mode.

3. Press OK key and then the automatic adjustment is executed. After the automatic adjustment, "executing"
disappears.
■ Automatic White Level Adjustment
CAUTION:
1. The adjustment is executed when ADF is installed.
2. The adjustment is to match white level by stream reading with white level by copyboard reading.
It may occur following error without the adjustment.
• Inappropriate background density of images in stream reading
• Dust detection error in stream reading
213
6. Adjustment
1. Enter the setting value for each on following service mode.

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R = 209
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G = 309
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B = 307
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW = 315
2. Set white paper used by user as usual on the Copyboard glass unit and then close the ADF unit.

disappears.
5. Remove the paper from the copyboard glass unit and then set it on the document tray of the ADF Unit.

disappears.
9. Test copy with paper used by user as usual. When image error occurs, readjust procedure from 1 to 8.
10. Set white paper used by user as usual on the copyboard glass unit and then close the ADF unit.

disappears.

disappears.
■ Adjustment of Image Position

“Original Exposure and Feed System(Reader Unit)” on page 222
Actions when Replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit

Execute following procedure when replacing the copyboard glass unit.
No. Item Reference

1 Entering white level data of the standard white plate “Entering White Level Data of the Standard White Plate” on page
215
2 Automatic gain offset adjustment for the CIS unit “Automatic Gain Offset Adjustment for the CIS unit” on page 213
3 Adjust of image reading start position “Adjustment of Image Reading Start Position” on page 215
4 Automatic white level adjustment “Automatic White Level Adjustment” on page 215
214
6. Adjustment
■ Entering White Level Data of the Standard White Plate

2. Enter the value from the barcode label on the Copyboard Glass.
■ Automatic Gain Offset Adjustment for the CIS unit



disappears.
■ Adjustment of Image Reading Start Position
CAUTION:
1. Enter "-20" for the setting value on following service mode.

COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS

disappears.
CAUTION:
1. The adjustment is executed when ADF is installed.

The adjustment is to match white level by stream reading with white level by copyboard reading.

215
6. Adjustment

disappears.

disappears.

disappears.

disappears.
16. Exit service mode.

“Original Exposure and Feed System(Reader Unit)” on page 222
Actions when Replacing the ADF Unit

Execute following procedure when replacing ADF Unit.
No. Item Reference

1 Automatic White Level Adjustment “Automatic White Level Adjustment” on page 216
CAUTION:
1. The adjustment is to match white level by stream reading with white level by copyboard reading.

216
6. Adjustment

disappears.

disappears.

disappears.

disappears.

“Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF Unit)” on page 224
Main Controller PCB

■ Before Replacing the Main Controller PCB
Back up user data (settings, registered data, etc.) and service mode data for setting and registration after PCB replacement.
Take notes if data is unable to back up.
1. In Remote UI, perform the following procedure to export the user data (login in administrator mode).
In Setting/Registration > Import/Export > Menu > Export, select an item and then start export.
2. In service mode, perform the following procedure to export the service mode data (and then import it after replacement).
3. Record the default settings shown on the service label (these are entered after replacement).
■ After Replacing the Main Controller PCB
NOTE:
In the case of a model without the reader, it is not necessary to perform steps 4 to 7.
1. Turning ON the power.
2. Adjustment value of Reader/ DADF are initialized.

COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > R-CON
217
6. Adjustment
3. Entering the Setting Value from the Service Label(W-PLT-X/Y/Z)

Enter the setting value of W-PLT-X/Y/Z from the service label printed inside of the rear cover by following service mode.
4. Automatic Gain Offset Adjustment for the CIS unit

4-3 Press "OK" for each on following service mode.
4-4 After the automatic adjustment, "executing" disappears.
4-5 Check the setting value is changed. When it is not changed, readjust from procedure 4-1 to 4-4.
5. Enter the All Setting Value other than W-PLT-X/Y/Z from the Service Label
Enter the all setting value other than W-PLT-X/Y/Z from the service label printed inside of the rear cover.
6. Set the paper size group.

COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SIZE-LC
[Setting value]
1: AB configuration 2: Inch configuration 3: A configuration 4: AB/Inch configuration
218
6. Adjustment
7. Clearing the Settings/Registration data

COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ALL
When executing this item, the following data is cleared according to the values of SIZE-LC
set in step 6.
• Settings/Registration data
• Service mode data
• Job ID
• Each log data
• Date data
Note that the following data is not cleared.
• Service counter
8. The setting value of Engine Controller is backed up.

9. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
10. Import the service mode data backed up before replacement.

Insert the USB memory storage device to the slot of the machine, and execute.
11. Import user data using remote UI.
12. Uninstall Old Drivers.

• FAX Driver
• Scanner Driver
• Network Scan Utility (for machines with network connection)
For details on the uninstallation procedures, see the driver installation manuals that are included with the drivers.
13. Install the drivers which have been uninstalled in step 12.
For details on the installation procedures, see the driver installation manuals that are included with the drivers.
NOTE:
MAC address information is changed after replacement of the Main Controller PCB.Therefore, when the PC and the machine are
connected by the network, the PC will not be able to recognize the machine on the network. When the PC and the machine are
connected by the USB memory device, the PC will not be able to recognize the machine if the USB ID is changed. It becomes
therefore necessary to reinstall the driver.

■ Before Replacing the Engine Controller PCB
1. Backup of Engine Controller PCB service mode setting values.
2. Turn OFF the main power when the above work is complete.
■ After Replacing the Engine Controller PCB

1. Restore the backup data.
COPIER > FUNCTION > VIFFNC > RSTR-DCN
2. When backup data cannot be uploaded before replacement due to reasons such as damage of the Engine Controller
PCB, enter the value of each service mode item described on the service label.
3. Turn OFF and then ON the power (For accurate reflection of the restored items).
219
6. Adjustment
Adjustment of Image Position
Pickup/ Feed System
CAUTION:
After the setting value is changed in the service mode, write the changed value on the service label.
Print 10 sheets of paper by 1-sided / 2-sided from each pickup parts. Check that the image margin and the non-image width are
within the standard.
• Each Cassette
• Multi-purpose tray
Execute adjustment as follows when it is out of standard.
■ Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (front /back side)

Print sheets of paper from each pickup parts and then check that L1 (image leading edge margin) on front side is within the
standard.
L1
<standard>
front side : L1=2.5+/-1.5mm
back side : L1= 2.5+/-2.0mm
● Adjustment Procedure
1. Adjust the setting value on following service mode.
• Cassette 1:
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-CST
• Cassette 2:
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-CST2
• Multi-purpose tray:
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-MF
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-MF2
• 2-sided (back side):
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-DUP2
NOTE:
Setting range: -12 to 12 (0.5mm by 1 setting value)
L1 increases 0.5mm by setting value 1.
3. Print sheets of paper by 1-sided / 2-sided from each pickup parts. Check that L1 on back side is within the standard.
Return to procedure 1 when it is out of standard.
4. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the service label.
220
6. Adjustment
■ Adjustment of Left Edge Margin of the Image (front side)

Print sheets of paper by 1-sided from cassette 1 and then check that L1 (left edge margin) on back side is within 2.5+/-1.5mm.
NOTE:
Adjusting L1 on back side is also applied to the front side from all pickup parts.
L1
• Cassette 1:
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C1
• Cassette 2:
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C2
• Multi-purpose tray:
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-MF
NOTE:
3. Print sheets of paper by 1-sided from each cassette and multi-purpose tray. Check that L1 on front side is within
the standard.
■ Adjustment of Left Edge Margin of the Image (back side)

Print sheets of paper 2-sided from each cassette and multi-purpose tray. Check that L1 (left edge margin ) on front side is within
2.5+/-2.0mm.
Execute adjustment as follows when it is out of tandard
NOTE:
Adjusting L1 on front side is also applied to the front side.
221
6. Adjustment
L1
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-REFE
NOTE:
3. Print sheets of paper by 2-sided from each pickup parts and then check that L1 on back
Original Exposure and Feed System(Reader Unit)

Set the test chart on the reader unit and then print 1 sheet of paper. Check that the image margin and the non-image width are
within the standard. Execute adjustment as follows when it is out of standard.
CAUTION:
■ Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (front side)

Check that L1 (image leading edge margin) is within 2.5 +/- 2.0 mm. Execute adjustment as follows when it is out of standard.
222
6. Adjustment
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X
NOTE:
L1
4. Print sheets of paper by 1-sided on the reader unit and then check that L1 is within 2.5+/- 2.0mm.
■ Adjustment of Left Edge Margin of the Image (1-sided)

Check that L1 (image leading edge margin) is within 2.5 +/- 2.0 mm. Execute adjustment as follows when it is out of standard.
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y
NOTE:
L1
4. Print sheets of paper by 1-sided on the reader unit and then check that L1 is within 2.5+/- 2.0mm. Return to procedure
1) when it is out of standard.
223
6. Adjustment
Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF Unit)

Set the test chart on the ADF unit and then print 1 sheet of paper. Check that the image margin and the non-image width are
within the standard. Execute adjustment as follows when it is out of standard.
CAUTION:
■ Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (1-sided)

Check that L1 (image leading edge margin) is within 2.5 +/- 1.5mm. Execute adjustment as follows when it is out of standard.
FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST
NOTE:
L1 decreases 0.1mm by setting value 1.
L1
4. Print sheets of paper by 1-sided on the ADF unit and then check that L1 is within 2.5+/- 1.5mm.
■ Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (front side)

Check that L1 (image leading edge margin) on front side is within 2.5 +/- 2.0mm. Execute adjustment as follows when it is out of
standard.
224
6. Adjustment
FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCSTDUP
CAUTION:
L1
4. Print sheets of paper by 1-sided on the ADF unit and then check that L1 on front side is within 2.5+/-2.0mm.
■ Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (back side)

Check that L1 (image leading edge margin) on back side is within 2.5 +/- 2.0mm. Execute adjustment as follows when it is out of
standard.
FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST2
NOTE:
L1
4. Print sheets of paper by 2-sided on the ADF unit and then check that L1 on back side is within 2.5+/-2.0mm.
■ Adjustment of Left Edge Margin of the Image (front side)

Check that L1 (left edge margin of the image) on front side is within 2.5 +/- 2.0mm. Execute adjustment as follows when it is out
of standard.
225
6. Adjustment
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF
NOTE:
L1
4. Print sheets of paper by 2-sided on the ADF unit and then check that L1 on front side is within 2.5+/-2.0mm.
■ Adjustment of Left Edge Margin of the Image (back side)

Check that L1 (left edge margin of the image) on back side is within 2.5 +/- 2.0mm. Execute adjustment as follows when it is out
of standard.
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF2
NOTE:
L1
4. Print sheets of paper by 2-sided on the ADF unit and then check that L1 on back side is within 2.5+/-2.0mm.
226
6. Adjustment
■ Adjustment of Magnification Ratio (front side)

Check that L1 (magnification ratio) on front side is within +/-0.5%. Execute adjustment as follows when it is out of standard.
FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD
NOTE:
Setting range: -200 to 200 (0.01% by 1 setting value)
The image decreases 0.01% in vertical direction by setting value 1.
L1
4. Print sheets of paper by 1-sided on the ADF unit and then check that L1 on front side is within +/-0.5%.
■ Adjustment of Magnification Ratio (back side)

1. Check that L1 (magnification ratio) on back side is within +/-0.5%. Execute adjustment as follows when it is out of
standard.
FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD
NOTE:
Setting range: -200 to 200 (0.01% by 1 setting value)
The image decreases 0.01% in vertical direction by setting value 1.
L1
4. Print sheets of paper by 2-sided on the ADF unit and then check that L1 on back side is within +/-0.5%.
227
7 Troubleshooting
Initial Check.......................................229
Test Print...........................................231
Troubleshooting Items.......................234
7. Troubleshooting
Initial Check
Initial Check Item List

Item No. Detail Check
Site Environment 1 The voltage of the power supply is as rated (+/-10%).
2 The site is not a high temperature / humidity environment (near a water faucet,
water boiler, humidifier), and it is not in a cold place. The machine is not near a
source of fire or dust.
3 The site is not subject to ammonium gas.
4 The site is not exposed to direct rays of the sun. (Otherwise, provide curtains.)
5 The site is well ventilated, and the floor keeps the machine level.
6 The machine's power plug remains connected to the power outlet.
Checking the Paper 7 The paper is of a recommended type.
8 The paper is not moist. Try paper fresh out of package.
Checking the Placement of Paper 9 Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is not in excess
of a specific level.
10 If a transparency is used, check to make sure that it is placed in the correct ori-
entation in the manual feed tray.
Checking the Durables 11 Check the table of durables to see if any has reached the end of its life.
Checking the Periodically Replaced 12 Check the scheduled servicing table and the periodically replaced parts table,
Parts and replace any part that has reached the time of replacement.
Each Unit / Function System Check Item List

Reader 1 Check that there is no cut, dirt or any foreign particle on the scanner system
parts.
2 Check that the CIS unit moves smoothly and there is no dirt on the rail.
3 Check that the lump light does not blink.
4 Check that there is no dew condensation found on the scanning system parts.
Image formation system 1 Check that the drum unit and developing assembly are properly installed.
2 Check that there is no cut and dirt on the photosensitive drum.
3 Check that the transfer roller is not worn and deformed and has no cut/ dirt.
Fixing system 1 Check that the fixing film and pressure roller is not worn and deformed and has
no cut/dirt.
2 Check that the fixing thermistor wire is not cut.
3 Check that there is electrical conductivity among thermo switch.
Pickup feed system 1 Check that there is no foreign particle such as paper dust etc.
2 Check that the pickup/feed/separation roller does not accumulate the paper dust.
Check that these rollers are not worn and deformed and have no cut/dirt.
3 Check that the registration roller/paper path roller is not worn and deformed and
has no cut/dirt.
4 Check that the feed guide is not worn and deformed and has no cut/ dirt.
5 Check that there is no edge fold/curl/wave/moisture absorption occurred on the
paper.
6 Check if using Canon recommended paper/transparency makes it better or not.
Drive system 1 Check that the drive system does not get heavy load.
2 Check that the gear is not worn and not get chipped.
Cassette 1 Check that the cassette is installed properly and the paper size is configured
properly. Check if the symptom appears or not after replacing the cassette with
the cassette that works normally.
2 Check that the cassette middle plate moves smoothly and is not deformed.
3 Check that the cassette side guide plate/ trailing edge guide plate is properly set.
229
7. Troubleshooting

General 1 Check that the sensor/clutch/motor/solenoid works properly (Make sure to check
the power source and signal transmission route with the general circuit diagram).
2 Check that there is no wire wedged/screw loosened.
3 Check that all the external covers are installed.
4 Check that the main power switch/control panel power switch is ON.
5 Check that the wiring of power cable/signal cable to each option is properly in-
stalled.
6 Check that the fuse on each PCB does not burn out.
7 Check that there is no error in customer's usage method.
Others 1 If moving the machine from the cold place such as storage etc to a warm place
abruptly, dew condensation is generated inside machine and it may cause var-
ious troubles.
• E100 occurs due to dew condensation on BD sensor.
• Low image density in the vertical scanning direction due to dew condensa-
tion on the dust-proof glass.
• Low image density due to dew condensation on the reader CIS and copy-
board glass.
• Paper feed failure due to dew condensation on the pickup, feed guide.
2 If the symptom appears described above, wipe the pickup/feed unit with dry
cloth. Moreover, if storing the toner container/developing assembly/drum unit in
the cold place and unpacking them abruptly in warm place, dew condensation
may be generated. To prevent dew condensation, place them in warm place
sufficiently (for 1 to 2 hours) before unpacking.
230
7. Troubleshooting
Test Print
Overview
The host machine is equipped with following "Test Print TYPE" and an image failure can be checked with each test print TYPE
which is processed on the main controller PCB (PCB2). If an image failure is not occurred on the test print at normal printing, the
error may be caused by the PDL input or reader side.
Select the Test Print TYPE

PG TYPE Pat- Items
TYP tern Grada- Fogging Transfer Black White Uneven Front/ Right Straight Magnifi-
E tion Fault line line Pitch Rear Un- Angle Lines cation
even Ration
Density
0 Grid - - - - - - - Yes Yes Yes
1 Half Tone - - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - - -
2 Solid Density - - Yes - Yes Yes Yes - - -
(black)
3 Solid Density - - - Yes - - - - - -
(white)
4 17-Gradation Yes Yes - - Yes - Yes - - -
5 to 7 (For R&D) - - - - - - - - - -
Procedure
Select PG TYPE on the following service mode.
• TESTMODE > PRINT > PG-TYPE
How to View the Test Print

■ Grid (TYPE = 0)
Check item Check method Assumed cause

Right angle accuracy/ Straight line accuracy Check whether lines in the horizontal/ verti- Feed system failure or Laser Scanner Unit
cal scanning directions are paralleled to the failure is considered.
paper and these lines are at right angles to
one another.
Magnification ratio Check whether the grid is printed at 9.99mm Roller’s feed system failure or laser expo-
intervals. (Check the image on the second sure system failure (drum, Laser Scanner) is
side at duplex printing.) considered.
231
7. Troubleshooting
■ Halftone (TYPE = 1)

Transfer failure Check the evenness of halftone density. Transfer system failure or transfer roller fail-
Check whether uneven image or foggy image appears. ure is considered.
Black line Check whether black lines appear on the image. Laser light path failure, grid failure, develop-
ing system failure, cleaning (drum) failure or
transfer roller failure is considered.
White line Check whether white lines appear on the image. Developing system failure is considered.
Uneven pitch Check whether lines appear on the image in the horizontal scanning Drum failure, developing system failure, la-
direction. ser exposure system failure or drive related
failure is considered.
Uneven density Check the density difference between the front and rear sides. Drum failure or developing system failure is
considered.
■ Solid black (TYPE = 2)

White line Check whether white lines appear on the image. Developing system failure is considered.
Uneven pitch Check whether lines appear on the image in the horizontal scanning Drum failure, developing system failure, la-
direction. ser exposure system failure or drive related
failure is considered.
Uneven density Check the density difference between the front and rear sides. Drum failure or developing system failure is
considered.
232
7. Troubleshooting
■ Solid white (TYPE = 3)

Black line Black line Check whether black lines appear on the image. Laser light path failure, developing system
failure, cleaning (drum) failure or transfer
roller failure is considered.
■ 17 gradations (TYPE = 4)

Gradation Check whether gradation in density is made appropriately. Drum failure, laser exposure system failure
or developing system failure is considered.
Fogging Check whether foggy image appears in the blank area. Drum failure, laser exposure system failure
or developing system failure is considered.
Black line Black line Check whether black lines appear on the image. Laser light path failure, developing system
failure, cleaning (drum) failure or transfer
roller failure is considered.
233
7. Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Items
Troubleshooting Items
Category Item
Image failure Dirt Edge dirt
Void Feed failure
- Irregular pitch (94mm) of the drum unit
Operation failure Paper jam Large curl
Others - "Non-Canon cartridge" is displayed
Image Failure
■ Edge Dirt
• Location
Paper path
• Cause
Floating toner in the host machine stains paper by paper feeding.
• Condition
When floating toner occurs.
• Field Remedy
Clean paper path.
■ Feed Failure
• Location
Feed roller
• Cause
Amount of charge, only at a part where the roller contacts, is changed by friction between the feed roller and paper so that
amount of toner, transfers to paper, is changed.
• Condition
It occurs at high printing chart such as halftone and black when static electricity eliminating is decreased.
• Field Remedy
Adjustment/Maintenance > Special Processing > Special Mode M (Transfer failure prevention mode)
234
7. Troubleshooting
■ Irregular pitch (94mm) of the drum unit
• Location
Drum unit : approx. 94mm pitch
• Cause
Remaining toner adheres surface of the drum unit by vibration caused when the drum unit is re-installed or re-rotates, as
amount of toner adhesion is larger than the developing process, the drum unit is vibrated by load while the cleaning blade
is removing remaining toner. As a result, laser beam exposure is blurred by the vibration and an irregular pitch occurs.
• Condition
High temperature / High humidity
• Field Remedy
Adjustment/Maintenance > Special Processing > Special Mode Y (Extend initial rotation mode)
Operation Failure
■ Large Curl
• Location
Fixing Assembly
• Cause
Curl is increased when water amount of the paper on surface and back are changed by high fixing temperature.
• Condition
Paper stored at high temperature and high humidity for a long time.
• Field Remedy
Adjustment/Maintenance > Special Processing > Special Mode N (Curl correction mode)
Others
■ "Non-Canon cartridge" is displayed
CAUTION:
Do not turn OFF the main power switch when "a non-Canon cartridge" is displayed or a possible cause may not be
determined in the following flowchart.
235
7. Troubleshooting
Check Flow
Non-Canon cartridge message
Must not do main power OFF
ձ ࠕwrong item number ࠖ

Check the
To procedure ո
message
ࠕCart.Malfunctionࠖ
or
ࠕCart.Not Insertedࠖ
ղ
Check the OK Cleaning of the Check the 䠫䠧
toner cartridge contact point message
NG 䠪䠣
To procedure ո
ճ
Check the There is tape Check the 䠫䠧
Tear off a tape
sealing tape message
There is no tape 䠪䠣
մ
Check the There is tape Check the 䠫䠧
Tear off tape
shutter tape message
There is no tape 䠪䠣
Main power
յ
Check the 䠪䠣 OFF/ON Check the 䠫䠧
Link arm repair
link arm message
䠫䠧䠪䠣
Main power
ն
Check the 䠪䠣 OFF/ON Check the 䠫䠧
Drum unit repair
drum unit message
䠫䠧䠪䠣
շ
Cleaning of the Replacement of Check the 䠫䠧
contact point the toner cartridge message
䠪䠣
To procedure չ
ո Replacement of Check the 䠫䠧

the toner cartridge message
䠪䠣
To procedure պ
չ 䠫䠧
Check the OPEN 䠫䠧 Check the
Shutter repair
shutter message
䠪䠣
CLOSE 䠪䠣
Developing Assembly
replacement
Check the
message
պ PCB replacement Finish
Check Procedure
Procedure 1: Check the Message
1. Checking a non-canon cartridge message till the last.
2. A message advances to procedure 2 in the case of "malfunction" or "Non-insertion".

A message advances to procedure 8 in the case of "Wrong Item Number".
Procedure 2: Check the toner cartridge
236
7. Troubleshooting
1. Open front cover and confirm a rotary position of toner cartridge.
NG OK
2. When a set position of the toner cartridge is "NG", go to step 3).

When a set position is "OK", remove the toner cartridge and clean up the electrode shown in the figure with dry lint-free
paper.
3. Reinsert the toner cartridge, close all the covers and observe a displayed message.
If "a non-Canon cartridge" remains, go to step 8).
When the "non-Canon cartridge" message has gone, the problem has been rectified.
Procedure 3: Check the Sealing Tape

1. Draw out the toner cartridge and observe if the ceiling tape is existing.
237
7. Troubleshooting
2. When the toner seal is not existing, go to step 4).

If the toner seal is existing, remove it.
NOTE:
Carefully take the setting procedure of the toner cartridge not to spill over the toner powder.
Procedure 4: Check the Shutter Tape

1. Draw out the toner cartridge and check the shutter tape.
2. When there is not shutter tape, go to step 5).

When there is shutter tape, tear off tape.
Procedure 5: Check the link arm

1. Open left door and confirm a state of link arm.
2. When the link arm is disengaged, go to step 6).

If the link arm has come off, restore it.
3. Close all the covers and turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
4. If "a non-Canon cartridge" remains, go to step 6).
Procedure 6: Check the Drum Unit
238
7. Troubleshooting
1. Remove the drum unit and confirm the transformation of the nail.
OK NG
2. When there is not the transformation of the nail, go to step 7).

When there was the transformation of the nail, change it
3. Close all the covers and turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
4. If "a non-Canon cartridge" remains, go to step 7).
Procedure 7: Cleaning of the contact point

1. Remove the toner cartridge and clean up the electrode shown in the figure with dry lint-free paper.
2. Replacement of the toner cartridge

3. Close all the covers and observe a displayed message.
Procedure 8: Replacement of the toner cartridge

1. Replacement of the toner cartridge.
When the "non-Canon cartridge" message has gone, the problem has been rectified
Procedure 9: Check the Shutter
239
7. Troubleshooting
1. Confirm a shutter of developing assembly
OK NG
2. When the shutter is closes, go to step 10).

When the shutter is open, close it manually.
If the shutter can hardly be closed manually, replace the developing assembly.
Procedure 10: Replacement of the PCB

1. Replacement of the PCB
3. Confirm that "non-Canon cartridge" message does not occur.(Finish)
Special mode (User mode)

The setting of the special mode in user mode is described below.
• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Special Processing Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance >
Special Processing
Special Mode O
Outline Separation priority mode
Use case When separation failure from the drum unit occurs
Details Increase separation bias output in a area of leading edge of paper at -2500V (duty 89.2%). Other than the above
area is used separation bias output on separation bias setting mode or normal mode.
Set range OFF, ON
Default value OFF
Special Mode M
Outline Transfer failure prevention mode
Use case When transfer failure occurs by low / high transfer output
Details Change transfer current value setting.
Set range HIGH DOWN, DOWN, OFF, UP, HIGH UP
Default value OFF
Special Mode N
Outline Curl correction mode
Use case When paper jam occurs in 2-sided printing using the curled paper and absorbed moisture paper.
Details Paper jam frequently occurs when performing 2-sided printing, especially with the curled paper and absorbed
moisture paper. In this case, change the setting value to Mode 1 (N1 mode) or Mode 2 (N3 mode).
• N1 mode: Lower the fixing target temperature for plain paper.
• N3 mode: The through-put decreases during the wait.
Set range AUTO, OFF, N1 Mode, N3 Mode
Default value AUTO
240
7. Troubleshooting
Special Mode S
Outline Performance priority mode
Use case Shorten the wait after changing paper size
Details Cooling down operation is controlled without dropping the throughput as far as possible. The temperature judge-
ment value of the fixing sub thermistor is changed between the start of cooling down and the end in the last rotation.
Set range OFF(190 deg C), ON(220 deg C)
Default value OFF
Special Mode P
Outline Thin paper mode
Use case When paper cling or high-temperature offset occurs with out-ofspecific
thin paper.
Details Control paper cling while changing following conditions.
Transfer
• Turns ON at 8mm inside of paper.
• Turns OFF at the sheet-to-sheet.
Separation
• -2500V until 6mm inside of paper (leading edge strong bias)
• -1500V other than the above (weak bias)
Fixing temperature control
• The target temperature in the "Thin paper mode" is set -10 deg C less than the target temperature during the
wait, printing and sheet to sheet.
Set range OFF, ON
Default value OFF
Special Mode G
Outline Special setting for fixing mode
Use case When electrostatic offsetting (adhere toner on the film) occurs.
Details Extend initial rotation by sheet to sheet after print setting and charge positive film bias in order to remove the charge
from the film.
Set range Default, Low ( processed by 38 sheet to sheet), High ( processed by 6 sheet to sheet )
Default value Default
Special Mode Y
Outline Extend initial rotation mode
Use case When irregular pitch (94mm) horizontal streak occurs caused by shock as startup.
Details Extend initial rotation to discharge frictional charging caused as remaining toner adheres surface of the drum unit
at startup.
Set range 0: OFF
1: Mode 1 - Extend initial rotation in 3 sec
2: Mode 2 - Extend initial rotation in 7 sec
Default value OFF
Special Mode X
Outline Streaks reduction mode (only for media printing and printing from PS/PCL printer driver)
Use case When black streaks appears.
Details Black streaks appears on printouts in condition of paper type or print environment. In such case, change the setting
value.
• Paper curl or crinkle may be improved without the setting when changing paper type or print environment.
• Print speed becomes slow when Mode2 is set.
Set range OFF, Mode1 (Effect: low), Mode2 (Effect: High)
Default value OFF
Special Mode Z
Outline Streaks reduction mode (only for copying)
Use case When black streaks appears.
241
7. Troubleshooting
Special Mode Z
Details Black streaks appears on printouts in condition of paper type or print environment. In such case, change the setting
value.
• Paper curl or crinkle may be improved without the setting when changing paper type or print environment.
• Print speed becomes slow when Mode2 is set.
Set range OFF, Mode1 (Effect: low), Mode2 (Effect: High)
Default value OFF
242
8 Error/Jam/Alarm
Overview........................................... 244
Error Code.........................................247
Jam Code..........................................255
Alarm Code....................................... 257
8. Error/Jam/Alarm
Overview
Outline
This chapter describes various codes which are displayed when a failure occurs on the product. These are classified into 3 codes
as follows.
Code type Explanation

Error code This code is displayed when an error occurs on the machine.
Jam code This code is displayed when a jam occurs inside the machine.
Alarm code This code is displayed when a function of the machine is malfunctioned.
■ Error/Jam Log indication
Error log
SERVICE MODE > COPIER > DISPLAY > ERR
090831 1624 㻱㻝㻜㻜㻙㻜㻞㻜㻜

Year/Month/Day Time/Minute Error Code
Indication example
ERR
090831 1624 E100-0200
------ ----
------ ----
------ ----
------ ----
------ ----
Jam log
SERVICE MODE > COPIER > DISPLAY > JAM
/RFDWLRQFRGH 3DSHUIHHGSRVLWLRQ
090831 1624 0-1234-1-02

<HDU0RQWK'D\ 7LPH0LQXWH -DP&RGH 3DSHU6L]H&RGH
Indication example
JAM
JAM
090831 1624 0-1234-1-02
------ ----
------ ----
------ ----
------ ----
------ ----
244
8. Error/Jam/Alarm
■ JAM/ERR LOG REPORT

Output procedure of the JAM/ERR LOG REPORT
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > ERR-LOG
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[8] [9] [10] [11]
[12] [13] [14] [15]
No. Item
1 Month/Day Time/Minute
2 Position summary code
3 Location code
4 Jam code
5 Total counter
6 Pickup position code
7 Paper size
8 Position summary code
9 Error code
10 Error details code
11 Total counter
12 Alarm level (For R&D)
13 Alarm code
14 Alarm details code (For R&D)
15 Total counter
■ Location Code
The jam codes of this machine contain information on the location.
The location information is displayed in a single digit and has the meaning shown below:
Device Location code

Host machine 0
ADF 1
■ Pickup Position Code

When a jam occurs, the pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code.
Pickup position Pickup position code

ADF -
Pickup from Multi-purpose Tray 0
245
8. Error/Jam/Alarm
Pickup position Pickup position code

Cassette 1 1
Option cassette 2
At duplex printing 7
■ Paper Size Code

Paper size is coded and indicated with the size codes as shown below when a paper jam occurs.
Paper size Paper size code

Control Panel (UI) Jam/Err Log Report *1
A4R 02 00002
B5R 07 00007
A5R 03 00003
LGL 0C 00012
LTRR 0D 00013
EXECR 0A 00010
STMTR 3C 00060
16K D4 00212
OFFICIO 3E 00062
FOOLSCAP 3D 00061
G-LGL D1 00209
G-LTRR D0 00208
Brazil-OFFICIO CC 00204
Mexico-OFFICIO D2 00210
AUS-FOOLSCAP CA 00202
COM10 16 00022
Monarch 17 00023
DL 18 00024
ISO-C5 15 00021
Custom 13 00019
*1 Size code on the JAM/ERR LOG REPORT.
246
8. Error/Jam/Alarm
Error Code
E000-0000-- Fixing Assembly: Temperature rise failure
Detection Description After the start of temperature control, the Fixing Assembly did not reach the specified temperature
within the specified time.
Remedy 1. Go through the following to clear the error: Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR>
ERR. Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power.
2. Check the Harness/Connector between the Fixing Assembly and the Engine Controller PCB
(PCB1).
3. Check the Harness/Connector between the Fixing Assembly and the Power Supply PCB
(PCB4).
4. Check the Harness/Connector between the Power Supply PCB (PCB4) and the Engine
Controller PCB (PCB1).
5. Replace the Fixing Assembly.
6. Replace the Engine Controller PCB (PCB1).
7. Replace the Power Supply PCB (PCB4).
E001-0000-- Abnormally high temperature of the Fixing Assembly

Detection Description It was detected that the temperature of the Fixing Assembly (Main Thermistor) (TH1) was
abnormally high.
(PCB1).
(PCB4).
E001-0001-- Abnormally high temperature of the Fixing Assembly

Detection Description It was detected that the temperature of the Fixing Assembly (Sub Thermistor) (TH2) was
abnormally high.
(PCB1).
(PCB4).
247
8. Error/Jam/Alarm
E002-0000-- Fixing Assembly: Temperature rise failure

Detection Description The Fixing Assembly did not exceed the specified temperature within the specified time.
(PCB1).
(PCB4).
E003-0000-- Abnormally low temperature of the Fixing Assembly

Detection Description It was detected that the temperature of the Fixing Assembly (Main Thermistor) (TH1) was
abnormally low.
(PCB1).
(PCB4).
E003-0001-- Abnormally low temperature of the Fixing Assembly

Detection Description It was detected that the temperature of the Fixing Assembly (Sub Thermistor) (TH2) was
abnormally low.
(PCB1).
(PCB4).
E004-0000-- Fixing Power Supply Drive Circuit Unit error

Detection Description No zero cross signal was detected within the specified period of time.
Remedy 1. Check the Harness/Connector between the Engine Controller PCB (PCB1) and the Thermistor
(TH1/TH2).
2. Check the Harness/Connector between Fixing Assembly and the Engine Controller PCB
(PCB1).
E010-0000-- Main Motor startup error

Detection Description The number of revolutions of the Main Motor (M1) did not reach the specified value.
Remedy 1. Check the Harness/Connector between the Main Motor (M1) and the Engine Controller PCB
(PCB1).
2. Replace the Main Motor (M1).
248
8. Error/Jam/Alarm
E010-0001-- Main Motor rotation error

Detection Description The number of revolutions of the Main Motor (M1) deviated from the specified value.
Remedy 1. Check the Harness/Connector between the Main Motor (M1) and the Engine Controller PCB
(PCB1).
2. Replace the Main Motor (M1).
E014-0000-- Fixing Motor startup error

Detection Description The number of revolutions of the Fixing Motor (M3) did not reach the specified value.
Remedy 1. Check the Harness/Connector between the Fixing Motor (M3) and the Engine Controller PCB
(PCB1).
2. Replace the Fixing Motor (M3).
E014-0001-- Fixing Motor rotation error

Detection Description The number of revolutions of the Fixing Motor (M3) deviated from the specified value.
Remedy 1. Check the Harness/Connector between the Fixing Motor (M3) and the Engine Controller PCB
(PCB1).
E024-0000-- Developing Assembly error

Detection Description When disconnection of the Toner Sensor (SR17) was detected for more than the specified period
of time.
Remedy 1. Check the Harness/Connector between the Developing Assembly and the Engine Controller
PCB (PCB1).
2. Replace the Developing Assembly.
E024-0001-- Toner Sensor error

Detection Description Toner Sensor (SR17) error.
Remedy 1. Check the Harness/Connector between the Toner Sensor (SR17) and the Engine Controller
PCB (PCB1).
2. Replace the Toner Sensor (SR17).
E100-0000-- BD error
Detection Description BD error.
Remedy 1. Check the Harness/Connector between the Laser Scanner Unit and the Engine Controller PCB
(PCB1).
2. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
E196-0000-- EEPROM Read error

Detection Description When the EEPROM data could not be read at startup.
Remedy 1. Install the set of controller firmware.
E196-0001-- EEPROM access error

Detection Description The EEPROM could not be accessed.
E196-0002-- EEPROM Write error

Detection Description Data could not be correctly written in the EEPROM.
249
8. Error/Jam/Alarm
E196-1000-- ROM Write/Read error (Main ROM)

Detection Description Write/Read error of the main program (Main ROM) inside the Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
2. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
E196-2000-- ROM Write/Read error (ROM for saving setting values)

Detection Description Write/Read error of the main program (ROM for saving setting values) inside the Main Controller
PCB (PCB2).
E196-3000-- ROM Write/Read error (eMMC)

Detection Description Data could not be written or read from the eMMC. The eMMC failure occurred.
E196-3001-- ROM-ID mismatch (eMMC)

Detection Description The eMMC has been replaced wrongly.
The eMMC failure occurred.
E202-0001-- CIS Unit HP error (outward)

Detection Description The CIS Unit could not detect the home position when starting scanning operation.
Remedy 1. Check the Harness/Connector between the Main Controller PCB (SR03) and the CIS Unit HP
Sensor (SR03)/Reader Motor (M02).
2. Replace the CIS Unit HP Sensor (SR03).
3. Replace the Reader Motor (M02).
E202-0002-- CIS Unit HP error (homeward)

Detection Description The CIS Unit could not detect the home position when completing scanning operation.
Remedy 1. Check the Harness/Connector between the Main Controller PCB (SR03) and the CIS Unit HP
Sensor (SR03)/Reader Motor (M02).
E225-0001-- CIS Unit light intensity below the standard level

Detection Description The light intensity fell short of the standard level at shading.
Remedy 1. Disconnect and then connect the Flexible Cable.
2. Replace the Flexible Cable.
3. Replace the CIS Unit.
Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
E246-0000-- System error

Detection Description System error.
Remedy Contact the sales company.

E248-0001-- Error in access to backup data for Reader (reading error at power-on)
Detection Description Unable to read the Reader-related adjustment values.
250
8. Error/Jam/Alarm
E250-0000-- One-Touch Key Cover detection error

Detection Description Unable to detect the opening/closing of the One-Touch Key Cover.
Remedy 1. Check the installation of the One-Touch Key Cover.
2. Check the Harness/Connector between the Control Panel PCB (PCB5) and the Main Controller
PCB (PCB2).
3. Replace the Control Panel PCB (PCB5).
E261-0000-- Zero Cross signal error

Detection Description Unable to detect a Zero Cross signal.
Remedy 1. Check the Harness/Connector between the Engine Controller PCB (PCB1) and the AC Driver
PCB (PCB3).
2. Replace the Power Supply Unit (including the AC Driver PCB (PCB3)).

E351-0000-- Main Controller PCB error (Scanner System)





E719-0000-- Communication error with the Copy Card Reader (serial communication)
Detection Description Unable to communicate with the Card Reader.
Remedy 1. Check the Harness/Connector between the Copy Card Reader and the host machine.
2. Replace the Copy Card Reader.
NOTE: After taking the above measures, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER >
FUNCTION > CLEAR > E719-CLR.
E732-0000-- Scanner communication error

Detection Description Scanner communication error.
251
8. Error/Jam/Alarm
E733-0000-- Printer communication error

Detection Description A communication error occurred between the Engine Controller PCB (PCB1) and the Main
Remedy 1. Check the Harness/Connector between the Engine Controller PCB (PCB1) and the Main
2. Install the set of the controller firmware.
E736-0000-- Fax communication error

Detection Description Communication error with CCU/modem.
2. Replace the modem PCB (PCB9).
E736-0001-- FAX Backup ROM error

Detection Description An error occurred in the FAX Backup ROM.
Remedy 1. Check the connection of the NCU PCB.
2. Replace the modem PCB (PCB9).
E743-0000-- DDI communication error

Detection Description Software sequence error.
Remedy 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
E744-0001-- Mismatch combination of language file version

Detection Description The language file version was incompatible with the main program.
Remedy Install the set of controller firmware.
E744-0002-- Language file error

Detection Description The language file size exceeded the permissible size.
E744-1001-- Mismatch between the versions for BOOTABLE and BOOTROM

Detection Description Mismatch of versions for the main program and the startup program.
E744-4000-- Engine ID error

Detection Description Connection of an incorrect engine was detected.
Remedy 1. Check that the correct engine controller has been installed.
2. Install the set of controller firmware.
E744-5000-- Panel Microcomputer error

Detection Description An error in the Control Panel PCB (PCB5) (microcomputer).
Remedy 1. Check the Control Panel PCB (PCB5).
3. Replace the Control Panel PCB (PCB5).
E744-7000-- Backup Microcomputer error

Detection Description An error of the microcomputer that retains the FAX job information on the Main Controller PCB
(PCB2).
252
8. Error/Jam/Alarm
E746-0000-- Main Controller PCB error (other)

Detection Description A communication error occurred in the Main Controller PCB (PCB2) (other than reading-related
errors).
E766-8000-- Firmware error

Detection Description Unable to obtain the digital registration information.
Remedy 1. Install the engine controller firmware.
E766-9000-- Laser power supply condition error

Detection Description The power supply condition of the laser Scanner Unit was abnormal (dependent on the firmware).
2. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
E766-xxxx-- Firmware error

Detection Description An error disabling continuous operation of the device occurred due to the controller software.
xxxx: A task number is displayed at the faulty location within the Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
Remedy Being a firmware failure as it is, the error is less likely to be cleared by replacing the Main Controller
PCB (PCB2).
Reconfirm the introduced job.
E805-0000-- Delivery Cooling Fan error

Detection Description The Delivery Cooling Fan could not rotate at the specified number of revolutions.
Remedy 1. Check the connection of the Delivery Cooling Fan (FM1).
2. Replace the Delivery Cooling Fan (FM1).
E805-0001-- Heat Exhaust Fan error

Detection Description The Heat Exhaust Fan could not rotate at the specified number of revolutions.
Remedy 1. Check the connection of the Heat Exhaust Fan (FM3).
2. Replace the Heat Exhaust Fan (FM3).
E805-0002-- Power Supply Cooling Fan error

Detection Description The Power Supply Cooling Fan could not rotate at the specified number of revolutions.
Remedy 1. Check the connection of the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM2).
2. Replace the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM2).
E840-0000-- Pressure Release Mechanism error

Detection Description An error of the Fixing Assembly Pressure Release Mechanism was detected.
Remedy 1. Check the Harness/Connector between the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor 1 (SR15)/2 (SR16)
and the Engine Controller PCB (PCB1).
2. Check the Harness/Connector between Fixing Motor (M3) and the Engine Controller PCB
(PCB1).
3. Replace the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor 1 (SR15) or the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor
1 (SR16).
253
8. Error/Jam/Alarm
E996-0071-- Sequence jam error

Detection Description A sequence jam error in the Scanner Assembly was detected.
Remedy 1. Check the installation of the Scanner Assembly.
2. Check the Harness/Connector between the CIS Unit HP Sensor (SR03)/Reader Motor (M02)
and the Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
254
8. Error/Jam/Alarm
Jam Code
Main Unit (including Cassette Feeding Module-AC1)
SR02
SR01
SR10
SR5
SR14
SR11
Loca- Jam code Type Jam Detection Sensor Name / Sensor ID Residual Paper
tion Detection Contents Area
Code
4 0001 Delay Jam Document End Sensor SR01 ADF Unit
4 0002 Stationary Jam Document End Sensor SR01 ADF Unit
4 0004 Delay Jam (2nd side) Document End Sensor SR01 ADF Unit
4 0005 Stationary Jam (2nd Document End Sensor SR01 ADF Unit
side)
4 0071 Sequence Jam Sequence Error - -
4 0094 Power On Jam Document End Sensor, Document SR01, SR02 ADF Unit
Sensor
4 0095 Pickup error Document Sensor SR02 ADF Unit
3 0104 Pickup Delay Jam 1 Registration Sensor SR11 Pickup Area
3 0144 Pickup Delay Jam 1 Registration Sensor SR11 Registration Area to
Delivery Area
3 0184 Pickup Delay Jam 1 Registration Sensor SR11 Duplex Area
3 01C4 Pickup Delay Jam 1 Registration Sensor SR11 Registration Area to
Delivery Area
3 0208 Pickup Stationary Registration Sensor SR11 Pickup Area
Jam 1
3 0248 Pickup Stationary Registration Sensor SR11 Registration Area to
Jam 1 Delivery Area
3 0288 Pickup Stationary Registration Sensor SR11 Duplex Area
Jam 1
3 02C8 Pickup Stationary Registration Sensor SR11 Registration Area to
Jam 1 Delivery Area
3 010C Fixing/Delivery Delay Fixing Delivery Sensor, Registration SR5, SR11 Pickup Area
Jam 1 Sensor
3 014C Fixing/Delivery Delay Fixing Delivery Sensor, Registration SR5, SR11 Registration Area to
Jam 1 Sensor Delivery Area
255
8. Error/Jam/Alarm
Loca- Jam code Type Jam Detection Sensor Name / Sensor ID Residual Paper
tion Detection Contents Area
Code
3 018C Fixing/Delivery Delay Fixing Delivery Sensor, Registration SR5, SR11 Duplex Area
Jam 1 Sensor
3 01CC Fixing/Delivery Delay Fixing Delivery Sensor, Registration SR5, SR11 Registration Area to
Jam 1 Sensor Delivery Area
3 0210 Fixing/Delivery Sta- Fixing Delivery Sensor, Registration SR5, SR11 Pickup Area
tionary Jam 1 Sensor
3 0250 Fixing/Delivery Sta- Fixing Delivery Sensor, Registration SR5, SR11 Registration Area to
tionary Jam 1 Sensor Delivery Area
3 0290 Fixing/Delivery Sta- Fixing Delivery Sensor, Registration SR5, SR11 Duplex Area
tionary Jam 1 Sensor
3 02D0 Fixing/Delivery Sta- Fixing Delivery Sensor, Registration SR5, SR11 Registration Area to
tionary Jam 1 Sensor Delivery Area
3 1014 Internal Paper Re- Fixing Delivery Sensor, Registration SR5, SR11 Pickup Area
maining Jam Sensor
3 1054 Internal Paper Re- Fixing Delivery Sensor, Registration SR5, SR11 Registration Area to
maining Jam Sensor Delivery Area
3 1094 Internal Paper Re- Fixing Delivery Sensor, Registration SR5, SR11 Duplex Area
maining Jam Sensor
3 10D4 Internal Paper Re- Fixing Delivery Sensor, Registration SR5, SR11 Registration Area to
maining Jam Sensor Delivery Area
3 1118 Door Open Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor, Registration SR5, SR11 Pickup Area
Sensor
3 1158 Door Open Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor, Registration SR5, SR11 Registration Area to
Sensor Delivery Area
3 1198 Door Open Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor, Registration SR5, SR11 Duplex Area
Sensor
3 11D8 Door Open Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor, Registration SR5, SR11 Registration Area to
Sensor Delivery Area
3 021C Fixing Wrap Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor SR5 Pickup Area
3 025C Fixing Wrap Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor SR5 Registration Area to
Delivery Area
3 029C Fixing Wrap Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor SR5 Duplex Area
3 02CC Fixing Wrap Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor SR5 Registration Area to
Delivery Area
3 0220 Duplex Re-pickup Registration Sensor SR11 Pickup Area
Jam
3 0260 Duplex Re-pickup Registration Sensor SR11 Registration Area to
Jam Delivery Area
3 02A0 Duplex Re-pickup Registration Sensor SR11 Duplex Area
Jam
3 02E0 Duplex Re-pickup Registration Sensor SR11 Registration Area to
Jam Delivery Area
3 0001 to 0077 Size Error The mismatch of the paper size - -
256
8. Error/Jam/Alarm
Alarm Code
10-0020 Toner (Bk) prior delivery alarm
A. Operation / B. Cause / As the detected toner level reached the value set in [COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-DLV-BK],
C. Remedy an alarm was sent to request for prior delivery.
10-0100 Toner (Bk) replacement notification alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Detail Code: 0071
C. Remedy Replacement of Toner Bottle was detected.
10-0100 Unidentified Toner Bottle (Bk) replacement notification alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Detail Code: 0181
C. Remedy Replacement of unidentified Toner Bottle was detected.
35-0073 Drum Unit (Bk) replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Replacement of Drum Unit was detected.
C. Remedy
35-0091 ADF Pickup Roller replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / [Adjustment/Maintenance > Initialize After Replacing Parts > ADF Pickup Roller and ADF
C. Remedy Separation Pad > Yes] was pressed or the counter was cleared.
35-0092 ADF Separation Pad replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / [Adjustment/Maintenance > Initialize After Replacing Parts > ADF Pickup Roller and ADF
C. Remedy Separation Pad > Yes] was pressed or the counter was cleared.
40-0073 Drum Unit (Bk) prior delivery alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / As the value of [COPIER > COUNTER > LF > K-DRM-LF] reached the value set in [COPIER >
C. Remedy OPTION > FNC-SW > D-DLV-BK], an alarm was sent to request for prior delivery.
85-0001 System error

A. Operation / B. Cause / Contact the sales company.
C. Remedy

C. Remedy

C. Remedy

A. Operation / B. Cause / Auto recovery due to replacement with a new (service part) Main Controller PCB.
C. Remedy

A. Operation / B. Cause / Auto recovery due to replacement with a used Main Controller PCB.
C. Remedy
257
9 Service Mode
Overview........................................... 259
COPIER (Service mode for printer)...264
FEEDER (ADF service mode)...........321
FAX (FAX service mode).................. 324
TESTMODE (Service mode for test
print, operation check, etc.)........... 331
9. Service Mode
Overview
Entering Service Mode

For information on how to enter service mode, contact the Support Dept. of the sales company.
Outline of Service Mode

Service mode
COPIER Service mode for copier
DISPLAY State display mode

I/O I/O display mode
ADJUST Adjustment mode
FUNCTION Operation / inspection mode
OPTION Specification setting mode
COUNT ER Counter mode
FEEDER ADF service mode
ADJUST Adjustment mode
FUNCTION Operation / inspection mode
FAX FAX service mode
SSSW Bit switch registration mode

MENU Menu switch registration mode
NUM Numeric parameter setting mode
NCU NCU parameter setting mode
(Service adjustment is not available䠅
TESTMODE Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.
PRINT Print test mode

FAX FAX test mode
Backing up Service Mode

Because setting values and management data of the host machine are stored in the eMMC of the Main Controller PCB, they
need to be backed up before replacing the Main Controller PCB. (Do not remove the eMMC PCB form Main Controller PCB.)
Also, restoration of the backup data is necessary after replacing the Main Controller PCB.
Backup: Connect a USB flash drive to the USB memory port.

Restore: Restore backup data of the USB flash drive.

259
9. Service Mode
NOTE:
As for the user data (the Settings/Registration data, etc.), be sure to back up the user data before replacing the Main Controller
PCB and then restore it after replacement by either of the following methods:
Backup
• Menu > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export > Export
• Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export > Export
Restore
• Menu > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export > Import
• Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export > Import
Service Label
Each device is adjusted at the time of shipment and the adjusted values are written on the service label. When replacing the main
controller PCB, engine controller PCB or clearing RAM, ADJUST and OPTION values are reset to default. Re-adjustment must
be executed in field and ensure to write the changed setting values on the service label. If the corresponding item is not found
on the service label, write the setting values on the blank space.
• The service label is affixed inside the rear cover.
260
9. Service Mode
Service Mode Structure
User screen
Initial screen
1)Up-arrow / down-arrow key Return key

2)OK key
Up-arrow / down-arrow key

Category Category
1)Up-arrow / down-arrow key Return key

2)OK key
Up-arrow / down-arrow key

Sub category Sub category
1)Up-arrow / down-arrow key

Return key
2)OK key
Item Item
1)Up-arrow / down-arrow key

2)OK key OK / Return key
Setting screen
Screen Flow of Service Mode

Initial / Category / Sub category screen
Select the item : ▼/▲ key
Go to Sub category screen : OK key
Go to Initial screen : Return key
SERVICE MODE
COPIER
FEEDER
FAX
TESTMODE
Item selection screen

Select the item : ▼/▲ key
Go to Setting screen : OK key
Go to Sub category screen : Return key
261
9. Service Mode
ADJ-X :0
ADJ-Y :0
ADJ-Y-DF :0
ADJ-X-MG :0
STRD-POS :0
Input value screen

Enter the setting value : Numeric key
Increment the setting value one by one :▲
Decrease the setting value one by one :▼
Nullify the setting value : Clear key
Change the setting : OK key
Maintain the setting : Return key
Change the +/- of the setting value : * key
ADJ-X
▲
0
▼
(-30 - 30)
Caution when Changing the Setting Value

When the setting value is changed in the service mode, check and overwrite the value every 5 sec. When turning OFF the main
power within 5 sec after changing the value, it is not saved.
CAUTION:
Wait 10 seconds from when "executing..." disappears to when the main power is turned OFF.
Remote UI Service Mode

Remote UI can be used to display, set and implement various service mode in addition to rebooting the machine. In this case,
machine's UI displays "Remote service mode".
■ Operating Condition
Operation of service mode using remote UI becomes possible in the following cases:
• Service mode is not used on LUI.
• There is no user who has been logged in to the remote UI service mode (this function).
• Remote UI is enabled in the setting of LUI.
Setting Menu > System Management Settings > Remote UI On/Off
• “RMT-SW” is enabled in service mode (Enabled when the setting value is “1”.)
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > RMT-SW (remote UI service mode function)
0: OFF, 1: ON (default)
262
9. Service Mode
■ Usage Method
1. Activate the Web browser.
2. Enter the following URL in the address input field.
http://<IP address of the machine or host name>/servicemode.html
3. Enter the password and click "Log In".
* Password required for authentication differs depending on the service mode setting.
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > PSWD-SW
PSWD-SW Password required for authentication

0 1. Password of RUI service mode
2. Password of service mode
2. User's system administrator ID
3. Password of system administrator
4. Password of service mode
* Password of service mode can be changed in COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SM-PSWD.
Authentication Screen
1. PSWD-SW: 0
2. PSWD-SW: 1
3. PSWD-SW: 2
4. Click “Logout” to end the operation.
NOTE:
After login, if you close the browser without “logout”, it is recognized that you have been “logged in”. Therefore, in order to
log in to service mode again, you must wait for a certain period of time (3 minutes) from the last access to make the system
timeout or turn OFF/ON the power.
263
9. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer)
DISPLAY (State display mode)

■ VERSION
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION
MAIN Display of Bootable version
Detail To display the firmware version of Main Controller PCB.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 to 99.99
BOOT Display of BootROM version

Detail To display the version of Boot ROM (BOOT program).
LANG Display of language pack version

Detail To display the version of language pack.
DEMODATA Display of demo print data version

Detail To display the version of demo print data.
For the models not having demo print function, "FF.FF" is displayed.
ECONT Display of Engine Controller version

Detail To display the version of Engine Controller PCB.
PANEL Display of firmware version of panel

Detail To display the firmware version of Control Panel CPU PCB.
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > PANEL-UP
264
9. Service Mode
■ USER
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > USER
SPDTYPE Display of engine speed type
Detail To display the engine speed type (ppm) of this machine.
Use Case When checking the engine speed type
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99
Default Value 0
■ CCD
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD
TARGET-B Display of shading target value (B)
Detail To display the shading target value of Blue.
Continuous display of 128 (minimum) or 384 (maximum) is considered as a failure of the Scanner
Unit or the Main Controller PCB.
Use Case At scanned image failure
Default Value 269
Related Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B
TARGET-G Display of shading target value (G)

Detail To display the shading target value of Green.
Default Value 270
Related Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G
TARGET-R Display of shading target value (R)

Detail To display the shading target value of Red.
Default Value 263
Related Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R
TARGETBW Display of shading target value (B&W)

Detail To display the shading target value of B&W.
Default Value 276
Related Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
265
9. Service Mode
■ MISC
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > MISC
TNRB-IDK Display of Bk-color Toner Container ID
Detail To display the ID of Bk-color Toner Container that is installed to the machine.
Use Case When checking whether the barcode ID on the Toner Container is read correctly
Display/Adj/Set Range ASCII character string
I/O (I/O display mode)

■ R-CON
● R-CON
COPIER > I/O > R-CON
Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks
P001 7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 CIS HP sensor SR03 1: left edge position of the CIS unit
1 Document Sensor SR02 0: paper presence
0 Document End Sensor SR01 0: paper presence
P002 7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
ADJUST (Adjustment mode)

■ ADJ-XY
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > ADJ-XY
ADJ-X Adj start pstn in book mode: vert scan
Detail To adjust the image reading start position (image leading edge position) in the vertical scanning
direction at copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
Decrease the value when the non-image width is larger than the standard value.
Increase the value when out of original area is copied.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the trailing edge side by 0.1 mm.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -30 to 30
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
266
9. Service Mode
ADJ-Y Adj start pstn in book mode: horz scan
Detail To adjust the image reading start position in the horizontal scanning direction at copyboard reading.
Decrease the value when the non-image width is larger than the standard value.
Increase the value when out of original area is copied.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the rear side by 0.1 mm.
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
ADJ-Y-DF Adj start pstn: stream, horz scan, front

Detail To adjust the front side image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction at stream
reading.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the front side by 0.1 mm.
Use Case - When replacing the DADF
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
ADJY-DF2 Adj start pstn: stream, horz scan, back

Detail To adjust the back side image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction at stream
reading.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the rear side by 0.1 mm.
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
267
9. Service Mode
ADJ-X-MG Fine adj img ratio: book mode, vert scan
Detail To make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at copyboard
reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is changed by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.01 %.
+: Enlarge
-: Reduce
Unit 0.01%
Default Value 0
STRD-POS Adj Scan Unit pstn: stream, fd way, frt

Detail To adjust the position of the Scanner Unit on the Reader side in feed direction at stream reading.
The setting is applied to only the image on the front side.
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
■ CCD
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
W-PLT-X Stdrd White Plt white lvl data (X) entry
Detail To enter the white level data (X) for the Standard White Plate.
When replacing the DADF/Reader Unit, Reader Upper Cover Unit or Main Controller PCB, enter
"XXXX" of the value (XXXXYYYYZZZZ) shown on the barcode label affixed at the upper left of the
Copyboard Glass.
Use Case - When replacing the DADF/Reader Unit
- When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Default Value 8273
Related Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Y/Z
268
9. Service Mode
W-PLT-Y Stdrd White Plt white lvl data (Y) entry
Detail To enter the white level data (Y) for the Standard White Plate.
"YYYY" of the value (XXXXYYYYZZZZ) shown on the barcode label affixed at the upper left of the
Copyboard Glass.
Default Value 8737
Related Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X/Z
W-PLT-Z Stdrd White Plt white lvl data (Z) entry

Detail To enter the white level data (Z) for the Standard White Plate.
"ZZZZ" of the value (XXXXYYYYZZZZ) shown on the barcode label affixed at the upper left of the
Copyboard Glass.
Default Value 9427
Related Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X/Y
DFTAR-R Shading target VL (R) entry: front side

Detail To enter the shading target value of Red of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream reading.
When replacing the DADF/Reader Unit, Scanner Unit, or Reader Upper Cover Unit, execute DF-
WLVL1 and DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the DADF/Reader Unit
Default Value 299
Related Service Mode COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD > TARGET-R
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1/2
269
9. Service Mode
DFTAR-G Shading target VL (G) entry: front side
Detail To enter the shading target value of Green of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream reading.
Default Value 309
Related Service Mode COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD > TARGET-G
DFTAR-B Shading target VL (B) entry: front side

Detail To enter the shading target value of Blue of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream reading.
Default Value 307
Related Service Mode COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD > TARGET-B
DFTAR-BW Shading target VL (B&W) entry: front

Detail To enter the B&W shading target value of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream reading.
Default Value 315
Related Service Mode COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD > TARGETBW
270
9. Service Mode
50-RG RG clr displace correct: 50% book mode
Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction that occurs
at 50% copyboard reading.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value -333
Supplement/Memo 50% reading: 300 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction
50-GB GB clr displace correct: 50% book mode

Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction that occurs
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value 333
100-RG RG clr displace correct: 100% book mode

Unit 0.001 line
Default Value -333
Supplement/Memo 100 reading: 600 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction
100-GB GB clr displace correct: 100% book mode

Unit 0.001 line
Default Value 333
271
9. Service Mode
50DF-RG RG clr displace crrct: 50% DADF, front
at 50% DADF mode.
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value -333
50DF-GB GB clr displace crrct: 50% DADF, front

at 50% DADF mode.
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value 333
100DF-RG RG clr displace crrct: 100% DADF, front

at 100% DADF mode.
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value -333
100DF-GB GB clr displace crrct: 100% DADF, front

at 100% DADF mode.
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value 333
272
9. Service Mode
OFST-BW0 Adj Img Read Sns 1 offset: frt,B&W,300dpi
Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for
front side) in black mode with 300 dpi.
Default Value 138
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 2 (Center) of the Scanner Unit (for
Default Value 138

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 3 (Front) of the Scanner Unit (for
Default Value 138
OFST-CL0 Adj Img Read Sns 1 offset: frt,clr,300dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for
front side) in color mode with 300 dpi.
Default Value 138
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 2 (Center) of the Scanner Unit (for
Default Value 138
273
9. Service Mode
Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 3 (Front) of the Scanner Unit (for
Default Value 216
GAIN-BW0 Adj Img Read Sns 1 gain: frt,B&W,300dpi

Detail To adjust the gain of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in
black mode with 300 dpi.
Default Value 54
GAIN-CL0 Adj Img Read Sns 1 gain: frt,clr,300dpi

Detail To adjust the gain of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in
color mode with 300 dpi.
Default Value 84
LED-BW-R Scan Unit LED lgt time(R): frt,B&W,300dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the red color LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in black mode
with 300 dpi.
Default Value 1000
LED-BW-G Scan Unit LED lgt time(G): frt,B&W,300dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the green color LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in black mode
with 300 dpi.
Default Value 1000
274
9. Service Mode
LED-BW-B Scan Unit LED lgt time(B): frt,B&W,300dpi
Detail To adjust the lighting time of the blue color LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in black mode
with 300 dpi.
Default Value 1000
LED-CL-R Scan Unit LED lgt time(R): frt,clr,300dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the red color LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in color mode
with 300 dpi.
Default Value 1000
LED-CL-G Scan Unit LED lgt time(G): frt,clr,300dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the green color LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in color mode
with 300 dpi.
Default Value 1000
LED-CL-B Scan Unit LED lgt time(B): frt,clr,300dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the blue color LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in color mode
with 300 dpi.
Default Value 1000
■ IMG-REG
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > IMG-REG
MAGV-C1 Adjustment of total magnification ratio at pickup from a cassette
Detail To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at pickup
from a cassette.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image width is reduced by 0.085%. (The feeding speed
increases, and the image is reduced.)
Use Case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch positive/negative by +/- key) and press OK key.
Caution If the value is significantly changed from the initial settings, paper size mismatch may occur.
Default Value 6
275
9. Service Mode
MAGV-C2 Adjustment of total magnification ratio at pickup from an option cassette
from an option cassette.
Default Value 0
MAGV-MF1 Adjustment of total magnification ratio at Pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray (1/1 speed)
from the Multi-purpose Tray.
Default Value 4
MAGV-MF2 Adjustment of total magnification ratio at Pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray (1/2 speed)
Default Value 4
MAGV-DU1 Adjustment of total magnification ratio at Pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray (1/1 speed,
2nd side)
Default Value 0
276
9. Service Mode
MAGV-DU2 Adjustment of total magnification ratio at Pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray (1/2 speed,
2nd side)
Default Value 0
■ DEVELOP
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DEVELOP
DE-OFST Set of developing bias offset value
Detail To set the Vdc offset auto adjustment value for potential control of copy image manually.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
As the value is increased, image becomes darker.
Use Case At the occurrence of an image failure (fogging, low density)
Unit 0.4% (duty)
Default Value 0
■ BLANK
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > BLANK
BLANK-T Adjustment of leading edge margin
Detail To adjust the margin on the leading edge of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 0.0423
mm.
Use Case - When reducing the margin upon user's request
- When increasing the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation
Unit 1 pixel
Default Value 59
BLANK-B Adjustment of trailing edge margin

Detail To adjust the trailing edge margin of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 0.0423
mm.
Use Case - When reducing the margin upon user's request
- When increasing the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation
Unit 1 pixel
Appropriate Target Value 60
Default Value 59
277
9. Service Mode
■ PASCAL
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > PASCAL
OFST-P-K Adj Bk-color density at test print read
Detail To adjust the offset of Bk-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full
adjustment).
As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker.
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Default Value 0
■ HV-PRI
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-PRI
OFST1-DC Adjustment of the primary charging DC bias offset value
Detail To adjust the offset value of the primary charging DC bias. As the value is decreased, image
becomes darker.
Unit 0.4% (duty)
Default Value 0
OFST1-AC Adjustment of the primary charging AC bias offset value

Detail To adjust the offset value of the primary charging AC bias. As the value is decreased, image
becomes darker.
Unit 0.4% (duty)
Default Value 0
■ FEED-ADJ
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ
ADJ-C1 Adjustment of Left Edge registration (standard cassette)
Detail To adjust the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the
standard cassette
+: Left edge margin becomes larger.
-: Left edge margin becomes smaller.
Use Case - When adjusting image position
- After replacing the Engine Controller PCB
Unit 0.25 mm
Default Value 0
278
9. Service Mode
ADJ-C2 Adjustment of Left Edge registration (option cassette)
Detail To adjust the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from an
option cassette.
Unit 0.25 mm
Default Value 0
ADJ-MF Adjustment of Left Edge registration (multi-purpose tray)

Detail To adjust the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the
Multi-purpose Tray.
Unit 0.25 mm
Default Value 0
ADJ-REFE Adjustment of Left Edge registration (duplex)

Detail To adjust the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction at 2-sided pickup.
Unit 0.25 mm
Default Value 0
REG-MF Entry of Multi-purpose Tray Leading Edge registration adjustment value (1/1 speed)
Detail As the value is changed by 1, the leading edge margin is changed by 0.5 mm.
+: Leading edge margin becomes larger. (An image moves downward.)
-: Leading edge margin becomes smaller. (An image moves upward.)
Unit 0.5 mm
Default Value 0
279
9. Service Mode
REG-CST Entry of cassette Leading Edge registration adjustment value
Unit 0.5 mm
Default Value 0
REG-CST2 Entry of option cassette Leading Edge registration adjustment value

Unit 0.5 mm
Default Value 0
REG-DUP Entry of 2nd side Leading Edge registration adjustment value

Unit 0.5 mm
Default Value 0
REG-MF2 Entry of Multi-purpose Tray Leading Edge registration adjustment value (1/2 speed)
Unit 0.5 mm
Default Value 0
280
9. Service Mode
REG-DUP4 Entry of 2nd side Leading Edge registration adjustment value (1/2 speed)
Unit 0.5 mm
Default Value 0
LOOP-CST To adjust the registration arch amount when picking up paper from a cassette.
Detail As the value is changed by 1, the paper feed distance is changed by 0.5 mm.
+: Registration arch amount is increased
-: Registration arch amount is decreased
When paper fed from a cassette is skewed
Unit 0.5 mm
Default Value 10
LOOP-MF Adjustment of registration arch amount: MP Tray pickup

When paper fed from the Multi-purpose Tray is skewed
Unit 0.5 mm
Default Value 8
LOOP-OP Adjustment of the registration arch amount when picking up paper from an option cassette.
When paper fed from an option cassette is skewed
Unit 0.5 mm
Default Value 8
281
9. Service Mode
LOOP-DU Adjustment of registration arch amount at 2-sided pickup [2nd side].
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB
When paper is skewed at 2-sided printing
Unit 0.5 mm
Default Value 4
LOOP-THK Adjustment of registration arch amount: MP Tray pickup, heavy paper

Use Case - When the Heavy 1/Heavy 2/Envelope/Transparency/Label Paper fed from the Multi-purpose Tray
is skewed
- When replacing the Engine Controller PCB
Unit 0.5 mm
Default Value 8
Supplement/Memo Heavy paper can be picked up only from the Multi-Purpose Tray.
FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)

■ INSTALL
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL
STRD-POS Auto adj of read position at stream read
Detail To automatically adjust the Scanner Unit position in feed direction when stream reading original
with DADF.
The adjustment result is reflected to COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS.
Use Case - At DADF installation/uninstallation
- When replacing the Scanner Unit/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Close the DADF.
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
The operation automatically stops after the adjustment.
3) Write the value displayed by COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS in the service label.
Caution Write the adjusted value in the service label.
Required Time 10 sec
Related Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS
CARD-NUM Card first number setting

Detail To set the card first number to be used for Copy Card Reader.
Use Case At installation of the Card Reader
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD
282
9. Service Mode
CARD Set of Copy Card Reader management info
Detail To set the following management information at installation of the Card Reader.
- Register numbers of 300 cards from the number set in CARD-NUM to the department ID.
- Initialize ID and password of the system administrator.
Use Case At installation of the Card Reader
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD-NUM
ERDS ON/OFF of Embedded-RDS

Detail To set whether to use the Embedded-RDS function.
Use Case When using Embedded-RDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0/1
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, COM-LOG
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system
RGW-PORT Setting of UGW port number when using Embedded-RDS

Detail To set the port number of UGW to be used for Embedded-RDS.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Default Value 443
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ERDS, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, COM-LOG
consumables to the sales company's server via SOAP protocol
COM-TEST Execution of Embedded-RDS communication test

Detail To execute Embedded-RDS communication test.
If the connection fails, the information is added to the communication error log.
Use Case When using E-RDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-RSLT, COM-LOG
283
9. Service Mode
COM-RSLT Display of Embedded-RDS comctn test result
Detail To display the Embedded-RDS communication test result.
Use Case When using E-RDS
Display/Adj/Set Range When not in execution: Unknown
When connection is completed: OK
When connection is failed: NG
Default Value Unknown
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG
COM-LOG Display of Embedded-RDS comctn error log

Detail To display the Embedded-RDS communication error log.
The dates, times, and error codes of the latest 5 errors that occurred are displayed.
As for the error detail information, the report can be output by executing ERDS-LOG.
Display/Adj/Set Range Date: 6 digits
Time: 4 digits
Error code: 8 digits
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > ERDS-LOG
TONER-S Toner supply to Developing Assembly

Detail To execute a series of operation necessary for supplying toner to the Drum Unit/Toner Supply area
as a whole.
When the operation is completed, it automatically stops.
Use Case At installation
When replacing the Developing Assembly
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: xxx second (remaining time) , When operation finished normally: END
Required Time Approx. 120 seconds
DRM-INIT For R&D

RGW-ADSW UGW connection destination settings for Embedded-RDS
Detail To change the server URL that the Embedded-RDS uses.
Caution Com-TEST needs to be executed to reflect the settings.
0 : SHA1
1 : SHA2
2 : D1 Environment (for testing)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-TEST
284
9. Service Mode
■ CCD
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CCD
DF-WLVL1 White level adj in book mode: color
Detail To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually
used by the user on the Copyboard Glass.
Use Case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set a paper on the Copyboard Glass.
Caution Be sure to execute DF-WLVL2 in a row.
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
Supplement/Memo The Scanner Unit calculates the white level correction coefficient based on the luminance at
copyboard reading detected with DF-WLVL1 and the luminance at stream reading detected with
DF-WLVL2.
DF-WLVL2 White level adj: stream reading, color

Detail To adjust the white level for stream reading by setting the paper which is usually used by the user
on the DADF.
Use Case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the DADF.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL1.
DF-WLVL2.
DF-WLVL3 White level adjustment in book mode: B&W

Detail To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting a paper which is usually
used by the user on the Copyboard Glass.
Use Case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit
- When replacing the CIS Unit
- When replacing the ADF
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard.
Caution Be sure to execute DF-WLVL4 in a row.
DF-WLVL4.
285
9. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CCD
DF-WLVL4 White level adjustment in ADF mode: B&W
Detail To adjust the white level for ADF scanning automatically by setting a paper which is usually used
by the user on the ADF.
Use Case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Place paper on the ADF.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL3.
DF-WLVL4.
CL-AGC Adj Scan Unit (frt) B&W ref: stream, clr

Detail To automatically adjust the black/white reference level of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream
reading in color mode.
To make the adjustment with both resolutions 300 dpi and 600 dpi.
When this item is executed, the values of OFST-CL0/CL1/CL2, GAIN-CL0 and LED-CL-R/G/B are
automatically calculated.
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > OFST-CL0/CL1/CL2, GAIN-CL0, LED-CL-R/G/B
Supplement/Memo AGC: Automatic Gain Control
BW-AGC Adj Scan Unit (frt) B&W ref: stream, B&W

Detail To automatically adjust the black/white reference level of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream
reading in black mode.
To make the adjustment with both resolutions 300 dpi and 600 dpi.
When this item is executed, the values of OFST-BW0/BW1/BW2, GAIN-BW0 and LED-BW-
R/G/B are automatically calculated.
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > OFST-BW0/BW1/BW2, GAIN-BW0, LED-BW-R/G/B
Supplement/Memo AGC: Automatic Gain Control
■ CLEAR
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR
R-CON Initialization of Reader/DADF
Detail To initialize the factory adjustment values of the Reader/DADF.
Use Case When clearing RAM data of the Reader/DADF
Caution RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
286
9. Service Mode
CARD Clearing of Card Reader connection info
Detail To clear the information on connection of the Copy Card Reader.
The data related to the card ID (department) is cleared, and the ID and password of the system
administrator are initialized.
Use Case When removing the Copy Card Reader
Caution Execute this item after disabling the department ID management.
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > E719-CLR
Supplement/Memo Procedure to remove the Copy Card Reader
1) Disable the department ID management.
3) Execute E719-CLR.
4) Turn OFF the main power switch.
5) Remove the Copy Card Reader.
6) Turn ON the main power switch.
E719-CLR Clearing of E719 error

Detail To clear E719 error (communication error with the Copy Card Reader).
The information on connection of the Copy Card Reader is also cleared.
Use Case When removing the Copy Card Reader
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CARD
Supplement/Memo Procedure to remove the Copy Card Reader
1) Disable the department ID management.
2) Execute CARD.
4) Turn OFF the main power switch.
5) Remove the Copy Card Reader.
6) Turn ON the main power switch.
ALL Clearing of setting information

Detail To clear/initialize the following setting information according to the location set in SIZE-LC.
- User mode setting values
- Service mode setting values (excluding the service counter)
- ID and password of the system administrator
- Communication management/print/jam/alarm/error log
- E719 error (counter meter-installed models only)
The following items are not cleared/initialized.
- Service counter
- Factory adjustment values of the Reader/DADF
Use Case At installation
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SIZE-LC
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > E719-CLR
287
9. Service Mode
ERDS-DAT Initialize of Embedded-RDS setting value
Detail To initialize the Embedded-RDS setting values.
ON/OFF of Embedded-RDS, UGW port number and communication error log set in ERDS, RGW-
PORT, and COM-LOG are cleared.
Use Case When upgrading the Bootable in the Embedded-RDS environment
Caution Use of the SRAM in Embedded-RDS differs depending on the Bootable version. Therefore, unless
initialization is executed at the time of version upgrade, data inconsistency occurs.
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-LOG
ERR Clearing of error

Detail To clear the errors (E001, E002 and E003).
Use Case At error occurrence
■ MISC-R
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-R
SCANLAMP Lighting check of CIS Unit LED: front
Detail To light up the Scanning LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Use Case When replacing the CIS Unit LED
SCAN-ON Execution of copyboard reading operation

Detail To execute reading of the original on the Copyboard Glass.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Place paper on the Copyboard Glass.
■ MISC-P
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-P
SRVC-DAT Output system data list/system dump list
Detail To output the system data list and the system dump list in the form of a report.
System data list: The service software switches and parameters used in FAX function
System dump list: The number of sends/receives, the number of pages sent/received, the number
of sheets printed/read, the number of errors, etc.
Supplement/Memo FAX model only
SYS-DAT Output of system data list

Detail To output the system data list in the form of a report.
The service software switches and parameters used in FAX function are output.
SYS-DMP Output of system dump list

Detail To output the system dump list in the form of a report.
The number of sends/receives, the number of pages sent/received, the number of sheets printed/
read, the number of errors, etc. are output.
288
9. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-P
CNTR Output of counter report
Detail To output the counter values in the form of a report.
The usage of functions (reading, recording, communication and copy) is output.
ERR-LOG Output of error log report

Detail To output the error log in the form of a report.
SPEC Output of spec report

Detail To output the specifications in the form of a report.
The current device specifications such as the location, model information, and ROM version are
output.
ERDS-LOG Output of Embedded-RDS log report

Detail To output the log relating to Embedded-RDS in the form of a report.
The date, time, and code (8 digits) of each error that occurred are output.
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-LOG
TNRB-PRT Output of Toner Container ID report

Detail To output the ID of the Toner Container in the form of a report.
Use Case When checking the ID of the Toner Container
Display/Adj/Set Range 12-digit alphanumeric
■ SYSTEM
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SYSTEM
DOWNLOAD Upgrading of machine firmware: difference
Detail To upgrade the machine firmware using a USB flash drive.
Compare the versions of firmware in the machine and the USB flash drive, and update the
differences.
Use Case At upgrade
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Connect the USB flash drive.
The machine restarts in download mode.
Caution Do not turn OFF/ON the power before "Executing..." disappears.
PANEL-UP Upgrading of Control Panel CPU PCB firm

Detail To upgrade the firmware of the Control Panel CPU PCB using a USB flash drive.
Upgrading is performed when PANEL exists in the root directory of the USB flash drive.
Use Case At upgrade
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1. Connect the USB flash drive.
2. Select the item, and then press OK key.
3. Turn OFF/ON the main power.
Related Service Mode COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION > PANEL
289
9. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SYSTEM
LOGWRITE Writing sublog to USB flash drive
Detail To write sublog that includes the following information to the USB flash drive.
- Job list (job names, user names, and destinations)
- Communications log (destinations and user names)
- Job log (user names and job names)
Use Case When analyzing the cause of a problem
IMPORT Read s-mode set VL from USB flash drive

Detail To read the service mode setting information (excluding those related to Reader/DADF) from the
USB flash drive.
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT
EXPORT Writing of service mode setting value to USB memory

Detail To write the service mode setting information (excluding those related to Reader/DADF) to the
USB flash drive.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Connect the USB flash drive.
"Executing..." disappears when writing is completed.
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > IMPORT
■ SPLMAN
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SPLMAN
SPL14159 ON/OFF of USB device ID fixing
Detail To set whether to fix the USB device ID to "000000000000".
A PC attempts to install the driver every time it is connected to a machine. However, by fixing the
USB device ID, it recognizes that the same machine is connected so that it does not attempt to
install the driver again.
Use Case When saving the trouble of selecting a device used for printing from the candidate devices because
the driver is installed every time a USB is connected
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
SPL41971 Downward curl alleviation mode at heavy paper pickup

Detail To alleviate downward curl when picking up heavy paper.
Use Case Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo When COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > DLVFN-SW is set to 1, this mode does not work.
290
9. Service Mode
SPL65677 Increase of paper leading edge margin
Detail To increase the margin on the leading edge of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased by 0.1 mm.
Actually, a value where the setting value of SPL68676 is subtracted from the setting value of this
item is applied.
The margin settings which are job-specific or based on the printable area are applied regardless
of the setting of this item.
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN > SPL68676
SPL68676 Decrease of paper leading edge margin

Detail To decrease the margin on the leading edge of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is decreased by 0.1 mm.
Actually, a value where the setting value of this item is subtracted from the setting value of
SPL65677 is applied.
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
SPL68677 To increase the margins on the left edge of paper

Detail To increase the margins on the left edge of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased by 0.1 mm.
Actually, a value where the setting value of SPL25607 is subtracted from the setting value of this
item is applied.
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
SPL25607 To decrease the margins on the left edge of paper

Detail To decrease the margins on the left edge of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is decreased by 0.1 mm.
Actually, a value where the setting value of this item is subtracted from the setting value of
SPL68677 is applied.
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
291
9. Service Mode
SPL93822 Setting of department ID count all clear
Detail To set whether to disable clearing of all department ID counts.
Use Case When prohibiting clearing of all department ID counts
Caution Be sure to perform this mode after consulting with the system administrator at user's site.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Default Value 0
SPL78788 Setting of department ID count clear

Detail To set whether to disable clearing of department ID count.
Use Case When prohibiting clearing of department ID count
Caution Be sure to perform this mode after consulting with the system administrator at user's site.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Default Value 0
SPL71100 Setting of the duty of Off-hook PCB

Detail This is the mode to make handsets of particular manufacturers to ring when fax reception mode
is set to "Fax / Tel (Auto Switch)".
Use Case When making the handsets of particular manufacturers to ring at the time of switching Fax/Tel
Default Value 50
SPL00171 Set auto sleep shift time maximum value

Detail To set the maximum auto sleep shift time displayed in [Auto Sleep Time] in [Settings/Registration].
When 0 is set, the time that can be set is 60 minutes maximum.
Use Case When changing the setting time to shift to auto sleep mode
0: 60 minutes
1: Time specified for each model
Default Value 0 (Europe)/1 (Others)
Additional Functions Timer Settings> Auto Sleep Time
Mode
292
9. Service Mode
SPL80100 ON/OFF image left edge mask: book mode
Detail To set whether to mask the left edge of the image at copyboard reading.
When 0 is set, mask with the width based on the specification is applied for each job.
When 1 is set, mask is canceled.
Use Case Upon user's request (to print the left edge of the image)
0: ON
1: OFF
Default Value 0
SPL27354 PC-less update/RMDS preferences

Detail PC-less update/RMDS preferences
0: Production environment/release environment
1: Product environment/staging environment
2: Maintenance environment 1/release environment
3: Maintenance environment 1/staging environment
4: Maintenance environment 2/release environment
5: Maintenance environment 2/staging environment
Default Value 0
SPL84194 ON/OFF of Embedded-RDS

Detail To set ON/OFF of Embedded-RDS function.
0: ON, 1: OFF
SPL32620 ON/OFF of PC-less update function

Detail To set whether to disable the PC-less update function.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Caution When LCDSFLG is 1, the setting of this item is disabled (the PC-less update function is turned
OFF).
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > LCDSFLG
Supplement/Memo PC-less update: A function to directly download the firmware from the GDLS server and update it.
293
9. Service Mode
■ VIFFNC
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > VIFFNC
STOR-DCN Backup of Engine Controller PCB NVRAM
Detail To back up the setting information in NVRAM of the Engine Controller PCB to NVRAM of the Main
Controller PCB.
Use Case Before replacing the Engine Controller PCB
Caution During operation, the setting information changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When
backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with the old
setting information and the new information is deleted.
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > VIFFNC > RSTR-DCN
RSTR-DCN Restoration of Engine Controller PCB NVRAM

Detail To restore the setting information which has been backed up to NVRAM of the Main Controller
PCB to the NVRAM of the Engine Controller PCB.
Use Case After replacing the Engine Controller PCB
Caution During operation, the setting information changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When
backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with the old
setting information and the new information is deleted.
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > VIFFNC > STOR-DCN
OPTION (Specification setting mode)

■ BODY
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > BODY
DFDST-L1 Adj image correction level: stream read
Detail To set whether to perform image correction between originals in the Scanner Unit at stream reading
based on the result of dust detection.
Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the image is more likely to be
corrected because the machine is more likely to respond to small dust.
Decrease the value if a fine image portion is unclear as a result of dust detection correction control.
As the value is smaller, the image is less likely to be corrected because the machine is less likely
to respond to dust.
Use Case - When black line occurs due to dust
- Upon user's request
Caution - If the value is too large, a fine image portion may be unclear. If the value is too small, black lines
may appear on the image.
- When the value of DFDST-L1 is changed to any value other than 0 while the values of DFDST-
L1 and DFDST-L2 are 0, the value of DFDST-L2 is returned to the previous value (a value before
setting 0).
- When setting 0 for DFDST-L2, the value of DFDST-L1 also become 0 automatically (image
correction is not performed).
0: OFF
Default Value 215
Related Service Mode COPIER > OPTION > BODY > DFDST-L2
Supplement/Memo Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With dust detection correction control, the
image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected.
294
9. Service Mode
DFDST-L2 Adj dust detection level: stream reading
Detail To adjust dust detection level for dust avoidance control that is executed in the Scanner Unit after
a stream reading job is completed.
Decrease the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of dust
detection. As the value is smaller, dust is less likely to be detected. When 0 is set, the cleaning
instruction is not displayed.
Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the small dust is more likely to
be detected.
Use Case - When black line appears due to dust
Caution - If the value is too large, the cleaning instruction screen may appear too often since even small
dust that will not appear on the image can be detected.
- If the value is too small, black lines may appear on the image.
- When the value of DFDST-L1 is changed to any value other than 0 while the values of DFDST-
L1 and DFDST-L2 are 0, the value of DFDST-L2 is returned to the previous value (a value before
setting 0).
- When setting 0 for DFDST-L2, the value of DFDST-L1 also become 0 automatically (image
correction is not performed).
0: OFF
Default Value 215
Related Service Mode COPIER > OPTION > BODY > DFDST-L1
Supplement/Memo With the dust avoidance control, reading position is adjusted to minimize dust to be least detected.
The control is performed every time a job is completed.
JM-ERR-R Set of error display of 0071 jam (RCON)

Detail To set whether to display 0071 jam as the error "E996-0071".
In the case of a jam, a log may not be able to be obtained depending on the timing.
By selecting 1 when the 0071 jam occurs, it is displayed as an error so that a log can be obtained.
Use Case When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0071 jam
0: Display as a jam
1: Display as an error
Default Value 0
SIZE-LC Setting of paper size configuration

Detail To set the paper size configuration.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB, set the paper size configuration in this item, and then
clear the setting information in COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ALL.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value in this item, and then press OK key.
2) Execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ALL.
3) Turn ON/OFF the Main Power.
Caution The setting information such as user mode and service mode is initialized by executing COPIER
> FUNCTION > CLEAR > ALL. This item is not initialized.
1: AB configuration
2: Inch configuration
3: A configuration
4: AB/Inch configuration
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ALL
295
9. Service Mode
MIBCOUNT Set of charge counter MIB scope range
Detail To set the range of counter information that can be obtained as MIB (Management Information
Base).
0: All charge counters are obtained
1: Only displayed counter* is obtained
2: All charge counters are not obtained
* : Counter specified by COUNTER 1 to 6
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER1 - 6
NS-CMD5 Limit CRAM-MD5 auth method: SMTP auth

Detail To restrict use of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication.
Use Case Upon user's request
0: SMTP server-dependent
1: Not used
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is
the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol
executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the
user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.
NS-PLN Limit plaintext auth: SMTP auth, noencry

Detail To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext, at the time of SMTP
authentication under the environment where the communication packet is not encrypted.
1: Not used
Default Value 0
NS-LGN Limit LOGIN authentication: SMTP auth

Detail To restrict use of LOGIN authentication at the time of SMTP authentication.
1: Not used
Default Value 0
296
9. Service Mode
SLPMODE Setting of shift to sleep mode
Detail To restrict shift to sleep mode 1/sleep mode 3.
When 1 is set, the machine does not shift to sleep mode.
Use Case When sleep failure occurs
0: Shift is available.
1: Shift is not available.
Default Value 0
SDTM-DSP ON/OFF of auto shutdown shift time dspl

Detail To set whether to display [Auto Shutdown Time] in [Menu].
The setting is enabled only for the model with automatic shutdown function.
Use Case When switching to display or hide the items related to auto shutdown
Caution For the model without automatic shutdown function, the setting is disabled even if it is configured.
0: OFF
1: ON
Additional Functions Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Shutdown Time
Mode
RMT-SW ON/OFF of remote UI service mode

Detail To set whether to allow using service mode on remote UI.
Use Case When using service mode on remote UI
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
PSWD-SW Set password type to enter service mode

Detail To set the type of password that is required to enter when getting into service mode.
2 types are available: one for "service technician" and the other for "system administrator + service
technician".
When selecting the type for "system administrator + service technician", enter the password for
service technician after the password entry by the user's system administrator.
Use Case Upon request from the user who concerns security
0: No password
1: Service technician
2: System administrator + service technician
Default Value 0
297
9. Service Mode
SM-PSWD Password setting for service technician
Detail To set password for service technician that is used when getting into service mode.
Use Case When password is required to get into service mode
Caution Be sure to select 1 or 2 with PSWD-SW in advance.
Default Value 11111111
Related Service Mode COPIER > OPTION > BODY > PSWD-SW
■ FNC-SW
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
T-DLV-BK Bk Tonr Cont prior dvry alarm notice tmg
Detail To set the toner level as the timing to notify the prior delivery alarm for the Bk-color Toner Container.
Use Case When changing the timing to notify the end of life according to the usage status
Caution Since toner level is calculated based on the toner supply count, some errors may occur.
Unit 1%
D-DLV-BK Set Bk Drum prior dvry alarm notice tmg

Detail To set the timing to notify the prior delivery alarm for the Drum Unit (Bk).
Use Case When changing the timing to notify the end of life according to the usage status
Unit 1%
Default Value 100
Related Service Mode COPIER > COUNTER > LF > K-DRM-LF
DLVFN-SW Switching of the operation of the Delivery Cooling Fan

Detail To reduce the exhaust odor by setting the prohibition of Delivery Cooling Fan drive.
Use Case When the exhaust smell is strong
0: Delivery Cooling Fan is operated as specified
1: Delivery Cooling Fan is not operated at all
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo When this mode is set to 1, this mode operates in priority over the settings of downward curl
alleviation mode (SPL41971) at heavy paper pickup (the Delivery Cooling Fan is not rotated at
all) .
298
9. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
LCDSFLG Enabling of local CDS server
Detail To set whether to use the local CDS server.
Use Case When using the local CDS server
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo When local CDS is used, iW EMC/MC device firmware update plug-in is required.
T-END-BK For R&D
■ DSPLY-SW
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW
DRM-WARN Display/hide of Drum Unit replacement message
Detail To set whether to display the Drum Unit replacement message on the Control Panel 7 days later
that the life of the drum reached the specified value (%) or when it reached the Waste Toner full
warning (near full) status.
Use Case When there is need to notify the replacement timing of the drum to the user
0: Hide
1: Display
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > D-DLV-BK
DF-DSP ON/OFF ADF Maintenance Kit initial scrn

Detail To set whether to display [ADF Maintenance Kit] on the initialization screen after replacing parts.
Set 0 if the user does not replace the ADF Maintenance Kit.
Use Case When the user does not replace the parts
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Maintenance> Initialize After Replacing Parts> ADF Maintenance Kit
Mode
TBMSG-SW ON/OFF of Toner Bottle replacement screen display

Detail To set whether to display the toner bottle replacement screen on the Control Panel at the time of
failure of the toner bottle memory.
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 1
299
9. Service Mode
■ ENV-SET
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ENV-SET
IMG-BLD1 Warm-up rotation extension mode
Detail To extend warm-up rotation to prevent condensation due to sudden temperature rise.
Use Case When condensation occurs
0: OFF
1: Extend warm-up rotation for 30 seconds
2: Extend for 60 seconds
3: Extend for 180 seconds
Default Value 0
IMG-BLD2 Changing the charging frequency

Detail To adjust the charging frequency as a measure against the occurrence of moire in specific image
patters or the higher-pitched charging frequency noise associated with the speedup of the host
machine.
Use Case When moire occurs
When alleviating the higher-pitched charging frequency noise
0: 1680Hz (1/1 speed) /840Hz (1/2 speed)
1: 1264Hz (1/1 speed) /840Hz (1/2 speed)
2: 1680Hz (1/1 speed) /985Hz (1/2 speed)
Default Value 0
IMG-BLD3 Black band mode

Detail Black band sequence is executed for every specified number of sheets.
Use Case When image smear occurs
Caution Toner consumption is increased, and the Transfer Roller is likely to be soiled.
0: No black band
1: 75 sheets
2: 50 sheets
3: 25 sheets
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo The mode is Always ON after it is set.
■ CLEANING
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CLEANING
FX-CN-SW Setting of the fixing eject sequence
Detail To reduce the motor drive noise by stopping the fixing eject sequence operation.
Use Case Set ON when receiving a complaint about the motor drive noise during the fixing eject sequence
operation.
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
300
9. Service Mode
■ IMG-LSR
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-LSR
SC-PR-SW Laser Scanner last rotation reduction mode
Detail To reduce the Laser Scanner Motor drive noise by stopping the Laser Scanner Motor immediately
after the completion of last rotation.
Use Case When receiving a complaint about the Laser Scanner Motor drive noise after completion of a job
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
■ IMG-TR
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-TR
TR-BS-SW Transfer bias highland mode
Detail Output of transfer current during printing is controlled so that it will not reach a certain level.
Use Case When an image failure (black dot) due to leakage of transfer bias occurs in a region with low
atmospheric pressure such as highland, where the temperature is lower than 5 deg C.
Caution When the installation site is changed from a highland to a lowland, set this mode OFF.
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
SP-BS-SW Separation bias variable mode

Detail To enhance the separation output by enabling the change of the separation bias.
Use Case When feeding special paper such as thin paper
Caution When using plain paper, set this mode to OFF.
1: HIGH DOWN
2: DOWN
3: N/A
4: UP
Default Value 3
FX-SP-H Paper trailing edge pulling mode

Detail To change the speed of the Fixing Motor at arch control to prevent the transparency trailing edge
from curling up.
Use Case When transparency trailing edge curls up
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
301
9. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-TR
HUM-SW Switching of transfer current output settings by the Environment Sensor
Detail When a failure in the Environment Sensor occurs, output of transfer current is controlled in
accordance with the specified environment.
Use Case When an error (failure) in the Environment Sensor occurs
0: OFF
1: N/L (temperature: 23 deg C, humidity: 5%)
2: N/N (temperature: 23 deg C, humidity: 50%)
3: H/H (temperature: 30 deg C, humidity: 80%)
Default Value 0
FX-BSSW1 Adjustment of the fixing positive bias

Detail To change the fixing positive bias when static offset occurs.
Use Case When static offset occurs due to influence of paper
0: OFF
1: 200V
2: 400V
3: 600V
4: 700V
Default Value 3
FX-BSSW2 Adjustment of the fixing negative bias

Detail To change the fixing negative bias when static offset occurs.
Use Case When static offset occurs due to influence of paper
0: OFF
1: -300V
2: -480 to -500V
3: -600V
4: -700V
Default Value 2
■ IMG-FIX
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX
TMP-TBL2 Set fixing control temp: heavy paper 1, 1/2 speed
Detail To set the fixing control temperature for Heavy 1, Heavy 2, and label paper.
As the value is changed by 1, the control temperature is changed by 1 to 2 deg C.
Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs.
Decrease the value when hot offset occurs.
Use Case When fixing performance in fixing mode for Heavy 1, Heavy 2, or Label Paper is low or when
adjusting the control temperature to prevent slips or to reduce curls
Default Value 0
302
9. Service Mode
TMP-TBL4 Pickup timing adjustment mode
Detail To change the pickup permission temperature.
Increase the value to raise the pickup permission temperature.
Decrease the value to lower the pickup permission temperature.
Use Case When the fixing performance provided in fixing mode is low or when
adjusting the pickup timing to prevent slips or to reduce curls
Default Value 0
TMP-TBL6 Set fixing control temperature: envelope

Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for envelope.
Use Case When hot offset/fixing failure occurs on envelope
Default Value 0
EDG-WAIT Edge temperature rise avoidance mode

Detail To control the fixing edge temperature rise when feeding small size paper.
Lower the throughput down shift temperature.
Use Case When reducing the frequency of entering the down sequence, controlling temperature rise at the
edge, or preventing soiling due to high temperature offset
Caution When 1 is set, fixing edge temperature rise is improved, but productivity is decreased.
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
FIX-SMR Fixing burst alleviation mode

Detail To lighten the set density to reduce fixing burst.
When the fixing burst alleviation mode is set to ON, the set value (density) is shifted to the lighter
direction by 2 steps.
Use Case When fixing burst occurs due to influence of paper
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
TMP-TBLC Setting of Fixing Surface Temperature when setting Special Mode N

Detail To increase or decrease the target temperature/pickup permission temperature during paper feed/
paper interval by the set value (temperature) when the Special Mode N is set.
As the set value is changed by 1, the control temperature is changed by 1 to 2 deg C.
Use Case When adjusting the control temperature in the case that fixing error or hot offset occurs due to
influence of paper
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo This mode is enabled only when the Special Mode N is set.
303
9. Service Mode
TMPTBLC2 Setting of curl straightening mode
Detail To increase or decrease the target temperature during the paper feed by the set value
(temperature) . As the value is changed by 1, the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C.
Use Case When a stacking failure due to curl occurs
Default Value 2
Related Service Mode COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM > FLK-RD
Supplement/Memo When flickering reduction mode is set, this mode is disabled.
TMP-TB14 Set fixing control temperature: plain paper, small size

Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for plain paper (small size) .
Increase the value to raise the fixing control temperature.
Decrease the value to lower the fixing control temperature.
Use Case When adjusting the control temperature in the case that fixing error or hot offset occurs due to
influence of paper
Default Value 0
■ CUSTOM
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM
TEMP-TBL Fixing control temp: plain paper 1, 1/1 speed
Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for plain paper 1 at 1/1 speed.
Use Case When fixing performance in fixing mode for plain paper at 1/1 speed is low or when
adjusting the print fixing control temperature to prevent slips or to reduce curls
Default Value 0
FLK-RD Flickering reduction mode

Detail To reduce flickering of the lamp during printing by changing the fixing temperature control.
Use Case When reducing flickering of the lamp during print operation
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
304
9. Service Mode
■ USER
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
COUNTER1 Display of software counter 1
Detail To display counter type for software counter 1 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user/dealer's request
Caution Display only. No change is available.
0: No registration
COUNTER2 Setting of software counter 2

Detail To set counter type for software counter 2 on the Counter Check screen.
0: No registration

0: No registration

0: No registration

0: No registration
305
9. Service Mode
0: No registration
CNT-SW Set default Display items on charge counter

Detail To set default display items of the charge counter on the Counter Check screen.
For details of each type, refer to the Service Manual.
0: Type1
1: Type2
2: Type3
3: Type4
Default Value 0
CONTROL Charge setting of PDL job

Detail To set charge count transmission of PDL job to the connecting charging management device (Coin
Manager or non-Canon-made control card).
0: Output is available without control card. Not counted.
1: Output is available at insertion of the card. Counted.
2: Output is available at insertion of the card. Not counted.
Default Value 0
CTCHKDSP ON/OFF of charge counter list output

Detail To set whether to print the charge counter in the system management data list.
0: ON
1: OFF
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Output Report > Print List > System Manager Data List
Mode
306
9. Service Mode
TNRB-SW ON/OFF of toner replacement counter display
Detail To set whether to display the toner replacement counter on the Counter Check screen.
When 1 is set, the user can check the toner replacement counter.
0: Hide
1: Display (Toner replacement counters in the 190s)
2 to 3: Not used
Default Value 0
SCALL-SW Switching of Service Call button display

Detail To set the switching of Service Call button display.
0: Hide
1: Display
Default Value 0
SCALLCMP Repair complete notice

Detail To set whether to notify the completion of repair.
0: Not notified
1: Notified
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo When 1 is set, a notification of repair completion is sent. The setting value does not change from
0.
PS-MODE Setting of compatible mode at PS usage

Detail To set the image processing at PS print.
Set 8 when line width differs depending on the drawing position although the same line width is
set.
Setting of a value other than the setting values means that multiple settings are combined.
(Example: 12=4+8)
4: Compatible with EFI at PS 2-sided delivery
8: strokeadjustment is enabled
Any value other than those mentioned above: Not used
Default Value 0
307
9. Service Mode
SMD-EXPT Set of service mode set VL export target
Detail To set whether to export "service mode data" from remote UI.
When 1 is set, "service mode data" is displayed as the target data of export on remote UI. When
installing more than 1 machine at the same time, the same service mode data can be registered.
Use Case When installing more than 1 machine at the same time
0: Not targeted
1: Targeted
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo If selecting "service mode data" as the target data of export on remote UI after setting SMD-EXPT
to 1, service mode data can be exported.
ACC-SLP Set shift to sleep3: Card Reader connect

Detail To set whether to shift to sleep mode 3 when the Card Reader is connected.
0: Not shifted
1: Shifted
Default Value 1
DRMRP-SW Switching of message guiding to the Drum Unit Replacement Procedure

Detail To set whether to display only the end of life or to display the end of life + message prompting user
replacement when the Drum Unit reaches the end of life.
0: Drum Life Reached is displayed
1: Drum Life Reached + message prompting user replacement are displayed
Default Value 0
■ ACC
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC
CARD-SW Set screen dspl: Coin Manager connected
Detail To set coin or card that the user is prompted to insert on the Control Panel when the Coin Manager
is connected.
When 1 is set, authentication operation using the Coin Manager is also required.
0 : Card
1: Card + authentication
2: Coin/Card
Default Value 0
308
9. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC
CC-SPSW Setting of Control Interface Kit
Detail To set whether to support the Control Interface Kit.
Use Case At installation of Coin Manager
Caution Parallel use with Card Reader is not available.
0: Not supported
1: Supported
Default Value 0
UNIF-OF Setting of uniFLOW function

Detail To set whether to enable the uniFLOW function.
If 1 is set for this item and power is turned OFF/ON while the uniFLOW function is in operation,
the function stops. When the setting value is set to 1, the uniFLOW function is disabled.
Use Case - When avoiding failure due to error of the uniFLOW function
- When connecting to the uniFLOW server is failed due to the error in the machine
Caution Be sure to change the value back to 0 after servicing.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default Value 0
■ LCNS-TR
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
ST-BRDIM Install state Display of BarDIMM function
Detail To display installation state of Barcode Printing for PCL when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Barcode Printing for PCL is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-BRDIM.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM.
Default Value According to the setting at shipment
TR-BRDIM Trns lcns key Display of BarDIMM function

Detail To display transfer license key to use Barcode Printing for PCL when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-BRDIM.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits
ST-PCL Install state display of PCL function

Detail To display installation state of PCL function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether PCL function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PCL.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCL.
309
9. Service Mode
TR-PCL Transfer license key dspl: PCL function
Detail To display transfer license key to use PCL function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PCL.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCL.
ST-PS Install state display of PS function

Detail To display installation state of PS function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether PS function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PS.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PS.
TR-PS Transfer license key Display of PS function

Detail To display transfer license key to use PS function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PS.
ST-MPPDF Display of the installation state of Media Print PDF function when disabling the function
with license transfer
Detail Display of the installation state of Media Print PDF function when disabling the function with license
transfer
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-MPPDF.
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR > TR-MPPDF
TR-MPPDF Display of the license key of Media Print PDF function to be disabled and then transferred
Detail To display the license key for the Media Print PDF function to be disabled and then transfered.
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR > ST-MPPDF
ST-ENPDF Install state dspl: encrypted PDF TX func

Detail To display installation state of Encryption PDF when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Encryption PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-ENPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF.
310
9. Service Mode
TR-ENPDF Trns lcns key dspl: encrypted PDF TX func
Detail To display transfer license key to use Encryption PDF when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-ENPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed.
ST-DVPDF Install state dspl: device sign PDF TX

Detail To display installation state of Device Signature PDF when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Device Signature PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-DVPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF.
TR-DVPDF Trns lcns key dspl: device sign PDF TX

Detail To display transfer license key to use Device Signature PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-DVPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed.
ST-U-RDS Install state display of E-RDS function

Detail To display installation state of Embedded-RDS function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Embedded-RDS function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-U-RDS.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-U-RDS.
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > E-RDS
TR-U-RDS Trns license key Display of E-RDS function

Detail To display transfer license key to use Embedded-RDS function when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-U-RDS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-U-RDS.
■ LCNS-OF
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-OF
ST-BRDIM Not use
ST-PCL Not use
ST-PS Not use
311
9. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-OF
ST-MPPDF Not use
ST-ENPDF Not use
ST-DVPDF Not use
ST-U-RDS Not use
COUNTER (Counter mode)

■ TOTAL
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > TOTAL
SERVICE1 Service-purposed total counter 1
Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
A blank sheet is not counted.
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
SERVICE2 Service-purposed total counter 2

Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
TTL Total counter

Detail To display the total of counters of COPY, PDL-PRT, FAX-PRT, RPT-PRT, and MD-PRT.
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL > COPY, PDL-PRT, FAX-PRT, RPT-PRT, MD-PRT
COPY Total copy counter

Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
312
9. Service Mode
PDL-PRT PDL print counter
Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine/2-sided printout is stacked
according to the charge counter at PDL print.
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
FAX-PRT FAX reception print counter

Detail To count up when the FAX reception print is delivered outside the machine/2-sided printout is
stacked.
The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service mode.
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL > TTL
RPT-PRT Report print counter

Detail To count up when the report print is delivered outside the machine/2-sided printout is stacked.
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
MD-PRT Media print counter

Detail To count up when the media print is delivered outside the machine.
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
2-SIDE 2-sided copy/print counter

Detail To count up the number of 2-sided copies/prints when the copy/printout is delivered outside the
machine/2-sided copy/printout is stacked according to the charge counter.
Unit 1 time
Default Value 0
313
9. Service Mode
SCAN Scan counter
Detail To count the number of scan operations according to the charge counter when the scanning
operation is complete.
Unit 1 time
Default Value 0
■ PICK-UP
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PICK-UP
C1 Cassette 1 pickup total counter
Detail To count up the number of sheets picked up from the Cassette 1.
The counter is advanced by printout in service mode.
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
C2 Cassette 2 pickup total counter

Detail To count up the number of sheets picked up from the Cassette 2.
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
MF Multi-purpose Tray pickup total counter

Detail To count up the number of sheets picked up from the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit.
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
2-SIDE 2-sided pickup total counter

Detail To count up the number of sheets picked up in duplex mode.
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
314
9. Service Mode
■ FEEDER
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > FEEDER
FEED DADF original pickup total counter
Detail To count up the number of originals picked up from the DADF regardless of the size.
Use Case When checking the total counter of original pickup by DADF
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
■ JAM
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JAM
TOTAL Total jam counter
Detail To count up the number of total jam occurrences.
Use Case When checking the jam counter
Unit 1 time
Default Value 0
FEEDER DADF jam counter

Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the DADF.
Unit 1 time
Default Value 0
2-SIDE Duplex Unit jam counter

Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Duplex Unit.
Unit 1 time
Default Value 0
MF Multi-purpose Tray jam counter

Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Multi-purpose Tray.
The counter is advanced even in the case of paper size mismatch or misprint.
Unit 1 time
Default Value 0
315
9. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JAM
C1 Cassette 1 jam counter
Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Cassette 1.
Unit 1 time
Default Value 0
C2 Cassette 2 jam counter

Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Cassette 2.
Unit 1 time
Default Value 0
■ DRBL-1
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1
PT-DRM Drum Unit parts counter
Detail Total counter value from the previous replacement
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Default Value 0
C1-PU-RL Display/clear Casstt 1 Pckup Roll prts cntr

Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the Cassette 1 Pickup Roller.
When 0 is set, the parts counter is cleared.
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Enter 0, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
C1-SP-RL Display/clear Casstt 1 Sprtn Roll prts cntr

Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the Cassette 1 Separation
Roller.
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
316
9. Service Mode
C1-FD-RL Display/clear Casstt 1 Feed Roll prts cntr
Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the Cassette 1 Feed Roller.
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
M-PU-RL Display/clear MP Tray Pickup Roll prts cntr

Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup
Roller.
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
FX-UNIT Display/clear Fixing Unit parts counter

Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the Fixing Unit.
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
TR-ROLL Transfer Roller parts counter

Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the Transfer Roller.
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item and enter 0, and then press OK key.
Default Value 0
SP-SC-EL Separation Static Eliminator parts counter

Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the Separation Static
Eliminator.
Default Value 0
317
9. Service Mode
DV-UNT-K Developing Assembly parts counter
Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the Developing Assembly.
Default Value 0
REG-RL Registration Roller parts counter

Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the Registration Roller.
Default Value 0
M-SP-PD Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad parts counter

Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the Multi-purpose Tray
Separation Pad.
Default Value 0
V-FD-RL Vertical Path Roller parts counter

Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the Vertical Path Roller.
Default Value 0
DP-FD-RL Duplex Roller parts counter

Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the Duplex Roller.
Default Value 0
318
9. Service Mode
EXIT-RL Delivery Roller parts counter
Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the Delivery Roller.
Default Value 0
■ DRBL-2
C2-PU-RL Option Cassette Pickup Roller parts counter
Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the Option Cassette Pickup
Roller.
Default Value 0
C2-SP-RL Option Cassette Separation Roller parts counter

Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the Option Cassette Separation
Roller.
Default Value 0
C2-FD-RL Option Cassette Feed Roller parts counter

Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the Option Cassette Feed
Roller.
Default Value 0
C2-VP-RL Option Cassette Vertical Path Roller parts counter

Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the Option Cassette Vertical
Path Roller.
Default Value 0
319
9. Service Mode
DF-SP-PD Display/clear DADF Sprtn Pad prts cntr
Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the DADF Separation Pad.
The number of fed sheets is counted, and the counter is advanced by 1 for paper whose length is
324 mm or less and by 2 for paper whose length is more than 324 mm.
Use Case - When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
- When clearing the counter value after replacement
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
DF-PU-RL Display/clear DADF Pckup Rol Unit prts cntr

Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the DADF Pickup Roller Unit.
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
■ LF
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > LF
K-DRM-LF Display Drum Unit (Bk) estimated life VL(%)
Detail To display how much the Drum Unit (Bk) is close to the end of life in % (percentage).
When a new part is set, the value becomes 0.
Use Case When checking the life of Drum Unit
Unit 1%
320
9. Service Mode
FEEDER (ADF service mode)
ADJUST (Adjustment mode)

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
DOCST Adj image lead edge margin: stream read
Detail To adjust the leading edge margin of the image on the front side at stream reading.
Execute this item when the output image after DADF installation is displaced.
When replacing the Scanner Unit/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is reduced by 0.1 mm. (The image moves upward.)
The setting is applied to the images on both the front and back sides.
Use Case - When installing DADF
- When replacing the Scanner Unit/clearing RAM data
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
LA-SPD Fine adjustment of magnification ratio in stream vertical scanning direction, front side
Detail To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction when
stream reading the surface side of original with ADF.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.01% in vertical scanning direction.
(The feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.)
Use Case - When replacing the ADF
Unit 0.01%
Default Value 0
DOCST2 Adjustment of image leading edge margin: stream, back

Detail To finely adjust the leading edge margin of the image on the back side at 2-sided reading with the
ADF.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leading edge of the image is decreased by 0.1
mm. (The image moves in the direction of the leading edge of the sheet.)
Use Case - When replacing the ADF
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
321
9. Service Mode
FEEDER (ADF service mode) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)

DOCST-R Fine adjustment of image trailing edge margin at stream reading
Detail To make a fine adjustment of the margin at the trailing edge of the image when reading the original
with ADF.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the trailing edge of the image is decreased by
0.1mm. (The image position does not change.)
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
LA-SPD2 Fine adj img ratio: stream,vert scan,bck

Detail To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction on the
back side at stream reading.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.01% in vertical scanning direction.
(The feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.)
The setting is applied to the image on the back side.
Use Case - When installing the DADF
Unit 0.01%
Default Value 0
DOCSTDUP Adjustment of image leading edge margin: stream, front

Detail To finely adjust the leading edge margin of the image on the surface side at 2-sided reading with
the ADF.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leading edge of the image is decreased by 0.1
mm. (The image moves in the direction of the leading edge of the sheet.)
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
322
9. Service Mode
FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)
MTR-ON Operation check of ADF Motor
Detail To start operation check of ADF Motor (M702).
Use Case At operation check
It is driven for approximately 5 seconds and is automatically stopped.
2) Press OK key.
The operation check is completed.
Required Time 5 seconds
FEED-ON Operation check of DADF individual feed

Detail To start operation check of the feed mode specified by FEED-CHK.
Related Service Mode FEEDER > FUNCTION > FEED-CHK
FEED-CHK Specify ADF individual feed operation

Detail To specify the feed mode for ADF.
Feed operation is activated by FEED-ON.
0: 1-sided
1: 2-sided
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode FEEDER > FUNCTION > FEED-ON
Supplement/Memo In the case of DADF (1-path model), operation is the same when either value is set.
323
9. Service Mode
FAX (FAX service mode)
SSSW (Bit switch registration mode)

SSSW No. Bit No. Function
SW 01 (Switch relating to error and copy)
Bit 0 Output of error code for service technician
Bit 1 Error memory dump
Bit 2 to Bit 7 Not in use
SW 02 (Switch relating to settings for network connection condition)
Bit 7 Connect the terminal as F network type 2
SW 03 (Switch relating to echo prevention)
Bit 0 TCF EQM check
Bit 7 Output 1080Hz before CED
SW 04 (Switch relating to prevention of communication problems)
Bit 0 Not in use
Bit 1 Frequency check of CI signal
Bit 2 Not in use
Bit 3 Prohibit T.30 node F kept by both parties
Bit 4 T.30 node F echo timer
Bit 5 Frequency check of CI signal at PBX settings
Bit 6 No CNG transmission at the time of manual transmission
Bit 7 No CED transmission at the time of manual transmission
SW 05 (Switch relating to standard functions and DIS signal settings)
Bit 2 mm/inch conversion (text/photo mode / photo mode)
Bit 3 Prohibition of bit transmission after DIS bit 33
Bit 4 Declaration of cut paper
SW 06 (Switch relating to settings for reading condition)
Bit 4 Scan width (0: A4, 1: LTR)
SW 07 Bit 0 to Bit 7 Not in use
SW 12 (Switch relating to settings for page timer)
Bit 0 Timeout period for 1 page (transmission)
Bit 1
Bit 2 Timeout period for 1 page (Halftone transmission)
Bit 3
Bit 4 Timeout period for 1 page (Reception)
Bit 5
Bit 6 Not in use
Bit 7 Timeout period for 1 page
Bit 2 Execution of mm/inch conversion when sending the received image
324
9. Service Mode
SSSW No. Bit No. Function

SW 14 Bit 2 Setting whether to execute inch to mm conversion in horizontal and vertical scanning directions or in
vertical scanning direction only
Bit 3 Not in use
Bit 4 Declaration of inch-configuration resolution
SW 17 Bit 0 Not in use
Bit 1 Range of selection of transmission level of modem (0: 8 to 15, 1: 0 to 15)
SW 18 Bit 0 Detection of carrier disconnection between DCS and TCF
Bit 1 Time to wait for carrier disconnection between DCS and TCF
Bit 2 Prohibition of communication control for IP network
Bit 3 Number of command retransmission (V1.7 or earlier) (0: 3 times, 1: 6 times)
Bit 4 Retransmission request of all frames after frame loss at JBIG reception (0: Not requested, 1: Reques-
ted)
Bit 3 Prohibition of manual polling operation
SW 25 (Setting for report display function)
Bit 0 Prioritize the received abbreviated name to the dialed abbreviated name
SW 28 Bit 0 Prohibit calling party for V8 procedure
Bit 1 Prohibit called party from V8 procedure
Bit 2 Prohibit calling party from V8 late-start
Bit 3 Prohibit called party from V8 late-start
Bit 4 Prohibit V.34 called party from starting fallback
Bit 5 Prohibit V.34 calling party from starting fallback
MENU (Menu switch registration mode)

No. Parameter Selection
1 Not in use -
2 Not in use -
3 Not in use -
4 Not in use -
5 Not in use -
325
9. Service Mode
No. Parameter Selection

6 Telephone line monitor 0 to 3
0: DIAL
1: SERVICE TECHNICIAN 1
2: SERVICE TECHNICIAN 2
3: OFF
7 Transmission level (ATT) 8 to 15
8 Upper limit of V.34 modulation speed 0 to 5
0: 3,429 BAUD
1: 3,200 BAUD
2: 3,000 BAUD
3: 2,800 BAUD
4: 2,743 BAUD
5: 2,400 BAUD
9 Upper limit of V.34 data speed 0 to 13
0: 33.6 kbps
1: 31.2 kbps
2: 28.8 kbps
3: 26.4 kbps
4: 24.0 kbps
5: 21.6 kbps
6: 19.2 kbps
7: 16.8 kbps
8: 14.4 kbps
9: 12.0 kbps
10: 9.6 kbps
11: 7.2 kbps
12: 4.8 kbps
13: 2.4 kbps
10 OFF Hook signal frequency 0 to 2
0: 50 Hz
1: 25 Hz
2: 17 Hz
NUM (Numeric parameter setting mode)

No. Parameter Allowable setting range
001 Not in use -
002 RTN transmission criteria X 1 to 99%
003 RTN transmission criteria n 2 to 99 times
004 RTN transmission criteria m 1 to 99 lines
005 NCC pause (before ID code) 1 to 60 sec
006 NCC pause (after ID code) 1 to 60 sec
007 Not in use -
008 STORED_DIAL_MODE wait timer 0 to 65 sec
009 Not in use -
010 T.30 T0 timer 0 to 9,999
(55 sec principally: 5,500)
011 T.30 T1 timer (for incoming transmission) 0 to 9,999
(France: 3,500, Others: 3,000)
012 Maximum incoming lines 0 to 65,535 lines
(0: without limitation)
013 T.30 EOL timer 500 to 3,000
(default 13 sec: 1,300)
014 Not in use -
015 Threshold between hokking nad on-hook 0 to 999
016 Lead time to the first response when switching between 0 to 9
FAX and TEL
017 Duration to activate pseudo-RBT cadence 0 to 999
018 Duration to deactivate pseudo-RBT cadence (short) 0 to 999
326
9. Service Mode
No. Parameter Allowable setting range

019 Duration to deactivate pseudo-RBT cadence (long) 0 to 999
020 Duration to activate pseudo-ring cadence 0 to 999
021 Duration to deactivate OFF Hook cadence (short) 0 to 999
022 Duration to deactivate OFF Hook cadence (long) 0 to 999
023 Not in use -
024 Not in use -
025 CNG monitor duration while the answering device is ac- 0 to 999
tivated
026 Not in use -
027 Not in use -
028 Not in use -
029 Off-hook PCB duty settings (For NAC, setting can be 1 to 99
made with SPL71100 in special management mode.)
030 Not in use -
031 Not in use -
032 Not in use -
033 Not in use -
034 Not in use -
035 Not in use -
036 Not in use -
037 Not in use -
038 Not in use -
039 Not in use -
040 Not in use -
041 Not in use -
042 Not in use -
043 Not in use -
044 Not in use -
045 Not in use -
046 Not in use -
047 Not in use -
048 Not in use -
049 NSX MODEL ID 0 to 4,095
050 Not in use -
051 Threshold to detect hook 0 to 9,999
052 Not in use -
053 Set DTMF calling counts when receiving FAX remotely 0 to 9,999
(default: 2)
054 Not in use -
NCU (NCU parameter setting mode)

■ TONE
Parameter No. Function Setting range
001 Tone signal sending time (PSTN) 10 to 9,999 msec
002 Minimum pause time (PSTN) 10 to 9,999 msec
■ PULSE
Item/Parameter No. Function Setting range
FORM Pulse digit format 0: DP (N)
1: DP (N+1)
2: DP (10-N)
327
9. Service Mode
Item/Parameter No. Function Setting range

001 Not in use -
002 Not in use -
003 Pulse dial make ratio 10 to 90%
004 Minimum pause time 10 to 9,999 msec
■ DIAL TONE
Bit Switch
Bit No. Function 1 0

Bit 0 - - -
Bit 1 Cadence pattern check Not detected Detected
Bit 2 Signal frequency Changed Not changed
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 4 Judgment of intermittent signal start from valid ON signal start from either valid ON sig-
nal or OFF signal
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 6 Signal form Continuous Intermittent
Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected
Numeric value parameter

001 T0 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
002 T1 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
003 T2 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
004 T3 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
005 T4 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
006 Signal detection table 0 to 16
007 Signal detection level 0 to 7
008 Number of signal frequency 0 to 9,999
■ 2ND DLTN (2nd DIAL TONE)

Not in use
■ BUSY TONE 0
Bit Switch

Bit 0 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 6 - - -

Not in use
328
9. Service Mode
■ BUSY TONE 1
Bit Switch

Bit 0 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 6 - - -

001 - -
002 T1 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
003 T2 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
004 T3 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
005 T4 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
■ REORDER TONE
Bit Switch

Bit 0 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 6 - - -

001 - -
002 T1 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
003 T2 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
004 T3 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
005 T4 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
329
9. Service Mode
■ AUTO RX

001 CI ON time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
002 CI LONG ON time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
003 CI OFF time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
004 CI LONG OFF time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
005 CI MAX OFF time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
006 CI WAIT time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
007 CI frequency 0 to 9,999 cycle
008 CI frequency lower limit 0 to 9,999 Hz
009 CI frequency upper limit 0 to 9,999 Hz
■ CNG DETECT
Parameter No. Description Setting range

001 At F/T switching CNG MIN ON time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
002 CNG MAX ON time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
003 Not in use -
004 Not in use -
005 Not in use -
006 - -
007 At direct connecting to an- CNG MIN ON time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
008 swering phone CNG MAX ON time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
009 Tolerable time of instantaneous inter- 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
ruption
010 Not in use -
011 Number of detection 0 to 9,999 times
012 Hit ratio 0 to 9,999%
■ SPECIALB
Not in use
■ SPECIALN
Not in use
■ RKEY

001 Connection time of flash 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
002 Connection time of grounding wire 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
■ PBXDIALT (PBX DIAL TONE)

Not in use
■ PBXBUSYT (PBX BUSY TONE)

Not in use
330
9. Service Mode
TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.)
PRINT (Print test mode)

TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.) > PRINT (Print test mode)
PG-TYPE Setting of PG number
Detail To set the PG number of the test print.
Use Case At problem analysis
0: Grid
1: Halftone
2: Solid black
3: Solid white
4: 17 gradations
5 to 7: For R&D use
Default Value 0
COUNT Setting of PG output quantity

Detail To set the number of sheets for PG output.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 1
PHASE Set 1-sided/2-sided print for PG output

Detail To set 1-sided/2-sided print for PG output.
Even if 1 is set for a machine supporting 1-sided print, the setting is disabled.
0: 1-sided
1: 2-sided
Default Value 0
MODE Setting of test print image formation method

Detail To set the image formation method for the test print.
If PG-TYPE is 0 or 1, this setting is disabled because a specific image formation method is applied.
0: TBIC
1: Resolution Dither
2: Gradation Dither
3: Tone Dither
4: Hi Resolution Dither
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode TESTMODE > PRINT > PG-TYPE
331
9. Service Mode
THRU Setting of image correction table at test print
Detail To set the image correction table that is used at the time of test print output.
When 0 is set, normal gamma LUT is used so that the density characteristics by the density
correction process can be checked.
When 1 is set, linear gamma LUT is used so that the density characteristics of this machine can
be checked.
0: Normal gamma LUT
1: Through (linear) gamma LUT
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Gamma LUT: Density gradation characteristic table
DENS Adjustment of test print density

Detail To adjust the density of the test print.
As the value is larger, the image gets darker.
Default Value 0
MABK Setting of toner thinning process at test print

Detail To set the toner thinning process at test print.
As the value is larger, toner scattering is reduced
Use Case When toner scattering occurs at test print
0: OFF
1: Mode 1
2: Mode 2
3: Mode 3
4: Mode 4
Default Value 0
FEED Setting of paper source at test print

Detail To set the paper source at the time of test print output.
If this mode is set when there is no Cassette 2 (option Pickup Cassette), the output is made from
Cassette 1 (standard Pickup Cassette).
Caution In case of using the Multi-purpose Tray, be sure to place paper on the tray before executing this
item.
0: Multi-purpose Tray
1: Cassette 1
2: Cassette 2
3: Cassette 3
4: Cassette 4
Default Value 1
332
9. Service Mode
START Output of test print
Detail To output a test print with the PG pattern set in PG-TYPE, MODE, etc.
Related Service Mode TESTMODE > PRINT
FAX (FAX test mode)

■ MODEM
TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.) > FAX (FAX test mode) > MODEM
RELAY-1 NCU relay test 1
Detail To test ON/OFF of relay and port switch of NCU.
This mode is disabled for an NCU with no relay and port switch.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
0: All OFF
1: CML ON/OFF
2: P ON/OFF
3: S ON/OFF
4: H ON/OFF
5: HD ON/OFF
6: R ON/OFF
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode TESTMODE > FAX > MODEM > RELAY-2
Supplement/Memo Available only with the machine with fax installed.
RELAY-2 NCU relay test 2

Detail To test ON/OFF of relay and port switch of NCU.
This mode is disabled for an NCU with no relay and port switch.
0: All OFF
1: CIST2 ON/OFF
2: C1 ON/OFF
3: NORG ON/OFF
4: DCSEL ON/OFF
5: DCLIM ON/OFF
6: IPSEL1 ON/OFF
7: IPSEL2 ON/OFF
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode TESTMODE > FAX > MODEM > RELAY-1
333
9. Service Mode
FREQ Frequency test
Detail To test whether the specified frequency is oscillated.
By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the specified frequency
is oscillated by the tone transmission function of the modem.
Check this with the speaker.
0: OFF
1: 462 Hz
2: 1100 Hz
3: 1300 Hz
4: 1500 Hz
5: 1650 Hz
6: 1850 Hz
7: 2100 Hz
Default Value 0
G3TX G3 signal transmission test

Detail To test whether the specified G3 signal is transmitted.
By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the specific G3 signal
pattern is transmitted at the specified transmission speed by the G3 signal transmission function
of the modem.
0: OFF
1: 300 bps
2: 2400 bps
3: 4800 bps
4: 7200 bps
5: 9600 bps
6: TC7200 bps
7: TC9600 bps
8: 12000 bps
9: 14400 bps
Default Value 0
334
9. Service Mode
DTMFTX DTMF transmission test
Detail To test whether the specified DTMF signal is transmitted.
By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the specified DTMF
signal is transmitted by the DTMF transmission function of the modem.
0: OFF
1: 1
2: 2
3: 3
4: 4
5: 5
6: 6
7: 7
8: 8
9: 9
10: 0
11: *
12: #
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) : Signal method combining two specific frequencies like a
push-tone phone.
Available only with the machine with fax installed.
V34G3TX V.34 G3 signal transmission test

Detail To test whether the specified V.34 G3 signal is transmitted.
By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the specific G3 signal
pattern is transmitted at the specified transmission speed and modulation speed by the G3 signal
transmission function (V.34) of the modem.
A setting value other than 0 is indicated as a 3-digit integer (1st digit: modulation speed, last 2
digits: transmission speed) . A value other than the specified numerical value is invalid.
0: OFF
- First digit (Modulation speed/baud rate)
1: 2400 baud, 2: 2743 baud, 3: 2800 baud, 4: 3000 baud, 5: 3200 baud, 6: 3429 baud
- Last 2 digits (Transmission speed)
01: 2400 bps, 02: 4800 bps, 03: 7200 bps, 04: 9600 bps, 05: 12000 bps, 06: 14400 bps, 07: 16800
bps, 08: 19200bps, 09: 21600 bps, 10: 24000 bps, 11: 26400 bps, 12: 28800 bps, 13: 31200 bps,
14: 33600 bps
Default Value 0
335
9. Service Mode
■ FACULTY
TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.) > FAX (FAX test mode) > FACULTY
G34800TX G3 4800 bps signal transmission test
Detail To test whether the G3 signal is transmitted at 4800 bps.
By closing or opening the DC circuit, the specific G3 signal pattern is transmitted at 4800 bps by
the G3 signal transmission function.
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
DETECT1 Ring detection

Detail To check the ON/OFF state of CI, FC, and hook from the line.
The detection results are displayed on the console (UART) .
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo CI (Calling Identification) : Ring signal
UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) : Console
DETECT2 Calling tone detection test 1

Detail To check calling tone signal and FED.
Set the CML relay to ON and detect the calling tone.
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo CML (Connect Modem to Line) relay: Relay installed at the NCU (Network Control Unit) Board to
switch between the telephone and fax.
DETECT3 Calling tone detection test 2

Detail To check calling tone signal and FED.
Set the CML relay to OFF and detect the calling tone.
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo CML (Connect Modem to Line) relay: Relay installed at the NCU (Network Control Unit) Board to
switch between the telephone and fax.
336
10 Installation
How to Utilize This Installation
Procedure...................................... 338
Checking before Installation..............339
Installation of Host Machine.............. 340
Copy Card Reader-F1.......................351
Control Interface Kit-C1.....................361
Handset-K1....................................... 364
10. Installation
How to Utilize This Installation Procedure
Symbols
The frequently-performed operations are described with symbols in this procedure.
Screw
1x 1x 1x 1x
Packaged Item Unused Parts Install Remove Tighten Loosen
Harness
(Common for Guides Connector Power Cord
and Clamps)
1x 1x 1x 1x
Install Remove Connect Disconnect Connect Disconnect
Power
ON OFF Check the sound Check visually Check Push Cleaning
338
10. Installation
3. Avoid installing the machine near fire, in an area

Checking before Installation subject to dust or ammonia gas. When installing the
machine in a place exposed to direct rays of the sun,
it is recommended that curtains be hung over the
Points to Note on Installation windows.
4. The amount of ozone generated during use of the

Be sure to go through the following before starting the work.
machine is below the harmful level. However, if the
1. Imaging faults can result due to dew condensation machine is used for a long time in a poor-ventilated
that occurs when the machine is moved from a cold room, ozone may smell. To keep the work
place to a warm place. Leave the unpacked machine environment comfortable, the room must be well-
as it is for at least twohours before installing it. ventilated properly.
(Dew condensation: When a metallic object is brought 5. None of the machine feet should float. The machine
from a low-temperature place to a high-temperature must be held level constantly.
place, water vapor around it is cooled abruptly and
consequently water drops stick to the surface of the 6. The machine must be installed at least 100mm away
metallic object.) from the surrounding walls and there must be an
adequate space for operating the machine.
2. The maximum weight of the machine is approx.
22.8kg (ADF model, not include a drum unit, a toner
cartridge). Accordingly, two or more persons are 100 mm or more
required to lift the machine. Be sure to keep the
machine in a horizontal position when lifting it. 457 mm
■ Message for Unidentified Toner

Cartridge 327 mm
This machine is equipped with the function which displays the

following message after identifying the Toner Cartridge 265 mm 520 mm
information by reading the IC Tag.
Message: "The remaining Toner information cannot be 7. Install the machine in a well-ventilated place. Do not
detected properly. A non-Canon Cartridge or a Cartridge with install the machine close to the ventilation duct of
the wrong item number may be inserted, or no Cartridge is the room.
inserted."
Though the machine is continuously used after clearing the
message, the function will not properly operate, such as the
remaining Toner detection.
The cause of the message appearance will be as follows.
• No Cartridge is inserted.
• A non-Canon Cartridge may be inserted.
• A Cartridge with the wrong item number may be inserted.
• The IC Tag of the Toner Cartridge is fault.
• The IC Tag reading function of the machine is fault.
Selecting the Site of

Installation
The followings are the condition for installation environment.
It is better to see the planned location of installation before
carrying the host machine in the user site.
1. The host machine can singly connect to the outlet of

rated +/-10V, 15A or more.
2. The installation site must be in the following

environment. Especially, avoid installing the
machine near the faucet, water boiler, humidifier, or
refrigerator.
• Operating environment:Temperature: 10.0 to 30.0
deg C, Humidity: 20 to 80%
339
10. Installation
Installation of Host Machine

3.
Unpacking the Machine and NOTE:
The Toner Cartridge may not be supplied depending on
Removing the Packaging the models.
Materials
1.
Toner Cartridge
Copyboard Cover Model

Cord and Plug
and Printer Model Only
Label
2.
340
10. Installation
Checking the Contents NOTE:

• Hand the supplied LAN cable to a user, and then
explain the usage of the LAN to refer to user's guide.
[1] Toner Cartridge X 1 [2] LAN Cable X 1 • When the length of the LAN cable is not enough,
(For Korea / China and Europe (For Asia except India) explain that purchase the cable (the shield type more
Copyboard Cover Model only)
than Category 5) of the off-the-shelf items and use it
to the user.
• Hand the supplied Speed Dial Label to a user.
Installation Procedure
[3] Glass Cleaning Label [4] Speed Dial Label X 1
(ADF Model only, (Fax Model only)
except for China and Korea) NOTE:
When placing this machine on the Cassette Feeding
Module, be sure to install the Cassette Feeding Module
before installing this machine. (About the procedure for
installing the Cassette Feeding Module, refer to the
Cassette Feeding Module Installation Procedure.)
[5] Power Cord X 1 [6] Telephone Cord X 1
1.
(2-Contact type)
Fax Model only
[7] Telephone Cord X 1 [8] PTT Plug X 1

(6-Contact type; For EU) (For EU, Use in Germany)
Fax Model only Fax Model only
[9] PTT Plug X 1 [10] PTT Plug X 1

(For EU, Use in France) (For EU, Use in UK)
Fax Model only Fax Model only
[10] PTT Cable X 1

(For KOREA)
2. Remove all packing tapes and cushioning materials
Fax Model only from outside of the machine.
<others>
• Including guides
341
10. Installation
3. 6.
NOTE:
The Left Door can open fully by two steps.
4.
7.
5.
8.
342
10. Installation
9. 12.
NOTE:
Check that the Left Door is fully opening when the Drum
Unit cannot be removed.
13.
NOTE:
Install the Drum Unit along the rails inside the Machine
until it stops.
10.
14.
11.
343
10. Installation
15. 17.
NOTE:
Unpacking the Toner Cartridge.
16.
CAUTION:
• Do not shake the Toner Cartridge.
• Do not touch the portions A, B, or C shown in the
illustration.
C
A
18.
NOTE:
Install the Toner Cartridge inside the machine until it stops.
344
10. Installation
19. 22.
NOTE:
The front cover cannot close when the Toner Cartridge is
not set properly.
20.
23.
2
1
21.
24.
345
10. Installation
25. 28.
NOTE:
Remove the Protection Sheet on the Control Panel.
2
26.
Protection Sheet
Affixing the Label

■ ADF Model only (Except for China /
Korea)
1.
27.
346
10. Installation
Connecting the Power Cord

2.
NOTE:
Affix the label in the appropriate language. 1.
Glass Cleaning Label
3.
Turning ON the Power
ON
Host Machine Settings (Start

Setup Guide)
The Start Setup Guide screen appears when the power is
turned ON for the first time after the machine is installed.
Follow the instructions displayed on the display to configure
the settings of the Host Machine.
1. Connect the power plug of the Host Machine to the

machine and the power outlet.
2. Turn ON the main power switch.
3. Select the appropriate language with the cursor keys

(▲/▼), and press the OK key.
347
10. Installation
4. "Check that orange tape on the toner cartridge has

been removed. , / Next" is displayed. Check it and
3. Inform the system administrator at the installation
press the OK key.
site that installation of the Host Machine is complete,
5. "Start mixing toner. Duration: Approx. 3 min. , / and then ask for the network setting.
Start" is displayed. Check it and press the OK key.
6. Select the location with the cursor keys (▲/▼), and NOTE:
press the OK key. • Hand the supplied LAN cable to a user, and then
explain the usage of the LAN to refer to user's guide.
7. "Load paper in Drawer. " is displayed. Check it and • When the length of the LAN cable is not enough,
press the OK key. explain that purchase the cable (the shield type more
than Category 5) of the off-the-shelf items and use it
8. Select the Time Zone with the cursor keys (▲/▼), to the user.
and press the OK key.
9. Enter the Date and Time with the cursor keys (▲/▼),
and press the OK key. NOTE:
Network setting cannot be executed unless logging in as
an administrator. Factory default password is as follows.
Checking the Operation and Factory default password is as follows.
Manager ID : 7654321 or 0
the Print Image PIN : 7654321 or 0
1. Place original on the copyboard glass, and then CAUTION:

copy it by feeding paper from the cassette and To perform the network setting, the following Additional
manual-feed tray to check the operation and the Functions items must be set "ON".
resultant print image. > [Network Settings] > OK > [Manager ID:
• Check that abnormal sound is not generated. 7654321] > OK > [Pin: 7654321] > ID > [TCP/IP
• Check the image quality at respective Settings]
magnifications.
• Check that the document is copied normally on the
specified number of sheets.
• When image adjustment is necessary, refer to the 4. Turn OFF the main power.
chapter of the adjustment.
Connecting to Telephone Line

Connecting to the Network
(Fax Model only)
(Network Model only)
This steps perform only for Fax Model.
This steps perform only for Network Model.
1. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
2. Connect the LAN Cable to the LAN port of the Host

Machine and the Router, and then turn ON the Main
Power Switch.
348
10. Installation
■ Preparation of Telephone Cord

2. Specify the initial Fax Settings.
1. Connect the PTT Plug matched the field or area to

the Telephone Cord (6-contact type).
NOTE:
This step performs only for Europe.
Do not connect the Telephone Cord (2-contact type) with
the PTT Plug.
NOTE:
When stopping the Fax settings on the way, push the Stop
Key to exit the Fax setup screen.
1x
Follow the instructions on the screen to specify a fax
number, a unit name, and a receive mode. Refer to the
User's Guides for details about each mode.
• How to use a user name]
When you send a document, the sender
information that you registered is printed on the
recipient’s paper.
• Selecting <Set Up Later>]
If you select <Set Up Later>, the receive mode is
set to <Auto>. Later, when you want to configure
the fax settings, display the fax setup screen by
pressing > [Fax Settings] > OK > [Fax Setup
Guide]
■ Basic Setting
NOTE:
When “System Manager Information Settings” is set, be
sure to follow the direction of user administrator in order
to log in as an administrator.
In this steps, make only minimum settings required for FAX

communication.
1. Turn ON the Main Power Switch.
349
10. Installation
2. Send the test document from this machine to

another machine that can handle the
3. When [Connect Telephone Line] appears on the
communication test to check that this machine can
display, connect the telephone cable as the
send the data correctly.
following illustration.
3. Send the test document from the target to this
machine to check if the machine can receive the
document properly.
Handset
Telephone
Telephone line connector
4. Exit the fax setup screen, and then restart the

machine.
5. Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10

seconds before turning it ON again. If the telephone
line types are not detected automatically, see the
User's Guides and set a telephone line manually.
Fax communication test

Perform the communication test to check if FAX function
works correctly.
1. Switch the control panel display to [Fax] screen.
350
10. Installation
Copy Card Reader-F1 Checking the Contents

■ Copy Card Reader-F1
Check Item of the Contents
[1] Card Reader Unit X 1 [2] Screw
The parts with a diagonal line in the contents list will not be (RS tight; M4x10) X 1
used during installation.
Points to Note on Installation

• To install this equipment, the Copy Card Reader
Attachment-E1 is required.
• This equipment and the Handset cannot be used at the [3] Toothed Washer X 1
same time.
Essential Items to Be
Performed Before Installation
• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and
disconnect the power plug from the outlet.
WARNING:
• If performing work without disconnecting the
power plug of the host machine, it may cause
electrical shock.
• If disconnecting the power plug without
turning OFF the main power, it may cause
damage of the machine.
• When turning OFF the main power, follow the below

procedure.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host
machine.
2. All the blinking in the Control Panel disappears.
Installation Outline Drawing
351
10. Installation
■ Copy Card Reader Attachment-E1 Installation Procedure

[1] Card Reader Lower [2] Card Reader Lower
Mounting Plate X 1 Cover X 1 ■ Assembling the Card Reader
1.
[3] Card Reader [4] Screw

Harness X 1 (Binding; M4x6) X 1
1x
[5] Wire Saddle [6] Wire Saddle

(Large) X 2 (Small) X 1
[7] Screw [8] Edge Saddle X 1

(TP; M4x16) X 2
[9] Cord Guide X 1
352
10. Installation
2. 4.
NOTE:
1x Use the Screw removed in step 2.
1x
NOTE:
The removed Screw is used in step 4.
5.
3. NOTE:
Use the Screw and the Toothed Washer removed in step
3.
1x
1x
NOTE:
The removed Screw and Toothed Washer are used in step
5.
6.
1x
353
10. Installation
■ Removing the Covers

3.
1.
3x
2.
4.
[A]
[A]
5.
4x
354
10. Installation
■ Installing the Card Reader Unit

6.
Claw 1.
1x
3 1
7.
NOTE:
4x The removed screw is used in step 4.
355
10. Installation
2. 3.
1x
1x
4.
CAUTION:
When installing the Speaker, take care that it don't
pinch or damage to the Speaker Harness.
NOTE:
Use the Screw removed in step 1.
1x
2
356
10. Installation
5. 8.
4x
6. 9.
Wire Saddle (Small)
Wire Saddle (Large)
7.
3x
357
10. Installation
10. 12.
TP 3x
M4x16
2x
13.
CAUTION:
When installing the Card Reader Lower Cover, take
care that it don't pinch or damage to the Card Reader
Harness.
11.
Binding
M4x6
1x
1x
358
10. Installation
14. 17.
3x
15. 18. Connect the power plug to the host machine and
outlet.
NOTE:
Be sure to check that there is no burr.
19. Turn ON the main power switch of the host machine.
Setting After Installation
Configure the card management information settings in

service mode.
1. Enter the Service mode, and enter the first number

of the card used by the user.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD-NUM
2. Enter the Service mode, and press the OK key to

enable the card.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD
• The 300 pieces of cards become available from the
number set in step 1.
3. Execute the following menu to enable the

16. Department ID management.
• Menu > System Management Settings >
Department ID management On/Off > ON > OK
4. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch to

enable the settings.
5. Check that a message [Insert the card.] appears.
NOTE:
How to enter System Management Settings.
• Enter the Manager ID : (Default value: 7654321 or 0)
• Enter the PIN : (Default value: 7654321 or 0)
• Press the "ID" key.
359
10. Installation
6. Insert a card which card number has been

registered, and check that the machine operates
normally.
NOTE:
When changing the number of cards after specifying the
settings, specify the following settings.
• Enter the Service mode, and enter the first number of
the card used by the user.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD-NUM
• Enter the Service mode, and press the OK key to
enable the card.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD
• Turn OFF and ON the main power switch to enable
the settings.
360
10. Installation
Control Interface Kit-C1 Installation Outline Drawing
Checking the Contents
[1] CC-VI Cable X 1 [2] D-SUB Support Plate

X1
[3] Washer (Large) X 2 [4] Hexagonal Screw

(Washer(Small),Nut) X 2
Do not use a Nut
1.
3x
Essential Items to Be
• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and
WARNING:
electrical shock.
2.
NOTE:
procedure. Be sure to check that there is no burr.
machine.
361
10. Installation
3. 5.
NOTE:
4x Be sure to tighten the Hexagonal Screw with needlenose
pliers.
2x
4.
1x
6.
4x
362
10. Installation
7.
3x
8.
9.
ON
363
10. Installation
Handset-K1 Essential Items to Be

Points to Note on Installation • Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and
Install this device to a model with the Fax function.
This equipment and the Copy Card Reader cannot be used
at the same time. WARNING:
Checking the Contents electrical shock.
[1] Handset X 1 [2] Handset Base X 1

procedure.
machine.
[3] Handset Base [4] Cord Guide X 1

Holder X 1 Installation Outline Drawing
[5] Knurled Screw X 2 [6] Screw

(Binding; M3x35) X 2
364
10. Installation
3.
1.
Knurled
Screw
2x
4.
2.
Binding
M3x35
1x
HAND SET
EXT
LINE
2x
365
10. Installation
5. 6.
Center
3.0 mm
1x
7. Connect the power plug to the outlet.
8. Turn ON the main power switch.
9. Check that the dial tone is heard from the Handset.
366
APPENDICES
Service Tools.................................... 368
General Circuit Diagram....................369
General Timing Diagram................... 370
List of Backup Data........................... 371
List of Items Which Can Be Imported
.......................................................373
Soft counter specifications................ 390
Service Tools
Service Tools
Oils and Solvents

Name Usage Composition Remarks
Alcohol Cleaning (e.g.) glass, plastic, • Fluoride-family hydrocar- • Do not put near fire.
rubber, external covers. bon • Procure locally
• Alcohol Surface activating • Substitute: IPA (isopropyl
agent alcohol)
• Water
Alcohol Cleaning (e.g.) metal, oil stain, • Fluoride-family hydrocar- • Do not bring near fire.
toner stain bon • Procure locally
• Chlorine-family hydrocar- • Substitute: MEK
bon
• Alcohol
Grease Application (e.g.) gear, shaft of - • Jicc Corp.
the CIS unit • Tool No. : FY9-6005 (85g)
Lubricating oil (HP-300) Application (e.g.) bushing (L/R) • Composition oil • Dow Corning Corp.
of the pressure roller • Tool No. : CK-8012 (100g)
Conducting grease Application (e.g.) contact plate • Mineral oil • FLOIL GE-676
spring, developing sleeve elec- • Tool No. : FY9-6023 (20g)
trode
Oil glass cleaner Application (e.g.) stream reading - • TAIHO KOHZAI
glass • Tool No. : FY9-6035 (80ml)
368
General Circuit Diagram

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PCB11
SR6 FUSE
Waste Toner
SR10 Full Sensor CONNECTING
FM3 SL3 SR1
Delivery Full PCB Image Formation Part Cassette 2 Cassette 2
SR11 CL1 M3 Sensor
3 2 1 3 2 1
Pre-registration 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1
Cooling Fan Pickup Solenoid Paper Sensor
F Registration CL Fixing Motor J159 J171
J624 SR13 SR17 SL F
Sensor Clutch M Cassette 1 Toner Sensor 2 1
1 2 1 2 3
FM1 J169 2 1 Paper Sensor SR18 J502L 1 2
1 2 3
3 2 1 FM2 Delivery SL5 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Laser Scanner Unit J243

J502DH 2
J502D
1 1 2 3
J501
3 2 1
Power Supply 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Environment 1 2
SR14 J156 Cooling Fan Multi- J168L M1 1 2 3 J155L
SR12 Cooling Fan 1 2 3 J151 M2 J158

Sensor
3 2 1
321
J155H
Arch Sensor purposeJ168LH Main Motor
SOLD13
SOLD14
3 2 1
FSR_M_CW_CCW
Multi-purpose J168D
3 2 1
Polygon Motor 3 2 1 J155D J900L
FSR_M_DEC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SNS_TN_FULL
J163L
J161DHTray Pickup
P_FULL_SNS
SL2
FSR_M_ACC
FSR_M_FG
M
J161L 1 2 3 J801 J163DH 1 2 3 4 5 6
Tray Paper Sensor
M
3 2 1
Cassette 1
+24VU
+24VU
Solenoid
SL
123 3 2 1 J161D 2 4 6 8 10 12 J900LH
J163D 6 5 4 3 2 1
GND
GND
+3.3VR
3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
+3.3VR
J165 4 3 2 1
GND
1 2
GND
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 1 2 3 4 5
J157 3 2 1
J154L 1 2 3
SL 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5
J802 J172
1 2 3
J164L Pickup Solenoid
1 2 3 J153L 1 2 4 3 2 1 J164LH
SL1
J170
3 2 1 J154DH3 2 1
J152L
1 2
J154D J153H J162L 3 2 1 J152DH J900H
J164D
Duplex Solenoid 1 2
FUSE_DETECT
MM_DEC
2 1
REGI_CL
MM_MFG
SNS CST_P
LOOP_SNS
MM_ACC
MP_P_SNS
GN
ENV_AN_HUM
+3.3VH
ENV_AN_TMP
J152D
REGI_SNS
+3.3VR
GND
3 2 1
+3.3VR
PSU_FAN_LOCK
J153D
GND
+3.3VR
2 1
+24VC
+24VU
+24VU
+3.3VH
SL
+3.3VR
+3.3VR
+3.3VR
/VDO2
/VDO1
J162DH
GND
GND
VDO2
VDO1
CNT2
CNT1
CNT0
PROCESS_FAN_LOCK
P_FAN_LOCK
GND
/BD1
GND
GND
GND
DEV_LEVEL_SEN_D
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J900D
GND
GND
GND
/TN_SNS_CNK
+3.3VH
+24VC
PO_ACC
PO_DEC
1 2 J162D
+24VF
+24VP
PO_FG
GND
+24VE
+24VC
GND
GND
/OPCCHK
+3.3VR
GND
CST_SL
+24VF
GND
OPCST_SL
OP_P_SNS
GND
GND
GND
+24VF
MULTI_SL
GND
E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 11
10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E
J231 J215 J220 J219 J213 J214 J212 J221 J210 J209 J233 J211 J230 J205 J204
PCB1
J203 J220 J240 J202 J201
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 8 6 4 2 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
P_CANCEL_SNS1
P_CANCEL_SNS2
11 9 7 5 3 1 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
SL01
TH_AN_M
ADF Reader Unit
TH_AN_S
SNS_P0
+3.3VR
+3.3VR
+3.3VR
+3.3VR
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
SR02 ADF SR03
M02
/SCLK
/VDO1
SGND
/VDO2
SGND
/VDO1
Document Disengagement
/BDO
VDO2
SGND
/SC
GND
CIS Unit
PRACFOT_P
/FSRPWM_N
Reader Motor
FSRPWM_P
/PRACPWM
/DISDCPWM
PRACMONI
PRDCPWM
FSRFOT_N
DVDCPWM
DISDCFOT
PRACDRV
PRDCFOT
DVDCFOT
DVACFOT
PCB5
/TRPPWM
DVACON
Solenoid
TRNFOT
TRPFOT
SR01 Sensor HP Sensor
+3.3VH
M01
+24VH
+24VH
NC
M
GND
GND
GND
CONTROL PANEL PCB Document End SL
ADF Motor
MT13 3 2 1
1 2 1 2 3 4
J1 Sensor J910 M
3 2 1
3 2 1
2 4 6 8 10 12 J1902
1 3 5 7 9 11
J908L 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4
J1911 3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25
J1901
D 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
J908D 6 5 4 3 2
J1915H
1
4 3 2 1
J1901H
J621
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 D
J907 J908DH J1914 J1915
PCB6
FT602
J1914HJ1905
SOLD94
SOLD93
SOLD95
1 2
/RESET
6 5 4 3 2 1
/SCL
/AOP
+3.3V
J1904
HVT PCB
/SI
GND
CSI
RX
TX
1 2 3 4 5 6
GND
+5V
GND
J903L 2 1
J903LH 6 5 4 3 2 1
1
J1903
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6
J182DH J37DH
J182D 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 J37D
J182L J37L
TR_CABLE
MT12
J167
1 2 3 J89
1 3 5 7 9 11 1 2 3
1 3 5 7 9 11
2 4 6 8 10 1 2 3
2 4 6 8 10 12 1 2 3 4 5 67 8 9 101112 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J912
MT91
J913
FT601
J903 J904 2 1 2 1
PCB2 SR 16 TH2 TH1
1
Fixing Fixing Sub Fixing Main
Main Controller PCB
ZERO_CROSS
AC_VOLTAGE
HEATER_ON
CURZX_CPU
J166
Thermistor Thermistor
RELAY_ON
PRE_DET1
PRE_DET2
J938 J908 J922 J932 J933 Pressure
CURRMS
J918 J901 J915 1 2 3 J160
CURLIM
J914
3 4 1 2
J921
3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 4 3 2 1 1 2 3
GND
19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 Release 1 2 3
1 2 3
Sensor 2 SR 5
C C
1
1
SR 15 Fixing Delivery
SOLD8
Fixing Sensor 1
2
Pressure
RMT_TRIP
TRIP_DET
DCC_ON
24S_ON
J22M
2
SOLD28
SOLD27
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J1020 ReleaseJ22F 2 1
J22F 2
SP1 J1025 2
1
1 2 1 H1
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 Speaker
1 2 3 4 5
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
Sensor 1 SW93
Fixing Heater
MT5
MT8 TP3 MT7
3
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 Control Card 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Main Switch
SOLD9
J1101 J1100
+3.3VR
1 2
Interface Kit TH2
GND
+24VE
+24VU
+24VU
GND
Reader
GND
2 1
GND
2
J1024
J1102 LINE CIS Thermo Switch
TP
TP
1 2
J1202
PCB9
SOLD25
SOLD26
+24VS
1
J1201 J1105
3 2
3 2
GND
GND
+3.3V
๓࢝ࣂ࣮SW
4
MT6
TRIP+
PCB8 Modem PCB J1103 TEL J25MJ25F
GND
1 2 3 4 5
J40
1
J1301 NT
3
3
Off Hook
HOT
NT
HANDSET
1 2
1 2
J1104
PCB10 HOT
J26F
PCB
3 2 1
J1302
3 2 1
USBࠉPCB J26M
B B
HOT
NT
NT
HOT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2
121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
J320 J312 J71 1 J71 2 J140 J012
PCB3
AC DRIVER PCB
J02
J01 1 J330
J33
J32
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 78 9 1011121314 1 2 3 4 5 67 8 9 101112
Main Switch Left Cover Switch Front Cover Switch J312
J320
SW94 SW2 SW3
MT92 SOLD23 SOLD21 SOLD5
2 2
HOT SOLD41 1
SOLD7
1 2 3 SOLD6
3
PSU_READY
3.3V
3.3V
P1 SOLD97
GND
HOT
NT
GND
GND
24V
24V
1 1
2 2
3 3 SOLD96
A A
J102
NT
J132
J24 SOLD98
J133
3 4
4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 3 2 1
SOLD24 SOLD22
PCB4
Power Supply PCB
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
369
General Timing Diagram
General Timing Diagram
Basic sequence at printing from cassette 1 ( A4, 2-sided, 1 sheet )

Main Power Switch ON
Sequence Warm-up rotation STBY INTR PRINT LSTR
1 Main Motor(M1)
2 Fixing Motor(M3)
3 Polygon Motor(M2)
4 Laser
5 Pre-registration Sensor(SR11)
7 Charging AC Bias
8 Charging DC Bias
9 Developing AC Bias
10 Developing DC Bias
11 Transfer Bias
12 Separation Static Bias
13 Fixing Bias
14 Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid(SL2)
15 Registration Clutch(SL1)
17 Duplex Solenoid(SL1)
370
List of Backup Data
List of Backup Data
Backup Data
Data Location Replace Delete Backup by User Backup by Service
Engine Con- Main Control- Menu > System Management Settings COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR Yes/No Method Location to be Yes/No Method Location to be
troller PCB ler PCB *1 Initializing Ad- Initializing Key System Man- R-CON *2 SRVC- DAT *3 HIST *4 ALL *5 stored stored
dress Book and Certificate agement Set-
tings
Address Book Main Control- - Clear Clear - - - - - Clear Yes Remote UI *11 PC, USB mem- No - -
ler LUI *12 ory
Settings Manu Preferences Main Control- - Clear - - - - - - Clear Yes Remote UI *11 PC, USB mem- No - -
ler LUI *12 ory
Timer Settings Main Control- - Clear - - - - - - Clear Yes Remote UI *11 PC, USB mem- No - -
ler LUI *12 ory
Common Set- Main Control- - Clear - - - - - - Clear Yes Remote UI *11 PC, USB mem- No - -
tings ler LUI *12 ory
Copy Settings Main Control- - Clear - - - - - - Clear Yes Remote UI *11 PC, USB mem- No - -
ler LUI *12 ory
Fax Settings Main Control- - Clear - - - - - - Clear Yes *6 Remote UI *11 PC, USB mem- No - -
ler LUI *12 ory
Scan Settings Main Control- - Clear - - - - - - Clear Yes Remote UI *11 PC, USB mem- No - -
ler LUI *12 ory
Memory Media Main Control- - Clear - - - - - Clear Yes Remote UI *11 PC, USB mem- No - -
Print Settings ler LUI *12 ory
Printer Set- Main Control- - Clear - - - - - - Clear Yes Remote UI *11 PC, USB mem- No - -
tings ler LUI *12 ory
System Man- Main Control- - Clear - - Clear - - - Clear *8 Yes Remote UI *11 PC, USB mem- No - -
agement Set- ler LUI *12 ory
tings
Key and Certificate Main Control- - Clear - Clear *7 - Clear No - - No - -
ler
Serial Number Main Control- - - - - - - - - - No - - No - -
ler
Job History Main Control- - Clear - - - - - Clear Clear No - - No - -
ler
Service mode Service mode Main Control- - Clear - - - Clear - - - No - - No - -
setting values ler
(Reader)
Service mode Main Control- - Clear - - - - Clear - Clear No - - Yes Service mode USB memory
setting val- ler *9
ues(Main Con-
troller)
Service mode Engine Con- Clear - - - - - - - - No - - Yes Service mode Main Control-
setting values troller *10 ler
(Engine Con-
troller)
*1. Log data such as Mac address, USB serial number, printer-related setting values, scanner-related setting values, user data, and logs are initialized.
*2. The factory adjustment values of the Reader and ADF are initialized.
*3. Service data is cleared. User data is not cleared. The factory adjustment values of the Reader and ADF are not initialized.
*4. The logs (communication management, print, jam, error, and alarm) are cleared.
*5. The user data, service data, logs, and system administrator are initialized. (The system manager ID and password are changed back to the default values.) The factory adjustment values of the Reader and ADF are not initialized.
*6. Excluding Fax Setup Guide
*7. When the key and certificate are initialized, TLS authentication of IEEE802.1X and the SSL setting are changed to "OFF".
*8. The system administrator ID and the password are changed back to the default values. <Counter meter-installed model> ID: 7654321 / PWD: 7654321.
*9. FUNCTION > SYSTEM > IMPORT / FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT
*10. FUNCTION > VIFFNC > STOR-DCN / FUNCTION > VIFFNC > STOR-DCN
*11. Settings/Registration > System Management Settings > Import/Export > Export
371
List of Backup Data
*12. Menu > System Management Settings > Import/Export > Export
372

The following shows items to be imported for this function.
Note that the setting values are not imported in cases such as below:
• Items which are originally not included in a DCM file (e.g.:"Settings/Registration Basic Information" of a DCM file exported
using service mode)
• Not included in the import coverage (Cases A to C)
• There are no options and functions related to setting values
The import coverage shown in the table below is as shown below. Those that are not described here cannot be imported.
Import coverage Description

Case A: The same machine Import to the same machine (for backup and restoration, etc.)
Case B: The same model Import to a different machine of the same model (the same series)
Case C: Different model Import to a different machine of a different model (a different series)
NOTE:
This list is the common list for this function.
Therefore, this list may contain some items that are not supported by this function.
Service Mode
No. Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C
1 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-H-Y Yes - -
2 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-H-C Yes - -
3 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-H-K Yes - -
4 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-HS-Y Yes - -
5 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-HS-C Yes - -
6 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-HS-K Yes - -
7 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-V-Y Yes - -
8 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-V-C Yes - -
9 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-V-K Yes - -
10 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-H-M Yes - -
11 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-V-M Yes - -
12 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-HS-M Yes - -
13 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG BEND-Y Yes - -
14 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG BEND-M Yes - -
15 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG BEND-K Yes - -
16 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LSR-V-M1 Yes - -
17 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LSR-V-M2 Yes - -
18 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LSR-V-C1 Yes - -
19 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LSR-V-C2 Yes - -
20 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LSR-V-K1 Yes - -
21 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LSR-V-K2 Yes - -
22 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG ITBDRBL1 Yes - -
23 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG BEND-C Yes - -
24 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG SLOP-Y Yes - -
25 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG MAGV-C1 Yes - -
26 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG MAGV-C2 Yes - -
27 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG MAGV-MF1 Yes - -
28 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG MAGV-MF2 Yes - -
29 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG MAGV-DU1 Yes - -
30 COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG MAGV-DU2 Yes - -
31 COPIER ADJUST DENS SGNL-Y Yes - -
32 COPIER ADJUST DENS SGNL-M Yes - -
373

33 COPIER ADJUST DENS SGNL-C Yes - -
34 COPIER ADJUST DENS SGNL-K Yes - -
35 COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT-PTY Yes - -
36 COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT-PTM Yes - -
37 COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT-PTC Yes - -
38 COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT-PTY Yes - -
39 COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT-PTM Yes - -
40 COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT-PTC Yes - -
41 COPIER ADJUST DENS T-SPLY-Y Yes - -
42 COPIER ADJUST DENS T-SPLY-M Yes - -
43 COPIER ADJUST DENS T-SPLY-C Yes - -
44 COPIER ADJUST DENS T-SPLY-K Yes - -
45 COPIER ADJUST DENS DMAX-Y Yes - -
46 COPIER ADJUST DENS DMAX-M Yes - -
47 COPIER ADJUST DENS DMAX-C Yes - -
48 COPIER ADJUST DENS P-TG-Y Yes - -
49 COPIER ADJUST DENS P-TG-M Yes - -
50 COPIER ADJUST DENS P-TG-C Yes - -
51 COPIER ADJUST DENS P-TG-K Yes - -
52 COPIER ADJUST DENS DMAX-K Yes - -
53 COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT-PTK Yes - -
54 COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT-PTK Yes - -
55 COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT-C Yes - -
56 COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT-K Yes - -
57 COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT-M Yes - -
58 COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT-Y Yes - -
59 COPIER ADJUST DENS PALPHA-F Yes - -
60 COPIER ADJUST DENS PALPHA-R Yes - -
61 COPIER ADJUST DENS REF-C Yes - -
62 COPIER ADJUST DENS REF-K Yes - -
63 COPIER ADJUST DENS REF-M Yes - -
64 COPIER ADJUST DENS REF-Y Yes - -
65 COPIER ADJUST DENS SGNL-C Yes - -
66 COPIER ADJUST DENS SGNL-K Yes - -
67 COPIER ADJUST DENS SGNL-M Yes - -
68 COPIER ADJUST DENS SGNL-Y Yes - -
69 COPIER ADJUST DENS T-SPLY-C Yes - -
70 COPIER ADJUST DENS T-SPLY-K Yes - -
71 COPIER ADJUST DENS T-SPLY-M Yes - -
72 COPIER ADJUST DENS T-SPLY-Y Yes - -
73 COPIER ADJUST DENS POFST-F1 Yes - -
74 COPIER ADJUST DENS POFST-R1 Yes - -
75 COPIER ADJUST DENS SOFST-F1 Yes - -
76 COPIER ADJUST DENS SOFST-R1 Yes - -
77 COPIER ADJUST DENS POFST-F2 Yes - -
78 COPIER ADJUST DENS POFST-R2 Yes - -
79 COPIER ADJUST DENS SOFST-F2 Yes - -
80 COPIER ADJUST DENS SOFST-R2 Yes - -
81 COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED INTEXP-C Yes - -
82 COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED INTEXP-K Yes - -
83 COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED INTEXP-M Yes - -
84 COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED INTEXP-Y Yes - -
85 COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VCONT-Y Yes - -
86 COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VCONT-M Yes - -
374

87 COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VCONT-C Yes - -
88 COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VCONT-K Yes - -
89 COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK-Y Yes - -
90 COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK-M Yes - -
91 COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK-C Yes - -
92 COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK-K Yes - -
93 COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK2-Y Yes - -
94 COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK2-M Yes - -
95 COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK2-C Yes - -
96 COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK2-K Yes - -
97 COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK3-Y Yes - -
98 COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK3-M Yes - -
99 COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK3-C Yes - -
100 COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK3-K Yes - -
101 COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI LSUB-YDC Yes - -
102 COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFST1-DC Yes - -
103 COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFST1-AC Yes - -
104 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGY Yes - -
105 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGM Yes - -
106 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGC Yes - -
107 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGK1 Yes - -
108 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGK4 Yes - -
109 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-OFF Yes - -
110 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGY2 Yes - -
111 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGM2 Yes - -
112 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGC2 Yes - -
113 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TK12 Yes - -
114 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGY3 Yes - -
115 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGM3 Yes - -
116 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGC3 Yes - -
120 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-N1-1 Yes - -
126 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-R1-1 Yes - -
132 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-H1-1 Yes - -
138 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-C1-1 Yes - -
375

142 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-CP-1 Yes - -
143 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-CP-2 Yes - -
144 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-O-1 Yes - -
145 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-LA-1 Yes - -
146 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-LA-2 Yes - -
147 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-NC-1 Yes - -
148 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-NC-2 Yes - -
149 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-B-1 Yes - -
150 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-B-2 Yes - -
151 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-PA-1 Yes - -
152 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-PA-2 Yes - -
153 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-EN-1 Yes - -
154 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-EN-2 Yes - -
155 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-P-1 Yes - -
156 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-P-2 Yes - -
157 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR T2TR-N1 Yes - -
160 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR T2TR-R1 Yes - -
163 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR T2TR-H1 Yes - -
166 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR T2TR-C1 Yes - -
167 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR T2TR-C2 Yes - -
168 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR T2TR-P Yes - -
169 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR T2TR-LNG Yes - -
170 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-TH-1 Yes - -
171 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-TH-2 Yes - -
172 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR T2TR-TH Yes - -
173 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1ATVCTMG Yes - -
174 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-DUP1 Yes - -
190 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-ENV1 Yes - -
376

206 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-PPR1 Yes - -
222 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REGIST Yes - -
223 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C1 Yes - -
229 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-MF Yes - -
231 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C1RE Yes - -
235 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-MFRE Yes - -
236 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-REFE Yes - -
237 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-THCK Yes - -
238 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-DUP1 Yes - -
240 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LP-FEED1 Yes - -
242 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-SPD Yes - -
243 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-LEFT Yes - -
244 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-MF Yes - -
245 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-MF Yes - -
246 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-MFH1 Yes - -
247 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-MFH2 Yes - -
248 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-N3 Yes - -
377

251 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-MENV Yes - -
252 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-ENV Yes - -
253 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-MFPC Yes - -
254 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-ENV Yes - -
255 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-CST Yes - -
256 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-CST2 Yes - -
257 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-DUP Yes - -
258 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-MF2 Yes - -
260 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LOOP-CST Yes - -
261 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LOOP-MF Yes - -
262 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LOOP-OP Yes - -
263 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LOOP-DU Yes - -
264 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LOOP-THK Yes - -
265 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ EXT-SPD Yes - -
269 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-REFE Yes - -
270 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-MFY Yes - -
271 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-MFX Yes - -
272 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-MFYR Yes - -
273 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-MFXR Yes - -
274 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C1Y Yes - -
275 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C1X Yes - -
276 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C1YR Yes - -
277 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C1XR Yes - -
278 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C2Y Yes - -
279 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C2X Yes - -
280 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C2YR Yes - -
281 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C2XR Yes - -
282 COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MF-MAX Yes - -
283 COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MF-MIN Yes - -
284 COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ CST-VLM1 Yes - -
288 COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-T Yes - -
289 COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-B Yes - -
290 COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-L Yes - -
291 COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-R Yes - -
292 COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-B2 Yes - -
293 COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-ADJ Yes Yes Yes
294 COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-EN Yes Yes Yes
295 COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-CNT Yes Yes Yes
296 COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-EN2 Yes Yes Yes
297 COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-CNT2 Yes Yes Yes
298 COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ DEV-HV-Y Yes - -
299 COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ DEV-HV-M Yes - -
300 COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ DEV-HV-C Yes - -
301 COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ DEV-HV-K Yes - -
302 COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ TR1-HV-Y Yes - -
378

303 COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ TR1-HV-M Yes - -
304 COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ TR1-HV-C Yes - -
305 COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ TR1-HV-K Yes - -
306 COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ TR2SF-HV Yes - -
307 COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ TR2BK-HV Yes - -
308 COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ ICL-HV Yes - -
309 COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ FU-TMP Yes - -
310 COPIER ADJUST SCNR SUB-S-Y0 Yes - -
311 COPIER ADJUST SCNR SUB-S-M0 Yes - -
312 COPIER ADJUST SCNR SUB-S-C0 Yes - -
313 COPIER ADJUST SCNR SUB-S-K0 Yes - -
322 COPIER ADJUST SCNR MAI-S-Y0 Yes - -
323 COPIER ADJUST SCNR MAI-S-M0 Yes - -
324 COPIER ADJUST SCNR MAI-S-C0 Yes - -
325 COPIER ADJUST SCNR MAI-S-K0 Yes - -
334 COPIER ADJUST DEVELOP DE-OFST Yes - -
335 COPIER FUNCTION MISC-P OPF-DSEQ Yes - -
336 COPIER FUNCTION VIFFNC SMEAR-PV Yes - -
337 COPIER FUNCTION VIFFNC FEED-IMP Yes - -
338 COPIER FUNCTION VIFFNC FOG-PV Yes - -
339 COPIER FUNCTION VIFFNC ICL-IMP Yes - -
340 COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL14159 Yes Yes Yes
341 COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL27767 Yes - -
379

368 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL ERDS Yes Yes Yes
369 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL RGW-PORT Yes Yes Yes
370 COPIER OPTION BODY TMIC-BK Yes - -
371 COPIER OPTION BODY TMIC-CMY Yes - -
372 COPIER OPTION BODY MIBCOUNT Yes Yes Yes
373 COPIER OPTION BODY NS-CMD5 Yes - -
374 COPIER OPTION BODY NS-PLN Yes - -
375 COPIER OPTION BODY NS-LGN Yes - -
376 COPIER OPTION BODY SLPMODE Yes Yes Yes
377 COPIER OPTION BODY SDTM-DSP Yes Yes Yes
378 COPIER OPTION BODY PASCL-TY Yes Yes -
379 COPIER OPTION BODY DEV-SP1 Yes - -
387 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW DH-SW Yes - -
388 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW INTROT-1 Yes - -
390 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW DMAX-SW Yes - -
391 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW BK-4CSW Yes - -
392 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW FXWRNLVL Yes - -
393 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW KSIZE-SW Yes Yes -
394 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ORG-LDR Yes Yes -
395 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ORG-B5 Yes Yes -
396 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ORG-B4 Yes Yes -
397 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ORG-LGL Yes Yes -
398 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ORG-LTR Yes Yes -
399 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ORG-LTRR Yes Yes -
400 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW PSCL-MS Yes - -
401 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW AUTO-OUT Yes - -
402 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CPR-SW Yes - -
403 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW DMAX-DAY Yes - -
404 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW T-DLV-BK Yes - -
405 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW T-DLV-CL Yes - -
406 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW D-DLV-BK Yes - -
407 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW D-DLV-BK Yes - -
408 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW D-DLV-CL Yes - -
409 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW JM-ERR-D Yes - -
410 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW TNR-RS Yes - -
380

411 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW TNNEWQCK Yes - -
412 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW R-DR-FAN Yes - -
413 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW PWR-FAN Yes - -
414 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW DLVY-FAN Yes - -
415 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CRG-FANR Yes - -
416 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CRG-FANF Yes - -
417 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ECO-TMP Yes Yes -
418 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW STP-TMP Yes Yes -
419 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW WT-FL-LM Yes - -
420 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW DFAN-SPD Yes - -
421 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW T1CL-UP Yes - -
422 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW DLVFN-SW Yes - -
423 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW IMGCNTPR Yes Yes Yes
424 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW 2TR-TBLS Yes Yes -
425 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW LCDSFLG Yes Yes Yes
426 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CRG-PROC Yes Yes -
427 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CRGLF-K Yes Yes -
428 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CRGLF-CL Yes Yes -
429 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW T-END-BK Yes Yes -
430 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW RPT2SIDE Yes Yes Yes
431 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW 2TR-TBLS Yes Yes -
432 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW BK-4CSW Yes - -
433 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW D-DLV-C Yes - -
434 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW D-DLV-M Yes - -
435 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW D-DLV-Y Yes - -
436 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW DMAX-SW Yes - -
437 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW DV-DLV-C Yes - -
438 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW DV-DLV-K Yes - -
439 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW DV-DLV-M Yes - -
440 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW DV-DLV-Y Yes - -
441 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW FIX-DLV Yes - -
443 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW PREXP-SW Yes - -
444 COPIER OPTION CUSTOM TEMP-TBL Yes - -
445 COPIER OPTION CUSTOM TEMP-TBL Yes Yes -
446 COPIER OPTION CUSTOM FAN-ROT Yes Yes -
447 COPIER OPTION CUSTOM DEV-SP1 Yes - -
455 COPIER OPTION CUSTOM EXT-TBOX Yes - -
456 COPIER OPTION CUSTOM FAN-POST Yes Yes -
457 COPIER OPTION CUSTOM FLK-RD Yes Yes -
381

466 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV AUTO-DH Yes - -
467 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DV-RT-LG Yes - -
468 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV ADJ-VPP Yes - -
469 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV ADJ-VPPN Yes - -
470 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DEVL-THY Yes - -
471 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DEVL-THM Yes - -
472 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DEVL-THC Yes - -
473 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DEVL-THK Yes - -
474 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV TNNEWCNT Yes - -
475 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV TNENDCNT Yes - -
476 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV D-PTN Yes - -
477 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV ADJ-VPP3 Yes - -
478 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DV-RT-KP Yes - -
479 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV ADJ-BLNK Yes - -
480 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV AUTO-DH Yes - -
481 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DELV-DNS Yes - -
482 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DRM-IDL Yes Yes Yes
483 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV TNENDCNT Yes - -
484 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DMX-OF-Y Yes - -
485 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DMX-OF-M Yes - -
486 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DMX-OF-C Yes - -
487 COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DMX-OF-K Yes - -
488 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW T-LW-LVL Yes - -
489 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW DRM-WARN Yes - -
490 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW TNR-WARN Yes Yes -
491 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW WT-WARN Yes Yes -
492 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW PUMF-DSP Yes Yes -
493 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW PUC1-DSP Yes Yes -
497 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW CLN-SEL Yes Yes -
498 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW CLN-SEL Yes Yes -
499 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW DF-DSP Yes Yes -
500 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW 2TR-DSP Yes Yes -
501 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW ITB-DSP Yes Yes -
502 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW FXU-DSP Yes Yes -
503 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW CRGLW-LV Yes Yes Yes
504 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW LOCAL-SZ Yes Yes -
505 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW T-LW-BK Yes - -
506 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW T-LW-CL Yes - -
507 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW COM10-DL Yes Yes -
508 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW DRM-CNTR Yes - -
509 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW DVLF-DSP Yes Yes -
510 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW FIX-LFC Yes - -
511 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW FIX-WARN Yes - -
512 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW FXMSG-SW Yes Yes Yes
513 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW EXTH-SW Yes Yes -
514 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW FIX-WRN1 Yes Yes Yes
515 COPIER OPTION CLEANING OHP-PTH Yes - -
516 COPIER OPTION CLEANING ITBB-TMG Yes - -
517 COPIER OPTION CLEANING DR-CL-L Yes - -
518 COPIER OPTION CLEANING DR-CL-T Yes - -
382

519 COPIER OPTION CLEANING ITB-CL-L Yes - -
520 COPIER OPTION CLEANING ITB-CL-T Yes - -
521 COPIER OPTION CLEANING FX-CN-SW Yes - -
522 COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON PSCL-TBL Yes - -
523 COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON SCR-SLCT Yes Yes -
524 COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON TNR-DWN Yes - -
525 COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON TMIC-BK Yes Yes -
526 COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON TMIC-BK Yes - -
527 COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON TMIC-BK Yes - -
528 COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON TMIC-CMY Yes - -
529 COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON SCR-SW Yes - -
530 COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON ERS-SEL2 Yes - -
531 COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON BGE-OFS Yes - -
532 COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON REGM-SEL Yes - -
533 COPIER OPTION IMG-SPD FX-D-TMP Yes - -
534 COPIER OPTION IMG-SPD FIX-ROT Yes - -
535 COPIER OPTION IMG-SPD ARC-INT1 Yes - -
537 COPIER OPTION IMG-SPD DWN-TMP3 Yes Yes -
540 COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX NEGA-GST Yes - -
541 COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FX-S-TMP Yes - -
542 COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TBL2 Yes - -
550 COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FXS-TMP2 Yes - -
555 COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FXST2-N2 Yes - -
556 COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FXST2-UH Yes - -
557 COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FLYING Yes - -
561 COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TB10 Yes - -
564 COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FXS-TM10 Yes - -
565 COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FIXMIXBD Yes Yes -
571 COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX PRE-FXRL Yes - -
383

576 COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX EDG-WAIT Yes - -
577 COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FIX-SMR Yes - -
578 COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TBLC Yes - -
579 COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMPTBLC2 Yes - -
582 COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FX-WNKL Yes Yes -
583 COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX EXTH-LP Yes - -
584 COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FIX-RTTH Yes - -
586 COPIER OPTION FEED-SW EVLP-SPD Yes - -
587 COPIER OPTION FEED-SW PINT-REG Yes - -
588 COPIER OPTION FEED-SW REGASST Yes - -
589 COPIER OPTION IMG-LSR PRI-CLN Yes - -
590 COPIER OPTION IMG-LSR SC-PR-SW Yes - -
591 COPIER OPTION IMG-TR 2TR-RVON Yes - -
592 COPIER OPTION IMG-TR TR-BS-SW Yes - -
593 COPIER OPTION IMG-TR SP-BS-SW Yes - -
594 COPIER OPTION IMG-TR FX-SP-H Yes - -
595 COPIER OPTION IMG-TR HUM-SW Yes - -
596 COPIER OPTION IMG-TR FX-BSSW1 Yes - -
597 COPIER OPTION IMG-TR FX-BSSW2 Yes - -
598 COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER1 Yes - -
604 COPIER OPTION USER CNT-SW Yes - -
605 COPIER OPTION USER CONTROL Yes - -
606 COPIER OPTION USER B4-L-CNT Yes - -
607 COPIER OPTION USER CTCHKDSP Yes - -
608 COPIER OPTION USER TNRB-SW Yes - -
609 COPIER OPTION USER SCALL-SW Yes Yes Yes
610 COPIER OPTION USER SMD-EXPT Yes - -
611 COPIER OPTION USER ACC-SLP Yes Yes Yes
612 COPIER OPTION USER TRY-STP Yes - -
613 COPIER OPTION USER P-CRG-LF Yes - -
614 COPIER OPTION USER DRMRP-SW Yes Yes -
615 COPIER OPTION USER OP-SZ-DT Yes Yes -
616 COPIER OPTION USER DOC-REM Yes Yes -
617 COPIER OPTION USER HDD-USE Yes Yes -
618 COPIER OPTION USER SZCHKSW Yes Yes -
619 COPIER OPTION CST C2-K-SW Yes Yes Yes
622 COPIER OPTION CST CST1-P1 Yes Yes -
626 COPIER OPTION CST CST-K-SW Yes Yes Yes
384

627 COPIER OPTION ACC COIN Yes - -
628 COPIER OPTION ACC CARD-SW Yes - -
629 COPIER OPTION ACC CC-SPSW Yes - -
630 COPIER OPTION ACC C2-EXIST Yes - -
631 COPIER OPTION ACC IN-TRAY Yes - -
632 COPIER OPTION ACC OUT-TRAY Yes - -
633 COPIER OPTION ENV-SET IMG-BLD1 Yes - -
636 COPIER OPTION ENV-SET AINR-TM Yes - -
637 COPIER OPTION ENV-SET CLD-REV Yes Yes -
638 COPIER OPTION ENV-SET INTRTMPH Yes - -
639 COPIER OPTION ENV-SET INTRTMPL Yes - -
640 COPIER OPTION ENV-SET LES-CNDS Yes - -
641 SORTER ADJUST CENT-ALG - Yes - -
642 SORTER ADJUST FR-ST-PS - Yes Yes -
643 SORTER ADJUST FR-STP-X - Yes - -
644 SORTER ADJUST FR-STP-Y - Yes - -
645 SORTER ADJUST INF-ALG1 - Yes - -
646 SORTER ADJUST INF-ALG2 - Yes - -
647 SORTER ADJUST INSTP-F1 - Yes - -
648 SORTER ADJUST INSTP-R1 - Yes - -
649 SORTER ADJUST MSTP-2P - Yes - -
650 SORTER ADJUST RBLT-PRS - Yes - -
651 SORTER ADJUST STP-2P - Yes - -
652 SORTER ADJUST SFT-SPD - Yes - -
653 SORTER ADJUST PULL-SPD - Yes - -
654 SORTER ADJUST SFT-AMT - Yes Yes -
655 SORTER ADJUST ST-ALG1 - Yes - -
656 SORTER OPTION FR-ST-PO - Yes Yes -
657 SORTER OPTION FR-ST-SW - Yes Yes -
658 SORTER OPTION MD-SPRTN - Yes - -
659 SORTER OPTION MSTP-TMG - Yes Yes Yes
660 SORTER OPTION MSTP-WT - Yes Yes -
661 SORTER OPTION PADL-TM - Yes Yes -
662 SORTER OPTION TRY-PSTN - Yes Yes -
663 SORTER OPTION TRY-STP - Yes Yes -
664 SORTER OPTION EXEC-SFT - Yes Yes -
665 SORTER OPTION MD-SPRTN - Yes - -
666 FAX SSSW SW01 - Yes - -
385

698 FAX MENU 005 - Yes - -
699 FAX MENU 006 - Yes - -
700 FAX MENU 007 - Yes - -
701 FAX MENU 008 - Yes - -
702 FAX MENU 009 - Yes - -
703 FAX MENU 010 - Yes - -
704 FAX NUM 002 - Yes - -
705 FAX NUM 003 - Yes - -
706 FAX NUM 004 - Yes - -
707 FAX NUM 005 - Yes - -
708 FAX NUM 006 - Yes - -
709 FAX NUM 008 - Yes - -
710 FAX NUM 010 - Yes - -
711 FAX NUM 011 - Yes - -
712 FAX NUM 012 - Yes - -
713 FAX NUM 013 - Yes - -
714 FAX NUM 015 - Yes - -
715 FAX NUM 016 - Yes - -
716 FAX NUM 017 - Yes - -
717 FAX NUM 018 - Yes - -
718 FAX NUM 019 - Yes - -
719 FAX NUM 020 - Yes - -
720 FAX NUM 021 - Yes - -
721 FAX NUM 022 - Yes - -
722 FAX NUM 023 - Yes - -
723 FAX NUM 024 - Yes - -
724 FAX NUM 025 - Yes - -
725 FAX NUM 026 - Yes - -
726 FAX NUM 027 - Yes - -
727 FAX NUM 029 - Yes - -
728 FAX NUM 049 - Yes - -
729 FAX NUM 051 - Yes - -
730 FAX NUM 053 - Yes - -
731 FAX NUM 054 - Yes - -
732 FAX NCU TONE 001 Yes - -
733 FAX NCU TONE 002 Yes - -
734 FAX NCU PULSE FORM Yes - -
386

735 FAX NCU PULSE 001 Yes - -
739 FAX NCU DIALTONE BIT Yes - -
740 FAX NCU DIALTONE 001 Yes - -
748 FAX NCU 2ND DLTN BIT Yes - -
749 FAX NCU 2ND DLTN 001 Yes - -
757 FAX NCU BUSTONE0 BIT Yes - -
758 FAX NCU BUSTONE0 001 Yes - -
766 FAX NCU BUSTONE1 BIT Yes - -
775 FAX NCU REORDRTN BIT Yes - -
776 FAX NCU REORDRTN 001 Yes - -
784 FAX NCU AUTO RX 001 Yes - -
387

793 FAX NCU CNGDTCT 001 Yes - -
801 FAX NCU SPECIALB SW01 Yes - -
831 FAX NCU SPECIALN 004 Yes - -
388

861 FAX NCU RKEY 001 Yes - -
862 FAX NCU RKEY 002 Yes - -
863 FAX NCU PBXDIALT BIT Yes - -
864 FAX NCU PBXDIALT 001 Yes - -
872 FAX NCU PBXBUSYT BIT Yes - -
873 FAX NCU PBXBUSYT 001 Yes - -
389
Soft counter specifications

The numbers entered for software counters are classified as follows:
No. Counter Details

000 to 199 Total
200 to 299 Copy
300 to 399 Print
400 to 499 Copy and print
500 to 599 Scan
600 to 699 Memory media print
700 to 799 Reception print
800 to 899 Report print
900 to 999 Transmission
Meanings of symbols in tables

• Copy: Local copy
• Copy A: Local copy
• Print: PDL print + report print
• Print A: PDL print + report print
• Scan: Black and white scan + color scan
*This product does not have the function of "Remote Copy" and "Box Print".
No. Counter Details

071 Toner bottle (Black)
101 Total 1
102 Total 2
104 Total ( Small)
108 Total ( Black1)
109 Total ( Black2)
113 Total ( Black/ Small)
114 Total 1 (2-Sided)
115 Total 2 (2-Sided)
117 Small (2-Sided)
126 Total A1
127 Total A2
129 Total A( Small)
132 Total A( Black1)
133 Total A( Black2)
137 Total A ( Black/ Small)
138 Total A1 (2-Sided)
139 Total A2 (2-Sided)
141 SmallA (2-Sided)
150 Total B1
151 Total B2
153 Total B( Small)
156 Total B( Black1)
157 Total B( Black2)
161 Total B ( Black/ Small)
162 Total B1 (2-Sided)
163 Total B2 (2-Sided)
165 SmallB (2-Sided)
181 Unidentified Toner bottle (Black)
390
No. Counter Details

201 Copy (Total 1)
202 Copy (Total 2)
204 Copy ( Small)
205 CopyA (Total 1)
206 CopyA (Total 2)
208 CopyA ( Small)
209 Local Copy (Total 1)
210 Local Copy (Total 2)
212 Local Copy ( Small)
221 Copy( Black1)
222 Copy( Black2)
228 Copy( Black/ Small)
238 Copy( Black/ Small/2-Sided)
249 CopyA( Black1)
250 CopyA( Black2)
256 CopyA( Black/ Small)
266 CopyA( Black/ Small/2-Sided)
277 Local Copy( Black1)
278 Local Copy( Black2)
284 Local Copy( Black/ Small)
294 Local Copy( Black/ Small/2-Sided)
301 Print (Total 1)
302 Print (Total 2)
304 Print ( Small)
305 Print A (Total 1)
306 Print A (Total 2)
308 Print A ( Small)
313 Print ( Black1)
314 Print ( Black2)
320 Print ( Black/ Small)
330 Print ( Black/ Small/2-Sided)
331 PDLPrint (Total 1)
332 PDLPrint (Total 2)
334 PDLPrint ( Small)
339 PDLPrint ( Black1)
340 PDLPrint ( Black2)
346 PDLPrint ( Black/ Small)
356 PDLPrint ( Black/ Small/2-Sided)
404 Copy+Print ( Black/ Small)
405 Copy+Print ( Black2)
406 Copy+Print ( Black1)
412 Copy+Print ( Small)
413 Copy+Print (2)
414 Copy+Print (1)
422 Copy+Print ( Black/ Small/2-Sided)
501 Scan (Total 1)
505 BlackScan (Total 1)
506 BlackScan (Total 2)
508 BlackScan ( Small)
509 Color Scan (Total 1)
510 Color Scan (Total 2)
512 Color Scan ( Small)
631 Memory Media Print (Total 1)
632 Memory Media Print (Total 2)
391
No. Counter Details

634 Memory Media Print (Small)
639 Memory Media Print (Black1)
640 Memory Media Print (Black2)
646 Memory Media Print (Black/ Small)
656 Memory Media Print (Black/ Small/2-Sided)
701 Receive Print (Total 1)
702 Receive Print (Total 2)
704 Receive Print ( Small)
709 Receive Print ( Black1)
710 Receive Print ( Black2)
716 Receive Print ( Black/ Small)
726 Receive Print ( Black/ Small/2-Sided)
801 Report Print (Total 1)
802 Report Print (Total 2)
804 Report Print ( Small)
809 Report Print ( Black1)
810 Report Print ( Black2)
816 Report Print ( Black/ Small)
921 TX ScanTotal 5(Color )
922 TX ScanTotal 5( Black)
939 Remote Scan(Color )
940 Remote Scan( Black)
945 TX Scan/E-Mail(Color )
946 TX Scan/E-Mail( Black)
959 Memory Media Scan(Color )
960 Memory Media Scan( Black)
392

IR1435 1430 Series Service Manual en 4.0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IR1435 1430 Series Service Manual en 4.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Revision 4.

Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Check visually. Insert the claw.

Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Disconnect the connector. Connect the power cable.

Connect the connector. Disconnect the power cable.

Remove the cable/wire from the Turn on the power.

Install the cable/wire to the cable Turn off the power.

Remove the screw. Loosen the screw.

Install the screw. Tighten the screw.

Cleaning is needed. Measurement is needed.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

2. Technical Explanation (Device).................................................................... 21

3. Technical Explanation (System)................................................................... 81

Version Upgrade Using UST................................................................................................................ 84

4. Periodical Service........................................................................................ 106

5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning............................................................... 112

Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit.................................................................................................. 133

Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Vertical Path Roller......................................................................... 207

E014-0001--: Fixing Motor rotation error............................................................................................. 249

10-0100: Unidentified Toner Bottle (Bk) replacement notification alarm................................................. 257

9. Service Mode................................................................................................ 258

10. Installation.................................................................................................. 337

Installation Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 341

Handling of Laser System

Dieses Gerät ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet.

Turn power switch ON

Main Power Switch

Handling Adhered Toner

Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery

Notes Before it Works Serving

Points to Note at Cleaning

iR1435 iR1435/1435+ Series iR1430

Copy Card Reader-F1

Product name Required options, conditions, etc.

Product name Required options, conditions, etc.

Item Specification / Function

Productivity (Print speed)

Paper type Size 1-sided 2-sided

FAX specifications (imageRUNNER 1435iF/1435iF+ Only)

Type Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm)

Paper type Size Multi-purpose pickup Cassette 1 Cassette 2 *1

Paper type Size Multi-purpose pickup Cassette 1 Cassette 2 *1

*1: Cassette Feeding Module-AC1 (option) is named as Cassette 2 when it is installed.

[14] [1] [2] [3]

No. Name No. Name

*1: Availability depending on model.

[12] [2] [3]

No. Name No. Name

[11] [2] [3]

No. Name No. Name

Cross Sectional View

No. Name No. Name

[9] [17] [18]

[8] [21] [20]

No. Name Function

No. Name Function

Main Power Switch

Energy Saver Key

Equipped switch and key is described below.

■ Points to Note on Turning OFF/ON the Power Switch

Original exposure system

CIS unit ADF unit

Transfer Laser scanner unit